Tutoriel

Part Number: Aspen Plus® 11.
1
September 2001
Copyright (c) 1981-2001 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Aspen Plus®, Aspen Properties®, Aspen Engineering Suite, AspenTech®, ModelManager, the aspen leaf logo and
Plantelligence are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Cambridge, MA.
BATCHFRAC and RATEFRAC are trademarks of Koch Engineering Company, Inc.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This manual is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of the
software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Corporate
Aspen Technology, Inc.
Ten Canal Park
Cambridge, MA 02141-2201
USA
Phone: (1) (617) 949-1021
Toll Free: (1) (888) 996-7001
Fax: (1) (617) 949-1724
URL: http://www.aspentech.com
Division
Design, Simulation and Optimization Systems
Aspen Technology, Inc.
Ten Canal Park
Cambridge, MA 02141-2201
USA
Phone: (617) 949-1000
Fax: (617) 949-1030
Contents
For More Information......................................................................................................... xi

Technical Support ............................................................................................................xiii
Contacting Customer Support ..............................................................................xiii
Hours ....................................................................................................................xiii
Phone.................................................................................................................... xiv
Fax......................................................................................................................... xv
E-mail .................................................................................................................... xv
Mixers and Splitters 1-1

Mixer Reference...............................................................................................................1-2
Flowsheet Connectivity for Mixer .......................................................................1-2
Specifying Mixer..................................................................................................1-3
EO Usage Notes for Mixer...................................................................................1-4
FSplit Reference...............................................................................................................1-5
Flowsheet Connectivity for FSplit .......................................................................1-5
Specifying FSplit..................................................................................................1-6
EO Usage Notes for FSplit...................................................................................1-7
SSplit Reference...............................................................................................................1-8
Flowsheet Connectivity for SSplit .......................................................................1-8
Specifying SSplit..................................................................................................1-8
Separators 2-1
Flash2 Reference ..............................................................................................................2-2
Flowsheet Connectivity for Flash2 ......................................................................2-2
Specifying Flash2.................................................................................................2-3
EO Usage Notes for Flash2..................................................................................2-3
Flash3 Reference ..............................................................................................................2-4
Flowsheet Connectivity for Flash3 ......................................................................2-4
Specifying Flash3.................................................................................................2-5
Decanter Reference ..........................................................................................................2-6
Flowsheet Connectivity for Decanter...................................................................2-6
Specifying Decanter .............................................................................................2-7
EO Usage Notes for Decanter ..............................................................................2-9
Sep Reference.................................................................................................................2-10
Flowsheet Connectivity for Sep .........................................................................2-10
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • iii

Specifying Sep....................................................................................................2-10
EO Usage Notes for Sep.....................................................................................2-11
Sep2 Reference...............................................................................................................2-12
Flowsheet Connectivity for Sep2 .......................................................................2-12
Specifying Sep2..................................................................................................2-12
EO Usage Notes for Sep2...................................................................................2-13
Heat Exchangers 3-1

Heater Reference ..............................................................................................................3-2
Flowsheet Connectivity for Heater ......................................................................3-2
Specifying Heater.................................................................................................3-3
EO Usage Notes for Heater..................................................................................3-3
HeatX Reference ..............................................................................................................3-4
Flowsheet Connectivity for HeatX.......................................................................3-5
Specifying HeatX .................................................................................................3-6
EO Usage Notes for HeatX ................................................................................3-18
MHeatX Reference.........................................................................................................3-19
Flowsheet Connectivity for MHeatX .................................................................3-19
Specifying MHeatX............................................................................................3-20
Hetran Reference............................................................................................................3-23
Flowsheet Connectivity for Hetran ....................................................................3-23
Specifying Hetran...............................................................................................3-24
Aerotran Reference ........................................................................................................3-25
Flowsheet Connectivity for Aerotran.................................................................3-25
Specifying Aerotran ...........................................................................................3-26
HxFlux Reference ..........................................................................................................3-27
Flowsheet Connectivity for HxFlux...................................................................3-27
Specifying HxFlux .............................................................................................3-27
Convective Heat Transfer...................................................................................3-28
Log-Mean Temperature Difference ...................................................................3-28
EO Usage Notes for HXFlux .............................................................................3-28
HTRI-Xist Reference .....................................................................................................3-29
Flowsheet Connectivity for HTRI-Xist..............................................................3-29
Specifying HTRI-Xist ........................................................................................3-30
Columns 4-1
DSTWU Reference ..........................................................................................................4-3
Flowsheet Connectivity for DSTWU...................................................................4-4
Specifying DSTWU .............................................................................................4-4
Distl Reference.................................................................................................................4-5
Flowsheet Connectivity for Distl .........................................................................4-5
Specifying Distl....................................................................................................4-6
SCFrac Reference.............................................................................................................4-7
Flowsheet Connectivity for SCFrac .....................................................................4-7
Specifying SCFrac................................................................................................4-8
RadFrac Reference ...........................................................................................................4-9
iv • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Flowsheet Connectivity for RadFrac..................................................................4-11
Specifying RadFrac ............................................................................................4-12
EO Usage Notes for RadFrac .............................................................................4-17
Free-Water and Rigorous Three-Phase Calculations .........................................4-18
Efficiencies.........................................................................................................4-19
Algorithms..........................................................................................................4-20
Rating Mode.......................................................................................................4-21
Design Mode ......................................................................................................4-22
Reactive Distillation...........................................................................................4-23
Solution Strategies..............................................................................................4-24
Physical Properties .............................................................................................4-26
Solids Handling..................................................................................................4-26
Sizing and Rating of Trays and Packings...........................................................4-27
MultiFrac Reference.......................................................................................................4-28
Flowsheet Connectivity for MultiFrac ...............................................................4-30
Specifying MultiFrac..........................................................................................4-31
Efficiencies.........................................................................................................4-38
Algorithms..........................................................................................................4-39
Rating Mode.......................................................................................................4-39
Design Mode ......................................................................................................4-39
Column Convergence.........................................................................................4-40
Free Water Handling ..........................................................................................4-43
Solids Handling..................................................................................................4-43
PetroFrac Reference .......................................................................................................4-44
Flowsheet Connectivity for PetroFrac................................................................4-46
Specifying PetroFrac ..........................................................................................4-48
Efficiencies.........................................................................................................4-52
Convergence.......................................................................................................4-53
Rating Mode.......................................................................................................4-54
Design Mode ......................................................................................................4-54
Free Water Handling ..........................................................................................4-55
Solids Handling..................................................................................................4-55
EO Usage Notes for PetroFrac ...........................................................................4-56
RateFrac Reference ........................................................................................................4-57
Flowsheet Connectivity for RateFrac.................................................................4-59
The Rate-Based Modeling Concept ...................................................................4-60
Specifying RateFrac ...........................................................................................4-62
Mass and Heat Transfer Correlations.................................................................4-71
References ..........................................................................................................4-77
BatchFrac Reference ......................................................................................................4-78
Flowsheet Connectivity for BatchFrac...............................................................4-80
Specifying BatchFrac .........................................................................................4-80
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • v

Column Setup.....................................................................................................4-80
Column Operation ..............................................................................................4-81
Free-Water and Rigorous Three-Phase Calculations .........................................4-81
Reactive Distillation...........................................................................................4-82
Physical Property Specifications........................................................................4-82
Feed Conventions...............................................................................................4-83
Extract Reference ...........................................................................................................4-84
Flowsheet Connectivity for Extract....................................................................4-85
Specifying Extract ..............................................................................................4-85
EO Usage Notes for Extract ...............................................................................4-86
Reactors 5-1
RStoic Reference..............................................................................................................5-3
Flowsheet Connectivity for RStoic ......................................................................5-3
Specifying RStoic.................................................................................................5-4
EO Usage Notes for RStoic..................................................................................5-6
RYield Reference .............................................................................................................5-7
Flowsheet Connectivity for RYield......................................................................5-7
Specifying RYield ................................................................................................5-8
EO Usage Notes for RYield .................................................................................5-8
REquil Reference .............................................................................................................5-9
Flowsheet Connectivity for REquil......................................................................5-9
Specifying REquil ..............................................................................................5-10
RGibbs Reference ..........................................................................................................5-11
Flowsheet Connectivity for RGibbs...................................................................5-11
Specifying RGibbs .............................................................................................5-12
References ..........................................................................................................5-15
RCSTR Reference ..........................................................................................................5-16
Flowsheet Connectivity for RCSTR ..................................................................5-16
Specifying RCSTR.............................................................................................5-17
RPlug Reference.............................................................................................................5-20
Flowsheet Connectivity for RPlug .....................................................................5-20
Specifying RPlug................................................................................................5-22
RBatch Reference...........................................................................................................5-24
Flowsheet Connectivity for RBatch ...................................................................5-24
Specifying RBatch..............................................................................................5-25
Pressure Changers 6-1

Pump Reference ...............................................................................................................6-2
Flowsheet Connectivity for Pump........................................................................6-3
Specifying Pump ..................................................................................................6-3
EO Usage Notes for Pump ...................................................................................6-7
Compr Reference..............................................................................................................6-8
Flowsheet Connectivity for Compr ......................................................................6-9
Specifying Compr ................................................................................................6-9
EO Usage Notes for Compr ...............................................................................6-12
vi • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

MCompr Reference ........................................................................................................6-13
Flowsheet Connectivity for MCompr ................................................................6-14
Specifying MCompr...........................................................................................6-15
References ..........................................................................................................6-18
Valve Reference .............................................................................................................6-19
Flowsheet Connectivity for Valve......................................................................6-19
Specifying Valve ................................................................................................6-19
Reference............................................................................................................6-27
Pipe Reference................................................................................................................6-28
Flowsheet Connectivity for Pipe ........................................................................6-29
Specifying Pipe ..................................................................................................6-29
Two-Phase Correlations .....................................................................................6-32
Pipeline Reference..........................................................................................................6-33
Flowsheet Connectivity for Pipeline ..................................................................6-34
Specifying Pipeline ............................................................................................6-35
Two-Phase Correlations .....................................................................................6-39
Closed-Form Methods........................................................................................6-41
References ..........................................................................................................6-42
Manipulators 7-1
Mult Reference.................................................................................................................7-2
Flowsheet Connectivity for Mult .........................................................................7-2
Specifying Mult....................................................................................................7-2
EO Usage Notes for Mult.....................................................................................7-3
Dupl Reference.................................................................................................................7-4
Flowsheet Connectivity for Dupl .........................................................................7-4
Specifying Dupl....................................................................................................7-5
EO Usage Notes for Dupl.....................................................................................7-5
ClChng Reference ............................................................................................................7-6
Flowsheet Connectivity for ClChng.....................................................................7-6
Specifying ClChng ...............................................................................................7-6
Analyzer Reference ..........................................................................................................7-7
Flowsheet Connectivity for Analyzer ..................................................................7-8
Specifying Analyzer.............................................................................................7-8
EO Usage Notes for Analyzer..............................................................................7-8
Feedbl Reference..............................................................................................................7-9
Selector Reference..........................................................................................................7-10
Flowsheet Connectivity for Selector ..................................................................7-10
Specifying Selector ............................................................................................7-10
EO Usage Notes for Selector .............................................................................7-11
Qtvec Reference .............................................................................................................7-12
Flowsheet Connectivity for Qtvec......................................................................7-12
Specifying Qtvec ................................................................................................7-12
Measurement Reference.................................................................................................7-14
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • vii

Solids 8-1
Crystallizer Reference ......................................................................................................8-3
Flowsheet Connectivity for Crystallizer ..............................................................8-3
Specifying Crystallizer.........................................................................................8-4
References ............................................................................................................8-9
Crusher Reference ..........................................................................................................8-10
Flowsheet Connectivity for Crusher ..................................................................8-10
Specifying Crusher.............................................................................................8-11
References ..........................................................................................................8-14
Screen Reference............................................................................................................8-15
Flowsheet Connectivity for Screen ....................................................................8-15
Specifying Screen...............................................................................................8-15
Reference............................................................................................................8-17
FabFl Reference .............................................................................................................8-18
Flowsheet Connectivity for FabFl......................................................................8-18
Specifying FabFl ................................................................................................8-18
References ..........................................................................................................8-21
Cyclone Reference .........................................................................................................8-22
Flowsheet Connectivity for Cyclone..................................................................8-22
Specifying Cyclone ............................................................................................8-23
References ..........................................................................................................8-28
VScrub Reference ..........................................................................................................8-29
Flowsheet Connectivity for VScrub...................................................................8-29
Specifying VScrub .............................................................................................8-30
References ..........................................................................................................8-31
ESP Reference................................................................................................................8-32
Flowsheet Connectivity for ESP ........................................................................8-32
Specifying ESP...................................................................................................8-33
References ..........................................................................................................8-35
HyCyc Reference ...........................................................................................................8-36
Flowsheet Connectivity for HyCyc....................................................................8-36
Specifying HyCyc ..............................................................................................8-37
References ..........................................................................................................8-40
CFuge Reference ............................................................................................................8-42
Flowsheet Connectivity for CFuge ....................................................................8-42
Specifying CFuge...............................................................................................8-43
References ..........................................................................................................8-44
Filter Reference ..............................................................................................................8-45
Flowsheet Connectivity for Filter ......................................................................8-45
Specifying Filter.................................................................................................8-45
References ..........................................................................................................8-47
SWash Reference ...........................................................................................................8-48
Flowsheet Connectivity for SWash....................................................................8-48
Specifying SWash ..............................................................................................8-49
CCD Reference ..............................................................................................................8-50
Flowsheet Connectivity for CCD.......................................................................8-50
viii • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Specifying CCD .................................................................................................8-51
User Models 9-1

User Reference .................................................................................................................9-2
Flowsheet Connectivity for User..........................................................................9-2
Specifying User ....................................................................................................9-3
User2 Reference ...............................................................................................................9-4
Flowsheet Connectivity for User2........................................................................9-4
Specifying User2 ..................................................................................................9-5
User3 Reference ...............................................................................................................9-6
Flowsheet Connectivity for User3........................................................................9-6
Specifying User3 ..................................................................................................9-7
EO Usage Notes for User3 ...................................................................................9-7
ACMUser3 Reference ......................................................................................................9-8
Flowsheet Connectivity for ACMUser3 ..............................................................9-8
Specifying ACMUser3.........................................................................................9-8
Hierarchy Reference.......................................................................................................9-10
Flowsheet Connectivity for Hierarchy ...............................................................9-11
Specifying Hierarchy..........................................................................................9-11
Pressure Relief 10-1

Pres-Relief Reference.....................................................................................................10-2
Specifying Pres-Relief........................................................................................10-2
Scenarios ............................................................................................................10-3
Compliance with Codes .....................................................................................10-6
Stream and Vessel Compositions and Conditions .............................................10-6
Rules to Size the Relief Valve Piping ................................................................10-7
Reactions ............................................................................................................10-9
Relief System .....................................................................................................10-9
Data Tables for Pipes and Relief Devices........................................................10-12
Valve Cycling...................................................................................................10-15
Vessel Types ....................................................................................................10-16
Disengagement Models ....................................................................................10-17
Stop Criteria .....................................................................................................10-17
Solution Procedure for Dynamic Scenarios .....................................................10-18
Flow Equations.................................................................................................10-19
Calculation and Convergence Methods............................................................10-22
Vessel Insulation Credit Factor ........................................................................10-22
Additional Reading ..........................................................................................10-23
Advanced Distillation Features A-1

Sizing and Rating for Trays and Packings: Overview .................................................... A-2
Single-Pass and Multi-Pass Trays ....................................................................... A-3
Modes of Operation for Trays............................................................................. A-7
Flooding Calculations for Trays.......................................................................... A-8
Bubble Cap Tray Layout ..................................................................................... A-9
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • ix

Pressure Drop Calculations for Trays ............................................................... A-10
Foaming Calculations for Trays........................................................................ A-10
Packed Columns................................................................................................ A-11
Packing Types and Packing Factors.................................................................. A-11
Modes of Operation for Packing ....................................................................... A-12
Maximum Capacity Calculations for Packing .................................................. A-12
Pressure Drop Calculations for Packing............................................................ A-14
Liquid Holdup Calculations for Packing........................................................... A-15
Pressure Profile Update..................................................................................... A-15
Physical Property Data Requirements............................................................... A-16
References ......................................................................................................... A-16
Column Targeting ......................................................................................................... A-18
Column Targeting Thermal Analysis................................................................ A-18
Column Targeting Hydraulic Analysis ............................................................. A-19
Specifications for Column Targeting and Hydraulic Analysis ......................... A-19
Selection of Key Components........................................................................... A-20
Using Column Targeting Results ...................................................................... A-23
x • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

About This Manual
This manual includes detailed technical reference information for
all Aspen Plus unit operation models and the Pres-Relief model.
The information in this manual is also available in online help and
prompts.
Models are grouped in chapters according to unit operation type.
The reference information for each model includes a description of
the model and its typical usage, a diagram of its flowsheet
connectivity, a discussion of the specifications you must provide
for the model, important equations and correlations, and other
relevant information.
An overview of all Aspen Plus unit operation models, and general
information about the steps and procedures in using them is in the
Aspen Plus User Guide as well as in the online help and prompts
in Aspen Plus.
For More Information

Online Help Aspen Plus has a complete system of online help
and context-sensitive prompts. The help system contains both
context-sensitive help and reference information. For more
information about using Aspen Plus help, see the Aspen Plus User
Guide, Chapter 3.
Aspen Plus application examples A suite of sample online
Aspen Plus simulations illustrating specific processes is delivered
with Aspen Plus.
Aspen Engineering Suite Installation Guide This guide
provides instructions on installation of Aspen Plus and other AES
products.
Aspen Plus Getting Started Guides This set of tutorials includes
several hands-on sessions to familiarize you with Aspen Plus. The
guides take you step-by-step to learn the full power and scope of
Aspen Plus.
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models About This Manual • xi

Aspen Plus User Guide The three-volume Aspen Plus User
Guide provides step-by-step procedures for developing and using
an Aspen Plus process simulation model. The guide is
task-oriented to help you accomplish the engineering work you
need to do, using the powerful capabilities of Aspen Plus.
Aspen Plus reference manual series Aspen Plus reference
manuals provide detailed technical reference information. These
manuals include background information about the unit operation
models available in Aspen Plus, and a wide range of other
reference information. The set comprises:
• Unit Operation Models
• User Models
• System Management
• Summary File Toolkit
• Input Language Guide
Aspen Physical Property System reference manual series
Aspen Physical Property System reference manuals provide
detailed technical reference information. These manuals include
background information about the physical properties methods and
models available in Aspen Plus, tables of Aspen Plus databank
parameters, group contribution method functional groups, and
other reference information. The set comprises:
• Physical Property Methods and Models
• Physical Property Data
The Aspen Plus manuals are delivered in Adobe portable
document format (PDF) on the Aspen Plus Documentation CD.
xii • About This Manual Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models
Technical Support
World Wide Web For additional information about AspenTech
products and services, check the AspenTech World Wide Web
home page on the Internet at: http://www.aspentech.com/
Technical resources AspenTech customers with a valid license
and software maintenance agreement can register to access the
Online Technical Support Center at
http://support.aspentech.com/
This web support site allows you to:
• Access current product documentation
• Search for tech tips, solutions and frequently asked questions
(FAQs)
• Search for and download application examples
• Submit and track technical issues
• Send suggestions
• Report product defects
• Review lists of known deficiencies and defects
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-
Bulletins. These e-Bulletins are used to proactively alert users to
important technical support information such as:
• Technical advisories
• Product updates and Service Pack announcements
Contacting Customer Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and email for
Support customers with a current support contract for this product. For the
most up-to-date phone listings, please see the Online Technical
Support Center at http://support.aspentech.com.
The following contact information was current when this product
was released:
Hours
Support Centers Operating Hours
North America 8:00 – 20:00 Eastern Time
South America 9:00 – 17:00 Local time
Europe 8:30 – 18:00 Central European time
Asia and Pacific Region 9:00 – 17:30 Local time
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models About This Manual • xiii
Phone Support Phone Numbers
Centers
North 1-888-996-7100 Toll-free from U.S., Canada, Mexico
America 1-281-584-4357 North America Support Center
(52) (5) 536-2809 Mexico Support Center
South (54) (11) 4361-7220 Argentina Support Center
America (55) (11) 5012-0321 Brazil Support Center
(0800) 333-0125 Toll-free to U.S. from Argentina
(000) (814) 550-4084 Toll-free to U.S. from Brazil
8001-2410 Toll-free to U.S. from Venezuela
Europe (32) (2) 701-95-55 European Support Center
Country specific toll-free numbers:
Belgium (0800) 40-687
Denmark 8088-3652
Finland (0) (800) 1-19127
France (0805) 11-0054
Ireland (1) (800) 930-024
Netherlands (0800) 023-2511
Norway (800) 13817
Spain (900) 951846
Sweden (0200) 895-284
Switzerland (0800) 111-470
UK (0800) 376-7903
Asia and (65) 395-39-00 Singapore
Pacific (81) (3) 3262-1743 Tokyo
Region
xiv • About This Manual Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models
Fax Support Centers Fax Numbers
North America 1-617-949-1724 (Cambridge, MA)
1-281-584-1807 (Houston, TX: both Engineering and
Manufacturing Suite)
1-281-584-5442 (Houston, TX: eSupply Chain Suite)
1-281-584-4329 (Houston, TX: Advanced Control Suite)
1-301-424-4647 (Rockville, MD)
1-908-516-9550 (New Providence, NJ)
1-425-492-2388 (Seattle, WA)
South America (54) (11) 4361-7220 (Argentina)
(55) (11) 5012-4442 (Brazil)
Europe (32) (2) 701-94-45
Asia and Pacific (65) 395-39-50 (Singapore)
Region (81) (3) 3262-1744 (Tokyo)
E-mail Support Centers E-mail

North America support@aspentech.com (Engineering Suite)
atmdsupport@aspentech.com (Aspen ICARUS products)
mimi.support@aspentech.com (Aspen MIMI products)
pims.support@aspentech.com (Aspen PIMS products)
aspenretail.support@aspentech.com (Aspen Retail products)
acs.support@aspentech.com (Advanced Control products)
AMS.Support@aspentech.com (Manufacturing Suite)
Gabriela.Torres@aspentech.com (Mexico)
South America info@tecnosolution.com.ar (Argentina)
tecnosp@aspentech.com (Brazil)
Europe atesupport@aspentech.com (Engineering Suite)
AMS.Support@aspentech.com (All other suites)
cimview@aspentech.com (CIMVIEW products)
Asia and Pacific atasupport@aspentech.com (Singapore: Engineering Suite)
Region SG_Support@aspentech.com (Singapore: All other suites)
atjsupport@aspentech.com (Tokyo: Engineering Suite)
TK_Support@aspentech.com (Tokyo: All other suites)
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models About This Manual • xv

xvi • About This Manual Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models
CHAPTER 1
Mixers and Splitters
This chapter describes the unit operation models for mixing and
splitting streams. The models are:
Model Description Purpose Use For
Mixer Stream mixer Combines multiple Mixing tees. Stream mixing operations.
streams into one Adding heat streams. Adding work streams
stream
FSplit Stream splitter Divides feed based on Stream splitters. Bleed valves
splits specified for
outlet streams
SSplit Substream splitter Divides feed based on Stream splitters. Perfect fluid-solid separators
splits specified for
each substream
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Mixers and Splitters • 1-1
Mixer Reference
Use Mixer to combine streams into one stream. Mixer models
mixing tees or other types of mixing operations.
Mixer combines material streams (or heat streams or work
streams) into one stream. Select the Heat (Q) and Work (W) Mixer
icons from the Model Library for heat and work streams
respectively. A single Mixer block cannot mix streams of different
types (material, heat, work).
Use the following forms to enter specifications and view results for
Mixer:
Use this form To do this
Input Enter operating conditions and flash convergence
parameters
Block Options Override global values for physical properties,
simulation options, diagnostic message levels, and
report options for this block
Results View Mixer simulation results
Dynamic Specify parameters for dynamic simulations
Flowsheet
Connectivity for
Mixer Material
(2 or more) Material
Water (optional)
Flowsheet for Mixing Material Streams

Material Streams
inlet At least two material streams

outlet One material stream
One water decant stream (optional)
Heat
Heat
(2 or more)
Flowsheet for Adding Heat Streams
1-2 • Mixers and Splitters Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models
Heat Streams
inlet At least two heat streams

outlet One heat stream
Work
Work
(2 or more)
Flowsheet for Adding Work Streams

Work Streams
inlet At least two work streams

outlet One work stream
Specifying Mixer Use the Mixer Input Flash Options sheet to specify operating
conditions.
When mixing heat or work streams, Mixer does not require any
specifications.
When mixing material streams, you can specify either the outlet
pressure or pressure drop. If you specify pressure drop, Mixer
determines the minimum of the inlet stream pressures, and applies
the pressure drop to the minimum inlet stream pressure to compute
the outlet pressure. If you do not specify the outlet pressure or
pressure drop, Mixer uses the minimum pressure from the inlet
streams for the outlet pressure.
You can select the following valid phases:
Valid Phase Solids? Number of Free Phase?
phases? Water?
Vapor-Only Yes or no 1 No V
Liquid-Only Yes or no 1 No L
Vapor-Liquid Yes or no 2 No –
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid Yes or no 3 No –
Liquid Free-Water † Yes or no 1 Yes –
Vapor-Liquid Free-Water † Yes or no 2 Yes –
Solid-Only Yes 1 No S
† Check the Use Free Water Calculations checkbox on the Setup
Specifications Global sheet.
An optional water decant stream can be used when free-water
calculations are performed.
Mixer performs an adiabatic calculation on the product to
determine the outlet temperature, unless Mass Balance Only
Calculations is specified on the Mixer BlockOptions
SimulationOptions sheet or the Setup SimulationOptions
Calculations sheet.
EO Usage Notes for All features of Mixer are available in the EO formulation, except
Mixer the features which are globally unsupported.
FSplit Reference
FSplit combines streams of the same type (material, heat, or work
streams) and divides the resulting stream into two or more streams
of the same type. All outlet streams have the same composition and
conditions as the mixed inlet. Select the Heat (Q) and Work (W)
FSplit icons from the Model Library for heat and work streams
respectively. Use FSplit to model flow splitters, such as bleed
valves.
FSplit cannot split a stream into different types. For example,
FSplit cannot split a material stream into a heat stream and a
material stream.
To model a splitter where the amount of each substream sent to
each outlet can differ, use an SSplit block. To model a splitter
where the composition and properties of the output streams can
differ, use a Sep block or a Sep2 block.
FSplit:
Input Enter split specifications, flash conditions
and calculation options, and key components
associated with split specifications
Block Options Override global values for physical
properties, simulation options, diagnostic
message levels, and report options for this
block
Results View split fractions for outlet streams, and
material and energy balance results
Flowsheet
Material
Connectivity for (2 or more)
Material
FSplit (any number)
Flowsheet for Splitting Material Streams

Material Streams
inlet At least one material stream

outlet At least two material streams
Heat
Heat (2 or more)
(any number)
Flowsheet for Splitting Heat Streams

Heat Streams
inlet At least one heat stream

outlet At least two heat streams
Work
Work (2 or more)
(any number)
Flowsheet for Splitting Work Streams

Work Streams
inlet At least one work stream

outlet At least two work streams
Specifying FSplit To split material streams Give one of the following specifications
for each outlet stream except one:
• Fraction of the combined inlet flow
• Mole flow rate
• Mass flow rate
• Standard liquid volume flow rate
• Actual volume flow rate
• Fraction of the residue remaining after all other specifications
are satisfied
FSplit puts any remaining flow in the unspecified outlet stream to
satisfy material balance. You can specify mole, mass, or standard
liquid volume flow rate for one of the following:
• The entire stream
• A subset of key components in the stream
To specify the flow rate of a component or group of components in
an outlet stream, specify a group of key components and the total
flow rate for the group (the sum of the component flow rates) on
the Input Specifications sheet, and define the key components in
the group on the Input KeyComponents sheet.
Outlet streams have the same composition as the mixed inlet
stream. For this reason, when you specify the flow rate of a key
component, the total flow rate of the outlet stream is greater than
the flow rate you specify.
When FSplit has more than one inlet, you can do one of the
following:
• Enter the outlet pressure on the FSplit Input FlashOptions sheet
• Let the outlet pressure default to the minimum pressure of the
inlet streams
To split heat streams or work streams Specify the fraction of the
combined inlet heat or work for each outlet stream except one.
FSplit puts any remaining heat or work in the unspecified outlet
stream to satisfy energy balance.
EO Usage Notes for The features listed below are not supported in equation-oriented
FSplit formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
solution strategy via the Perturbation Layer.
• Specifications which result in renormalized split fractions
during sequential-modular calculations
• Features which are globally unsupported
SSplit Reference
SSplit combines material streams and divides the resulting stream
into two or more streams. Use SSplit to model a splitter where the
split of each substream among the outlet streams can differ.
Substreams in the outlet streams have the same composition,
temperature, and pressure as the corresponding substreams in the
mixed inlet stream. Only the substream flow rates differ. To model
a splitter in which the composition and properties of the
substreams in the output streams can differ, use a Sep block or a
Sep2 block.
SSplit:
Input Enter split specifications, flash conditions,
calculation options, and key components associated
with split specifications
BlockOptions Override global values for physical properties,
Results View split fractions of each substream in each outlet
stream, and material and energy balance results
Flowsheet
Connectivity for Material
Material (2 or more)
SSplit
(any number)
Material Streams

Specifying SSplit For each substream, specify one of the following for all but one
outlet stream:
• Fraction of the inlet substream
• Mole flow rate
• Mass flow rate
• Standard liquid volume flow rate
SSplit puts any remaining flow for each substream in the
unspecified stream. You cannot specify standard liquid volume
flow rate when the substream is of type CISOLID, and mole and
standard liquid volume flow rates when the substream is of type
NC.
You can specify mole or mass flow rate for one of the following:
• The entire substream
• A subset of components in the substream
You can specify the flow rate of a component in a substream of an
outlet stream. To do this, define a key component and specify the
flow rate for the key component. Similarly, you can specify the
flow rate for a group of components in a substream of an outlet
stream. To do this, define a key group of components and specify
the total flow rate for the group (the sum of the component flow
rates).
Substreams in outlet streams have the same composition as the
corresponding substream in the mixed inlet stream. For this reason,
when you specify the flow rate of a key, the total flow rate of the
substream in the outlet stream is greater than the flow rate you
specify.
When SSplit has more than one inlet, you can do one of the
following:
• Enter the outlet pressure on the Input FlashOptions sheet.
• Let the outlet pressure default to the minimum pressure of the
inlet streams.
The composition, temperature, pressure, and other substream
variables for all outlet streams have the same values as the mixed
inlet. Only the substream flow rates differ.
CHAPTER 2
Separators
This chapter describes the unit operation models for component

separators, flash drums, and liquid-liquid separators. The models
are:
Flash2 Two-outlet flash Separates feed into two Flash drums, evaporators, knock-out drums,
outlet streams, using single stage separators
rigorous vapor-liquid or
vapor-liquid-liquid
equilibrium
Flash3 Three-outlet flash Separates feed into three Decanters, single-stage separators with two
outlet streams, using liquid phases
rigorous vapor-liquid-
liquid equilibrium
Decanter Liquid-liquid decanter Separates feed into two Decanters, single-stage separators with two
liquid outlet streams liquid phases and no vapor phase
Sep Component separator Separates inlet stream Component separation operations, such as
components into distillation and absorption, when the details
multiple outlet streams, of the separation are unknown or
based on specified flows unimportant
or split frractions
Sep2 Two-outlet component Separates inlet stream Component separation operations, such as
separator components into two distillation and absorption, when the details
outlet streams, based on of the separation are unknown or
specified flows, split unimportant
fractions, or purities
You can generate heating or cooling curve tables for Flash2,
Flash3, and Decanter models.
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-1

Flash2 Reference
Use Flash2 to model flashes, evaporators, knock-out drums, and
other single-stage separators. Flash2 performs vapor-liquid or
vapor-liquid-liquid equilibrium calculations. When you specify the
outlet conditions, Flash2 determines the thermal and phase
conditions of a mixture of one or more inlet streams.
Flash2.
Input Enter flash specifications, flash convergence
parameters, and entrainment specifications
Hcurves Specify heating or cooling curve tables and view
tabular results
Results View Flash2 simulation results
Flowsheet Vapor
Connectivity for Heat (optional)
Flash2
Material
(any number)
Water (optional)
Heat Liquid
(optional)
Material Streams

outlet One material stream for the vapor phase
One material stream for the liquid phase. (If three phases
exist, the liquid outlet contains both liquid phases.)
You can specify liquid and/or solid entrainment in the vapor
stream.
2-2 • Separators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Heat Streams
inlet Any number of heat streams (optional)

outlet One heat stream (optional)
If you give only one specification (temperature or pressure) on the
Input Specifications Sheet, Flash2 uses the sum of the inlet heat
streams as a duty specification. Otherwise, Flash2 uses the inlet
heat stream only to calculate the net heat duty. The net heat duty is
the sum of the inlet heat streams minus the actual (calculated) heat
duty.
You can use an optional outlet heat stream for the net heat duty.
Specifying Flash2 Use the Input Specifications sheet for all required specifications
and valid phases. For valid phases you can choose the following
options:
You can choose the Solids? Number of Free Water?
following options phases?
Vapor-Liquid Yes or no 2 No
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid Yes or no 3 No
Vapor-Liquid-FreeWater Yes or no 2 Yes
Use the Input FlashOptions sheet to specify temperature and
pressure estimates and flash convergence parameters.
Use the Input Entrainment sheet to specify liquid and solid
entrainment in the vapor phase.
Use the Hcurves form to specify optional heating or cooling
curves.
Solids All phases are in thermal equilibrium. Solids leave at the same
temperature as the fluid phases.
Flash2 can simulate fluid phases with solids when the stream
contains solid substreams or when you request electrolytes
chemistry calculations.
Solid Substreams: Materials in solid substreams do not participate
in phase equilibrium calculations.
Electrolyte Chemistry Calculations: You can request these on the
Properties Specifications Global sheet or the BlockOptions
Properties sheet. Solid salts do participate in liquid-solid phase
equilibrium and thermal equilibrium calculations. The salts are in
the MIXED substream.
EO Usage Notes for All features of Flash2 are available in the EO formulation, except
Flash2 the features which are globally unsupported.

Flash3 Reference
Use Flash3 to model flashes, evaporators, knock-out drums,
decanters, and other single-stage separators in which two liquid
outlet streams are produced. Flash3 performs vapor-liquid-liquid
equilibrium calculations. When you specify outlet conditions,
Flash3 determines the thermal and phase conditions of a mixture of
one or more inlet streams.
Flash3:
Input Enter flash specifications, key components, flash
convergence parameters, and entrainment
specifications
tabular results
simulation options, diagnostic message levels,
and report options for this block
Results View Flash3 simulation results
Flowsheet Vapor
Connectivity for Heat (optional)
Flash3
Material
(any number)
1st Liquid
Heat 2nd Liquid
(optional)
Material Streams

One material stream for the first liquid phase
One material stream for the second liquid phase

You can specify liquid entrainment of each liquid phase in the
vapor stream. You can also specify entrainment for each solid
substream in the vapor and first liquid phase.
Heat Streams

If you give only one specification on the Input Specifications Sheet
(temperature or pressure), Flash3 uses the sum of the inlet heat
streams as a duty specification. Otherwise, Flash3 uses the inlet
heat stream only to calculate the net heat duty. The net heat duty is
the sum of the inlet heat streams minus the actual (calculated) heat
duty.
Specifying Flash3 Use the Input Specifications sheet for all required specifications.
Use the Input Entrainment sheet to specify solid entrainment.
To specify optional heating or cooling curves, use the Hcurves
form.
Flash3 can simulate fluid phases with solids when the stream
contains solid substreams, or when you request electrolyte
Properties Specifications Global sheet or on the Input
BlockOptions Properties sheet. Solid salts do participate in liquid-
solid phase equilibrium and thermal equilibrium calculations. You
can only specify apparent component calculations (Select
Simulation Approach=Apparent Components on the BlockOptions
Properties sheet). The salts will not appear in the MIXED
substream.

Decanter Reference
Decanter simulates decanters and other single stage separators
without a vapor phase. Decanter can perform:
• Liquid-liquid equilibrium calculations
• Liquid-free-water calculations
Use Decanter to model knock-out drums, decanters, and other
single-stage separators without a vapor phase. When you specify
outlet conditions, Decanter determines the thermal and phase
conditions of a mixture of one or more inlet streams.
Decanter can calculate liquid-liquid distribution coefficients using:
• An activity coefficient model
• An equation of state capable of representing two liquid phases
• A user-specified Fortran subroutine
• A built-in correlation with user-specified coefficients
You can enter component separation efficiencies, assuming
equilibrium stage is present.
Use Flash3 if you suspect any vapor phase formation.
Decanter:
Input Specify operating conditions, key components,
calculation options, valid phases, efficiency, and
entrainment
Properties Specify and/or override property methods, KLL
equation parameters, and/or user subroutine for
phase split calculations
tabular results
Results Display simulation results
Flowsheet Material 1st Liquid
(any number)
Connectivity for 2nd Liquid
Decanter Heat Heat
(optional) (optional)

Material Streams

outlet One material stream for the first liquid phase
One material stream for the second liquid phase
You can specify entrainment for each solid substream in the first
liquid phase.
Heat Streams

If you specify only pressure on the Input Specifications sheet,
Decanter uses the sum of the inlet heat streams as a duty
specification. Otherwise, Decanter uses the inlet heat stream only
to calculate the net heat duty. The net heat duty is the sum of the
inlet heat streams minus the actual (calculated) heat duty.
Specifying Decanter You can operate Decanter in one of the following ways:
• Adiabatically
• With specified duty
• At a specified temperature
Use the Input Specifications sheet to enter:
• Pressure
• Temperature or duty
Defining the Second If two liquid phases are present at the decanter operating condition,
Liquid Phase Decanter treats the phase with higher density as the second phase,
by default.
When only one liquid phase exists and you want to avoid
ambiguities, you can override the default by:
• Specifying key components for identifying the second liquid
phase on the Input Specifications sheet
• Optionally specifying the threshold key component mole
fraction on the Input Specifications sheet
When Decanter treats the
Two liquid phases are Phase with the higher mole fraction of key
present components as the second liquid phase
One liquid phase is Liquid phase as the first liquid phase, unless the
present mole fraction of key components exceeds the
threshold value

Methods for Calculating When calculating liquid-liquid distribution coefficients (KLL), by
the Liquid-Liquid default Decanter uses the physical property method specified for
Distribution Coefficients the block on the Properties PhaseProperty sheet or BlockOptions
(KLL) Properties sheet.
On the Input CalculationOptions sheet, you can override the
default by doing one of the following:
• Specify separate property methods for the two liquid phases
using the Properties PhaseProperty sheet
• Use a built-in KLL correlation. Enter correlation coefficients
on the Properties KLLCorrelation sheet.
• Use a Fortran subroutine that you specify on the Properties
KLLSubroutine sheet
See Aspen Plus User Models for more information about writing
Fortran subroutines.
Phase Splitting Decanter has two methods for solving liquid-liquid phase split
calculations:
• Equating fugacities of two liquid phases
• Minimizing Gibbs free energy of the system
You can select a method on the Input CalculationOptions sheet.
If you select Minimizing Gibbs free energy of the system, the
following must be thermodynamically consistent:
• Physical property models
• Block property method
You cannot use the Minimizing Gibbs free energy of the system
method when:
You specify On this sheet
Separate property methods for Properties PhaseProperty
the two liquid phases
The built-in correlation for Input CalculationOptions
liquid-liquid distribution
coefficient ( KLL) calculations
A user subroutine for liquid- Input Calculation Options
liquid distribution coefficient
(KLL) calculations
Equating fugacities of two liquid phases is not restricted by
physical property specifications. However, Decanter can calculate
solutions that do not minimize Gibbs free energy.
Efficiency Decanter outlet streams are normally at equilibrium. However, you
can specify separation efficiencies on the Input Efficiency sheet to
account for departure from equilibrium. If you select Liquid-

FreeWater for Valid Phases on the Input CalculationOptions sheet,
you cannot specify separation efficiencies.
Solids Entrainment If solids substreams are present, they do not participate in phase
equilibrium calculations, but they do participate in enthalpy
balance. You can use the Input Entrainment sheet to specify solids
entrainment in the first liquid outlet stream. Decanter places any
remaining solids in the second liquid outlet stream.
Decanter formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• User KLL subroutine
• KLL correlation

Sep Reference
Sep combines streams and separates the result into two or more
streams according to splits specified for each component. When
the details of the separation are unknown or unimportant, but the
splits for each component are known, you can use Sep in place of a
rigorous separation model to save computation time .
If the composition and conditions of all outlet streams of the block
you are modeling are identical, you can use an FSplit block instead
of Sep.
Sep:
Input Enter split specifications, flash specifications, and
convergence parameters for the mixed inlet and each
outlet stream
Results View Sep simulation results
Flowsheet Material
Connectivity for Sep (2 or more)
Material
(any number)
Heat
(optional)
Material Streams

Heat Streams
inlet No inlet heat streams

outlet One stream for the enthalpy difference between inlet and
outlet material streams (optional)
Specifying Sep For each substream of each outlet stream except one, use the Sep
Input Specifications sheet to specify one of the following for each
component present:
• Fraction of the component in the corresponding inlet substream
• Mole flow rate of the component
• Mass flow rate of the component
• Standard liquid volume flow rate of the component

Sep puts any remaining flow in the corresponding substream of the
unspecified outlet stream.
Inlet Pressure Use the Sep Input Feed Flash sheet to specify either the pressure
drop or the pressure at the inlet. This is useful when Sep has more
than one inlet stream. The inlet pressure defaults to the minimum
inlet stream pressure.
Outlet Stream Conditions Use the Sep Input Outlet Flash sheet to specify the conditions of
the outlet streams. If you do not specify the conditions for a
stream, Sep uses the inlet temperature and pressure.
Sep formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO

Sep2 Reference
Sep2 separates inlet stream components into two outlet streams.
Sep2 is similar to Sep, but offers a wider variety of specifications.
Sep2 allows purity (mole-fraction) specifications for components.
You can use Sep2 in place of a rigorous separation model, such as
distillation or absorption. Sep2 saves computation time when
details of the separation are unknown or unimportant.
If the composition and conditions of all outlet streams of the block
you are modeling are identical, you can use FSplit instead of Sep2.
Sep2:
Input Enter split specifications, flash specifications, and
convergence parameters for the mixed inlet and each
outlet stream
Results View Sep2 simulation results
Flowsheet Material
Connectivity for Sep2
Material Material
(any number)
Heat
(optional)
Material Streams

outlet Two material streams
Heat Streams

outlet One stream for the enthalpy difference between inlet and
outlet material
streams (optional)
Specifying Sep2 Use the Input Specifications sheet to specify stream and/or
component fractions and flows. The number of specifications for
each substream must equal the number of components in that
substream.

You can enter these stream specifications:
• Fraction of the total inlet stream going to either outlet stream
• Total mass flow rate of an outlet stream
• Total molar flow rate of an outlet stream (for substreams of
type MIXED or CISOLID)
• Total standard liquid volume flow rate of an outlet stream (for
substreams of type MIXED)
You can enter these component specifications:
• Fraction of a component in the feed going to either outlet
stream
• Mass flow rate of a component in an outlet stream
• Molar flow rate of a component in an outlet stream (for
substreams of type MIXED or CISOLID)
• Standard liquid volume flow rate of a component in an outlet
stream (for substreams of type MIXED)
• Mass fraction of a component in an outlet stream
• Mole fraction of a component in an outlet stream (for
substreams of type MIXED or CISOLID)
Sep2 treats each substream separately. Do not:
• Specify the total flow of both outlet streams
• Enter more than one flow or frac specification for each
component
• Enter both a mole-frac and a mass-frac specification for a
component in a stream
Inlet Pressure Use the Input Feed Flash sheet to specify either the pressure drop
or pressure at the inlet. This information is useful when Sep2 has
more than one inlet stream. The inlet pressure defaults to the
minimum of the inlet stream pressures.
Outlet Stream Conditions Use the Input Outlet Flash sheet to specify the conditions of the
outlet streams. If you do not specify the conditions for a stream,
Sep2 uses the inlet temperature and pressure.
Sep2 formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO

CHAPTER 3
Heat Exchangers
This chapter describes the unit operation models for heat

exchangers and heaters (and coolers), and for interfacing to the B-
JAC heat exchanger programs. The models are:
Heater Heater or cooler Determines thermal and Heaters, coolers, condensers, and so on
phase conditions of
outlet stream
HeatX Two-stream heat Exchanges heat between Two-stream heat exchangers. Rating shell
exchanger two streams and tube heat exchangers when geometry is
known.
MHeatX Multistream heat Exchanges heat between Multiple hot and cold stream heat
exchanger any number of streams exchangers. Two-stream heat exchangers.
LNG exchangers.
Hetran Shell and tube heat Provides interface to the Shell and tube heat exchangers, including
exchanger B-JAC Hetran shell and kettle reboilers
tube heat exchanger
program
Aerotran Air-cooled heat Provides interface to the Crossflow heat exchangers, including air
exchanger B-JAC Aerotran air- coolers
cooled heat exchanger
program
HxFlux Heat transfer Perform heat transfer Two single-sided heat exchangers
calculation calculations between a
heat sink and a heat
source, using convective
heat transfer
HTRI-Xist Shell and tube heat Provides interface to Shell and tube heat exchangers, including
exchanger HTRI’s Xist shell and kettle reboilers
tube heat exchanger
program
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Heat Exchangers • 3-1

Heater Reference
You can use Heater to represent:
• Heaters
• Coolers
• Valves
• Pumps (whenever work-related results are not needed)
• Compressors (whenever work-related results are not needed)
You also can use Heater to set the thermodynamic condition of a
stream.
When you specify the outlet conditions, Heater determines the
thermal and phase conditions of a mixture with one or more inlet
streams.
Heater:
Input Enter operating conditions and flash convergence
parameters
tabular results
Results View Heater results
Flowsheet Heat (optional)
Connectivity for
Heater
Material Material
(any number)
Heat Water (optional)

(optional)
Material Streams

Heat Streams

3-2 • Heat Exchangers Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

If you give only one specification (temperature or pressure) on the
Specifications sheet, Heater uses the sum of the inlet heat streams
as a duty specification. Otherwise, Heater uses the inlet heat stream
only to calculate the net heat duty. The net heat duty is the sum of
the inlet heat streams minus the actual (calculated) heat duty.
Specifying Heater Use the Heater Input Specifications sheet for all required
specifications and valid phases.
Dew point calculations are two- or three-phase flashes with a vapor
fraction of unity.
Bubble point calculations are two- or three-phase flashes with a
vapor fraction of zero.
Use the Heater Input FlashOptions sheet to specify temperature
and pressure estimates and flash convergence parameters.
Use the Hcurves form to specify optional heating or cooling
curves.
This model has no dynamic features. The pressure drop is fixed at
the steady state value. The outlet flow is determined by the mass
balance.
Solids Heater can simulate fluid phases with solids when the stream
contains solid substreams or when you request electrolyte
All phases are in thermal equilibrium. Solids leave at the same
temperature as fluid phases.
Solid Substreams Materials in solid substreams do not participate
Electrolyte Chemistry Calculations You can request these on the
Properties Specifications Global sheet or the Heater BlockOptions
Properties sheet. Solid salts participate in liquid-solid phase
EO Usage Notes for All features of Heater are available in the EO formulation, except
Heater the features which are globally unsupported.

HeatX Reference
HeatX can model a wide variety of shell and tube heat exchanger
types including:
• Countercurrent and co-current
• Segmental baffle TEMA E, F, G, H, J, and X shells
• Rod baffle TEMA E and F shells
• Bare and low-finned tubes
HeatX can perform a full zone analysis with heat transfer
coefficient and pressure drop estimation for single- and two-phase
streams. For rigorous heat transfer and pressure drop calculations,
you must supply the exchanger geometry.
If exchanger geometry is unknown or unimportant, HeatX can
perform simplified shortcut rating calculations. For example, you
may want to perform only heat and material balance calculations.
HeatX has correlations to estimate sensible heat, nucleate boiling,
and condensation film coefficients.
HeatX can
• Perform design calculations
• Perform mechanical vibration analysis
• Estimate fouling factors
HeatX:
Setup Specify shortcut, detailed or Hetran-rigorous
calculations, flow direction, exchanger pressure
drops, heat transfer coefficient calculation methods,
and film coefficients
Options Specify different flash convergence parameters and
valid phases for the hot and cold sides, HeatX
convergence parameters, and block-specific report
option
Hetran Options Specify the name of the Hetran input file,
parameters for calculating the property curves,
optional Hetran program inputs.
Hetran Browser Specify data when using the Hetran-Rigorous
calculation type.
Geometry Specify the shell and tube configuration and indicate
any tube fins, baffles, or nozzles

Hot-Hcurves Specify hot stream heating or cooling curve tables
and view tabular results
Cold-Hcurves Specify cold stream heating or cooling curve tables
User Subroutines Specify parameters for user-defined Fortran
subroutines to calculate overall heat transfer
coefficient, LMTD correction factor, tube-side
liquid holdup, or tube-side pressure drop
Thermal Results View a summary of results, mass and energy
balances, pressure drops, velocities, and zone
analysis profiles
Geometry Results View detailed shell and tube results, and information
about tube fins, baffles, and nozzles
Hetran Thermal View overall results and detailed results for the shell
Results side and tube side when using the Hetran-Rigorous
calculation type.
Flowsheet Cold Outlet
Connectivity for Water (optional)
HeatX
Hot Hot Outlet

Inlet
Water
(optional)
Cold Inlet
Material Streams
inlet One hot inlet

One cold inlet
outlet One hot outlet
One cold outlet
One water decant stream on the hot side (optional)
One water decant stream on the cold side (optional)

Specifying HeatX Consider these questions when specifying HeatX:
• Should rating calculations be simple (shortcut) or rigorous?
• What specification should the block have?
• How should the log-mean temperature difference correction
factor be calculated?
• How should the heat transfer coefficient be calculated?
• How should the pressure drops be calculated?
• What equipment specifications and geometry information are
available?
The answers to these questions determine the amount of
information required to complete the block input. You must
provide one of the following specifications:
• Heat exchanger area or geometry
• Exchanger heat duty
• Outlet temperature of the hot or cold stream
• Temperature approach at either end of the exchanger
• Degrees of superheating/subcooling for the hot or cold stream
• Vapor fraction of the hot or cold stream
• Temperature change of the hot or cold stream
Shortcut Versus Rigorous HeatX has three calculation methods: shortcut, detailed, and
Rating Calculations Hetran-rigorous. Use the Calculation field on the Setup
Specifications sheet to specify the appropriate calculation
method.
With the shortcut calculation method you can simulate a heat
exchanger block with the minimum amount of required input. The
shortcut calculation does not require exchanger configuration or
geometry data.
With the detailed calculation method, you can use exchanger
geometry to estimate:
• Film coefficients
• Pressure drops
• Log-mean temperature difference correction factor
The detailed calculation method provides more specification
options for HeatX, but it also requires more input.
The detailed calculation method provides defaults for many
options. You can change the defaults to gain complete control over
the calculations. The following table lists these options with valid
values. The values are described in the following sections.

The Hetran-rigorous method allows you to design new
equipment, and to rate or simulate the performance of existing
equipment. In addition to the more rigorous heat transfer and
hydraulic analyses, the program will also determine possible
operational problems such as vibration or excessive velocities. You
can use the Hetran-rigorous method to estimate the cost for the
equipment. The modules used in the Hetran-rigorous method are
the same as those used in the Aspen Hetran standalone product for
shell and tube heat exchanger analysis.
Available in Available in Available in
Variable Calculation Method Shortcut Mode Detailed Mode Hetran-rigorous mode
LMTD Constant Single tube pass † Yes No
Correction Geometry No Default No
Factor User subroutine No Yes No
Calculated Multiple tube pass † No No
Heat Transfer Constant value Yes Yes No
Coefficient Phase-specific values Default Yes No
Power law expression Yes Yes No
Film coefficients No Yes No
Exchanger geometry No Default No
User subroutine No Yes No
Film Constant value No Yes No
Coefficient Phase-specific values No Yes No
Power law expression No Yes No
Calculate from geometry No Default No
Pressure Drop Outlet pressure Default Yes No
Calculate from geometry No Default No
† In shortcut mode, a constant LMTD must be supplied for
exchangers with a single tube pass. For exchangers with multiple
tube passes, the LMTD correction factor will be calculated.
Calculating the Log-Mean The standard equation for a heat exchanger is:
Temperature Difference
Correction Factor
Q = U ⋅ A ⋅ LMTD
where LMTD is the log-mean temperature difference. This
equation applies for exchangers with pure countercurrent flow.
The more general equation is:
Q = U ⋅ A ⋅ F ⋅ LMTD
where the LMTD correction factor, F, accounts for deviation from
countercurrent flow.
Use the LMTD Correction Factor field on the Setup Specifications
sheet to enter the LMTD correction factor.
In shortcut rating mode, the LMTD correction factor is constant for
a cocurrent or countercurrent exchanger. For a multipass

exchanger, HeatX will calculate the correction factor. See
Shortcut Model of a System of Multiple Tube Pass Exchangers in
Series, for more information.
In rigorous rating mode, use the LMTD Correction Method field
on the Setup Specifications sheet to specify how HeatX calculates
the LMTD correction factor. You can choose from the following
calculation options:
If LMTD Correction Then
Method is
Constant The LMTD correction factor you enter is
constant.
Geometry HeatX calculates the LMTD correction factor
using the exchanger specification and stream
properties
User subroutine You supply a user subroutine to calculate the
LMTD correction factor.
Calculating the Heat To determine how the heat transfer coefficient is calculated, set the
Transfer Coefficient Calculation Method on the Setup U Methods sheet. You can use
these options in shortcut or rigorous rating mode:
If Calculation HeatX uses And you
Method is specify
Constant value A constant value for the heat The constant
transfer coefficient value
Phase-specific A different heat transfer coefficient A constant
values for each heat transfer zone of the value for each
exchanger, indexed by the phase for zone
the hot and cold streams
Power law A power law expression for the heat Constants for
expression transfer coefficient as a function of the power law
one of the stream flow rates expression
In rigorous rating mode, three additional values are allowed:
If Calculation Then
Method is
Exchanger HeatX calculates the heat transfer coefficient using
geometry exchanger geometry and stream properties to
estimate film coefficients.
Film coefficients HeatX calculates the heat transfer coefficients using
the film coefficients. You can use any option on the
Setup Film Coefficients sheet to calculate the film
coefficients.
User subroutine You supply a user subroutine to calculate the heat
transfer coefficient.

Film Coefficients HeatX does not calculate film coefficients in shortcut rating mode.
In rigorous rating mode, if you use film coefficients or exchanger
geometry for the heat transfer coefficient calculation method,
HeatX calculates the heat transfer coefficient using:
1 1 1
= +
U hc hh
Where:
hc = Cold stream film coefficient
hh = Hot stream film coefficient
To choose an option for calculating film coefficients, set the
Calculation Method on the Setup Film Coefficients sheet. The
following are available:
If Calculation Method is HeatX uses And you
specify
Constant value A constant value for the A constant
film coefficient value to be used
throughout the
exchanger
Phase-specific values A different film coefficient A constant
for each heat transfer zone value for each
(phase) of the exchanger, phase
indexed by the phase of the
stream
Power law expression A power law expression for Constants for
the film coefficient as a the power law
function of the stream flow expression
rate
Calculate from geometry The exchanger geometry
and stream properties to
calculate the film
coefficient
The hot stream and cold stream film coefficient calculation
methods are independent of each other. You can use any
combination that is appropriate for your exchanger.
Pressure Drop To enter exchanger pressure or pressure drop for the hot and cold
Calculations sides, use the Outlet Pressure fields on the Setup Pressure Drop
sheet. In shortcut rating mode the pressure drop is constant.
In rigorous rating mode, you can choose how pressure drops are
calculated by setting the pressure options on the Setup
PressureDrop sheet. The following pressure drop options are
available:

If Pressure Option is Then
Outlet Pressure You must enter the outlet pressure or pressure
drop for the stream.
Calculate from geometry HeatX calculates the pressure drop using the
exchanger geometry and stream properties
HeatX calls the Pipeline model to calculate tube-side pressure
drop. You can set the correlations for pressure drop and liquid
holdup that the Pipeline model uses on the Setup PressureDrop
sheet.
Exchanger Configuration Exchanger configuration refers to the overall patterns of flow in
the heat exchanger. If you choose Calculate From Geometry for
any of the heat transfer coefficients, film coefficients, or pressure
drop calculation methods, you may be required to enter some
information about the exchanger configuration on the Geometry
Shell sheet. This sheet includes fields for:
• TEMA shell type (see the next figure, TEMA Shell Types)
• Number of tube passes
• Exchanger orientation
• Tubes in baffle window
• Number of sealing strips
• Tube flow for vertical exchangers

E Shell
One Pass Shell
F Shell
Two Pass Shell

with Longitudinal Baffle
G Shell
Split Flow
H Shell
Double Split Flow
J Shell
Divided Flow
X Shell
Cross Flow
TEMA Shell Types

The Geometry Shell sheet also contains two important dimensions
for the shell:
• Inside shell diameter
• Shell to bundle clearance
The next figure shows the shell dimensions.
Outer Tube Shell Diameter
Limit
Shell to Bundle
Clearance
Shell Dimensions
Baffle Geometry Calculation of shell-side film coefficient and pressure drop require
information about the baffle geometry within the shell. Enter baffle
geometry on the Geometry Baffles sheet.
HeatX can calculate shell-side values for both segmental baffle
shells and rod baffle shells. Other required information depends on
the baffle type. For segmental baffles, required information
includes:
• Baffle cut
• Baffle spacing
• Baffle clearances
For rod baffles, required information includes:
• Ring dimensions
• Support rod geometry
The next two figures show the baffle dimensions. The Baffle Cut
in the Dimensions for Segmental Baffles figure is a fraction of the
shell diameter. All clearances are diametric.

Baffle Cut
Tube Hole Shell to Baffle

Clearance
Dimensions for Segmental Baffles
Rod Diameter
Ring Outside Ring Inside

Diameter Diameter
Dimensions for Rod Baffles
Tube Geometry Calculation of the tube-side film coefficient and pressure drop
require information about the geometry of the tubebank. HeatX
also uses this information to calculate the heat transfer coefficient
from the film coefficients. Enter tube geometry on the Geometry
Tubes sheet.
You can select a heat exchanger with either bare or low-finned
tubes. The sheet also includes fields for:
• Total number of tubes
• Tube length
• Tube diameters
• Tube layout
• Tube material of construction
The next two figures show tube layout patterns and fin dimensions.

o o o o
30 45 60 90
Tube
Tube Pitch Tube Tube
Pitch Pitch Pitch
Triangle Rotated Rotated Square
Square Triangle
Direction of Flow
Tube Layout Patterns
Fin Thickness
Outside Root Mean

Diameter Diameter
Fin Height
Fin Dimensions
Nozzle Geometry Calculations for pressure drop include the calculation of pressure
drop in the exchanger nozzles. Enter nozzle geometry on the
Geometry Nozzles sheet.
Model Correlations HeatX uses open literature correlations for calculating film
coefficients and pressure drops. The next four tables list the model
correlations.
Tube-side Heat Transfer Coefficient Correlations
Mechanism Flow Regime Correlation References
Single-phase Laminar Schlunder [1]
Turbulent Gnielinski [1]
Boiling - Steiner/Taborek [2]
vertical tubes
Boiling - Shah [3, 4]
horizontal tubes
Condensation - Laminar Nusselt [5]
vertical tubes Laminar wavy Kutateladze [6]
Turbulent Labuntsov [7]
Shear-dominated Rohsenow [8]
Condensation - Annular Rohsenow [8]
horizontal tubes Stratifying Jaster/Kosky method [9]

Shell-side Heat Transfer Coefficient Correlations
Mechanism Flow Regime Correlation References
Single-phase Bell-Delaware [10, 11]
segmental
Single-phase Gentry [12]
ROD
Boiling Jensen [13]
Condensation - Laminar Nusselt [5]
vertical Laminar wavy Kutateladze [6]
Turbulent Labuntsov [7]
Shear-dominated Rohsenow [8]
Condensation - Kern [9]
horizontal
Tube-side Pressure Drop Correlations
Mechanism Correlation
Single-phase Darcy’s Law
Two-phase See Pipeline
Shell-side Pressure Drop Correlations
Mechanism Correlation References
Single-phase segmental Bell-Delaware [10, 11]
Single-phase ROD Gentry [12]
Two-phase segmental Bell-Delaware method with [10, 11], [14]
Grant’s correction for two-phase
flow
Two-phase ROD Gentry [12]
References
1 Gnielinski, V., "Forced Convection in Ducts." In: Heat
Exchanger Design Handbook. New York:Hemisphere
Publishing Corporation, 1983.
2 Steiner, D. and Taborek, J., "Flow Boiling Heat Transfer in
Vertical Tubes Correlated by an Asymptotic Model." In: Heat
Transfer Engineering, 13(2):43-69, 1992.
3 Shah, M.M., "A New Correlation for Heat Transfer During
Boiling Flow Through Pipes." In: ASHRAE Transactions,
82(2):66-86, 1976.
4 Shah, M.M., "Chart Correlation for Saturated Boiling Heat
Transfer: Equations and Further Study." In: ASHRAE
Transactions, 87(1):185-196, 1981.
5 Nusselt, W., "Surface Condensation of Water Vapor." Z. Ver.
Dtsch, Ing., 60(27):541-546, 1916.
6 Kutateladze, S.S., Fundamentals of Heat Transfer. New York:
Academic Press, 1963.

7 Labuntsov, D.A., "Heat Transfer in Film Condensation of Pure
Steam on Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Tubes." In:
Teploenergetika, 4(7):72-80, 1957.
8 Rohsenow, W.M., Webber, J.H., and Ling, A.T., "Effect of
Vapor Velocity on Laminar and Turbulent Film
Condensation." In: Transactions of the ASME, 78:1637-1643,
1956.
9 Jaster, H. and Kosky, P.G., "Condensation Heat Transfer in a
Mixed Flow Regime." In: International Journal of Heat and
Mass Transfer, 19:95-99, 1976.
10 Taborek, J., "Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchangers: Single Phase
Flow." In: Heat Exchanger Design Handbook. New York:
Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1983.
11 Bell, K.J., "Delaware Method for Shell Side Design." In:
Kakac, S., Bergles, A.E., and Mayinger, F., editors, Heat
Exchangers: Thermal-Hydraulic Fundamentals and Design.
New York: Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1981.
12 Gentry, C.C., "RODBaffle Heat Exchanger Technology." In:
Chemical Engineering Progress 86(7):48-57, July 1990.
13 Jensen, M.K. and Hsu, J.T., "A Parametric Study of Boiling
Heat Transfer in a Tube Bundle." In: 1987 ASME-JSME
Thermal Engineering Joint Conference, pages 133-140,
Honolulu, Hawaii, 1987.
14 Grant, I.D.R. and Chisholm, D., "Two-Phase Flow on the Shell
Side of a Segmentally Baffled Shell-and-Tube Heat
Exchanger." In: Journal of Heat Transfer, 101(1):38-42, 1979.
Flash Specifications Use the Options Flash Options sheet to enter flash specifications.
If you want to perform
these calculations Solids? Set Valid Phases to
Vapor phase Yes or no Vapor-only
Liquid phase Yes or no Liquid-only
2-fluid flash phase Yes or no Vapor-Liquid
3-fluid flash phase Yes or no Vapor-Liquid-Liquid
3-fluid phase free-water flash Yes or no Vapor-Liquid-FreeWater
Solids only Yes Solid-only
Physical Properties To override global or flowsheet section property specifications, use
the BlockOptions Properties sheet. You can use different physical
property options for the hot side and cold side of the heat
exchanger. If you supply only one set of property specifications,
HeatX uses that set for both hot and cold side calculations.

HeatX can simulate fluid phases with solids when the stream
Properties Specifications Global sheet or HeatX BlockOptions
Properties sheet. Solid salts participate in liquid-solid phase
Shortcut Model of a HeatX can perform a shortcut calculation of a system of multiple
System of Multiple Tube tube pass heat exchangers in series. The following restrictions
Pass Exchangers in apply:
Series
• All units in series are identical
• Each unit in series has one shell pass and an even number of
tube passes
• The overall heat transfer coefficient is the same for each unit
To do this, on the Setup Specifications sheet:
1 Select the Shortcut calculation type
2 Select Multiple tube passes for flow direction.
3 In the No. shells in series field, enter the number of units in
series.
When this option is chosen, Aspen Plus will calculate the LMTD
correction factor.
You can also choose to specify a minimum value for the calculated
LMTD correction factor. HeatX will issue a warning if the
calculated value is less than this value.
The LMTD correction factor is calculated as follows:
If R, the ratio of heat capacities, is not equal to 1, then:
1 − P∗ R 
ln  ∗ 
F=
R2 +1  1− P 
1− R  2 − P ∗ ( R + 1 − R 2 + 1) 
ln  
 2 − P ∗ ( R + 1 + R 2 + 1) 
If R = 1, then:
P∗ 2
F=
 2 − P ∗ (2 − 2 ) 
(1 − P ∗ ) ln  ∗ 
 2 − P (2 + 2 ) 

Where:
F = LMTD correction factor
R = (WC p ) cold /(WC p ) hot
Ratio of heat capacities:
P∗ = Thermal effectiveness of each unit, calculated by the
Bowman transformation
The Bowman transformation gives the thermal effectiveness of
each unit based on the overall thermal effectiveness. If R ≠1, then:
1N
1 − PR 
∗
 1 − P  − 1
P = 1N
1 − PR 
 1 − P  − R
If R=1, then:
P
P∗ =
P − NP + N
Where:
P = Thermal effectiveness for the overall heat
exchanger:
(temp. increase of cold fluid)/(inlet T hot fluid –
inlet T cold fluid)
N = Number of shells in series
Reference
Dodd, R., "Mean Temperature Difference and Temperature

Efficiency for Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers Connected in
Series with Two Tube Passes per Shell Pass." In: Trans. IChemE,
Vol. 58, 1980.
HeatX formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• Rigorous method (with geometry)
• Phase-specific heat transfer coefficients and zone analysis

MHeatX Reference
Use MHeatX to represent heat transfer between multiple hot and
cold streams, such as in an LNG exchanger. You can also use
MHeatX for two-stream heat exchangers. Free water can be
decanted from any outlet stream. MHeatX ensures an overall
energy balance but does not account for the exchanger geometry.
MHeatX can perform a detailed, rigorous internal zone analysis to
determine the internal pinch points and heating and cooling curves
for all streams in the heat exchanger. MHeatX can also calculate
the overall UA for the exchanger and model heat leak to or from an
exchanger.
MHeatX uses multiple Heater blocks and heat streams to enhance
flowsheet convergence. Aspen Plus automatically sequences block
and stream convergence unless you specify a sequence or tear
stream.
MHeatX:
Input Specify operating conditions, flash convergence
parameters, parameters for zone analysis, flash table,
MHeatX convergence parameters, and block-
specific report options
tabular results
simulation options, diagnostic message levels and
Results View stream results, exchanger results, zone
profiles, stream profiles, flash profiles, and material
and energy balance results
Flowsheet Cold Inlets
(any number)
Connectivity for
MHeatX
Hot Outlets
Hot Inlets
(any number) Water (optional)
Hot Outlets
Water (optional)
Cold Water
Outlets (optional)

Material Streams
inlet At least one material stream on the hot side, unless a load
stream is used.
At least one material stream on the cold side, unless a load
stream is used.
outlet One outlet stream for each inlet stream.
One water decant stream for each outlet stream (optional).
Load Streams
inlet Any number of load streams on either or both sides.

outlet One outlet load stream for each inlet load stream.
The inlet stream sides are non-contacting.
Specifying MHeatX You must give outlet specifications for each stream on one side of
the heat exchanger. On the other side you can specify any of the
outlet streams, but you must leave at least one unspecified stream.
Different streams can have different types of specifications.
MHeatX assumes that all unspecified streams have the same outlet
temperature. An overall energy balance determines the temperature
of any unspecified stream(s).
You can use a different property method for each stream in
MHeatX. Specify the property methods on the BlockOptions
Properties sheet.
Zone Analysis MHeatX can perform a detailed, rigorous internal zone analysis to
determine:
• Internal pinch points
• UA and LMTD of each zone
• Total UA of the exchanger
• Overall average LMTD
To obtain a zone analysis, specify Number of zones greater than 0
on the MHeatX Input Zone Analysis sheet. During zone analysis
MHeatX can add:
• Stream entry points (if all feed streams are not at the same
temperature)
• Stream exit points (if all product streams are not at the same
temperature)
• Phase change points (if a phase change occurs internally)
MHeatX can also account for the nonlinearities of zone profiles by
adding zones adaptively. MHeatX can perform zone analysis for
both countercurrent and co-current heat exchangers.

Using Flash Tables in Use Flash Tables to estimate zone profiles and pinch points
Zone Analysis quickly. These tables are most useful for heat exchangers that have
many streams, for which zone analysis calculations can take a long
time.
To use a Flash Table for a stream, specify the number of flash
points for the stream on the MHeatX Input Flash Table sheet.
When you specify a flash table for a stream, MHeatX generates a
temperature-enthalpy profile of that stream before zone analysis,
and interpolates that profile during zone analysis, rather than
flashing the stream.
You can also specify the fraction of total pressure drop in each
phase region of a stream on the MHeatX Input Flash Table sheet.
Aspen Plus uses these fractions to determine the pressure profile
during Flash Table generation.
Computational Structure The computational structure of MHeatX may affect your
for MHeatX specifications.
Unlike other unit operation blocks, MHeatX is not simulated by a
single computation module. Instead, Aspen Plus generates heaters
and heat streams to represent the multistream heat exchanger. A
Heater block represents streams with outlet specifications. A
multistream heater block represents streams with no outlet
specifications. The next figure shows the computational structure
generated for a sample exchanger.
$LNGH02 $LNGH03 $LNGH04
S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
HEATER HEATER HEATER
$LNGQ03
$LNGQ02 $LNGQ04
$LNGHTR
S1 S2
LNGIN MHEATER LNGOUT
Example of MHeatX Computational Structure
This computational sequence converges much more rapidly than

simulation of MHeatX as a single block. Block results are given
for the entire MHeatX sequence. In most cases, you do not need to
know about the individual blocks generated in the sequence. The
following paragraphs describe the exceptions.
Simulation history and control panel messages are given for the
generated Heater blocks and heat streams.

You can provide an estimate for duty of the internally generated
heat stream. If the heat stream is a tear stream in the flowsheet,
Aspen Plus uses this estimate as an initial value.
You can give convergence specifications for the flowsheet
resulting when MHeatX blocks are replaced by their generated
networks. The generated Heater block and heat stream IDs must be
used on the Convergence SequenceSpecifications and
Convergence TearSpecifications sheets.
Automatic flowsheet analysis is based on the flowsheet resulting
when MHeatX blocks are replaced by generated Heater blocks.
The generated Heater blocks, instead of the MHeatX block, appear
in the calculation sequence. You can select generated heat streams
as tear streams.
Solids MHeatX can simulate fluid phases with solids when the stream
All phases are in thermal equilibrium. Solids leave at the same
Properties Specifications Global sheet or the MHeatX
BlockOptions Properties sheet. Solid salts participate in liquid-
solid phase equilibrium and thermal equilibrium calculations. The
salts are in the MIXED substream.

Hetran Reference
Hetran is the interface to the B-JAC Hetran program for designing
and simulating shell and tube heat exchangers. Hetran can be used
to simulate shell and tube heat exchangers with a wide variety of
configurations. To use Hetran, place the block in the flowsheet,
connect inlet and outlet streams, and specify a small number of
block inputs, including the name of the B-JAC input file for that
exchanger.
You enter information related to the heat exchanger configuration
and geometry through the Hetran standalone program interface.
The exchanger specification is saved as a B-JAC input file. You do
not have to enter information about the exchanger’s physical
characteristics through the Aspen Plus user interface or through
input language.
Hetran:
Input Specify the name of the B-JAC input file,
optional Hetran program inputs, flash
convergence parameters, and valid phases
Results View inlet and outlet stream conditions and
Detailed Results View overall results and detailed results for the
shell side and tube side
Flowsheet Cold Inlet
Connectivity for Hot Inlet
Hetran
Hot Water (optional)
Hot Outlet
Cold Outlet
Cold Water (optional)
Material Streams
inlet One hot inlet

One cold inlet

One cold outlet
Specifying Hetran Enter the input for the shell and tube heat exchanger through the
Hetran program’s graphical user interface. The input for Hetran in
Aspen Plus is limited to:
• The B-JAC input file name that contains the heat exchanger
specification
• A set of parameters to control how property curves are
generated
• A set of Hetran program inputs that you can change from
within
Aspen Plus (for example, fouling factors and film coefficients)
Flash Specifications Use the Flash Options sheet to enter flash specifications.
If you want to perform these Solids? Set Valid Phases to
calculations
the Flash Options sheet. You can use different physical property
methods for the hot side and cold side of the heat exchanger. If you
supply only one set of property specifications, Hetran uses that set
for both hot- and cold-side calculations.
Solids Hetran cannot currently handle streams with solids substreams.

Aerotran Reference
Aerotran is the interface to the B-JAC Aerotran program for
designing and simulating air-cooled heat exchangers. Aerotran can
be used to simulate air-cooled heat exchangers with a wide variety
of configurations. It can also be used to model economizers and the
convection section of fired heaters. To use Aerotran, place the
block in the flowsheet, connect inlet and outlet streams, and
specify a small number of block inputs, including the name of the
B-JAC input file for that exchanger.
You enter information related to the air cooler configuration and
geometry through the Aerotran standalone program interface. The
air cooler specification is saved as a B-JAC input file. You do not
have to enter information about the air cooler’s physical
characteristics through the Aspen Plus user interface or through
input language.
Aerotran:
Input Specify the name of the B-JAC input file,
optional Aerotran program inputs, flash
convergence parameters, and valid phases
Results View inlet and outlet stream conditions and
Detailed Results View overall results, detailed results for the
outside and tube side, and fan results
Flowsheet Cold Water (optional)
Connectivity for Hot Inlet Cold (Air) Outlet
Aerotran
Hot Outlet
Cold (Air) Inlet

Material Streams
inlet One hot inlet

One cold (air) inlet
One cold (air) outlet
Specifying Aerotran Enter the input for the air-cooled heat exchanger through the
Aerotran program’s graphical user interface. The input for Aerotran
in Aspen Plus is limited to:
• The B-JAC input file name that contains the heat exchanger
specification
generated
• A set of Aerotran program inputs that you can change from
within Aspen Plus (for example, fouling factors and film
coefficients)
Flash Specifications Use the FlashOptions sheet to enter flash specifications.
calculations
the FlashOptions sheet. You can use different physical property
methods for the hot side and cold side of the air cooler. If you
supply only one set of property specifications, Aerotran uses that
set for both hot- and cold-side calculations.
Solids Aerotran blocks cannot currently handle streams with solids
substreams.

HxFlux Reference
HxFlux is used to perform heat transfer calculations between a heat
sink and a heat source, using convective heat transfer. The driving
force for the convective heat transfer is calculated as a function of
log-mean temperature difference (LMTD).
Specify variables among inlet and outlet stream temperatures, duty,
heat transfer coefficient, and heat transfer area. HxFlux calculates
the unknown variable and determines the log-mean temperature
difference, using either the rigorous or the approximate method.
HxFlux:
Input Specify required and optional variables for heat transfer
calculations
Results View a summary of results and mass and energy
balances.
Connectivity for
HxFlux
Heat
(optional)
inlet Inlet heat stream (optional)
outlet Outlet heat stream (optional)
Specifying HxFlux You have to specify inlet hot stream temperature or temperature
from a reference stream, and inlet cold stream temperature or
temperature from a reference stream. You also have to specify four
of the following variables:
• Outlet hot stream (temperature or temperature from a reference
stream)
• Outlet cold stream (temperature or temperature from a
reference stream)
• Duty, duty from a reference heat stream, or inlet heat stream
• Overall heat transfer coefficient
• Heat transfer area
You can select the flow direction for either counter-current or co-
current flow. When there is an inlet heat stream or when the duty is

from a reference heat stream, you can select the heat stream
direction to indicate whether the duty value is positive or negative.
You can also select the calculation method in determining the log-
mean temperature difference.
Convective Heat The standard equation for convective heat transfer is:
Transfer
Q = UA ⋅ LMTD
Where:
Q = Heat duty
U = Overall heat transfer coefficient
A = Heat transfer area
LMTD = Log-mean temperature difference
This equation applies for heat transfer with either counter-current
or co-current flow.
Log-Mean Two methods are used in determining log-mean temperature
Temperature difference (LMTD). For the rigorous method:
Difference
∆T1 − ∆T2
LMTD =
 ∆T 
ln  1 
 ∆T2 
For the approximate method:
1 1
 ∆T 3 + ∆T2 3
3
LMTD =  1 
 2 
where ∆T1 and ∆T2 are the approach temperatures.

The approximate method is used even if the rigorous method is
specified when:
• Either of the approach temperatures is zero.
• There is no difference in the approach temperatures.
EO Usage Notes for All features of HXFlux are available in the EO formulation, except
HXFlux the features which are globally unsupported.

HTRI-Xist Reference
HTRI-Xist is the interface to HTRI’s Xist program for designing
and simulating shell and tube heat exchangers. HTRI-Xist can be
used to simulate shell and tube heat exchangers with a wide variety
of configurations. To use HTRI-Xist, place the block in the
flowsheet, connect inlet and outlet streams, and specify a small
number of block inputs, including the name of the Xist input file
for that exchanger.
You can enter information related to the heat exchanger
configuration and geometry through the Xist standalone program
interface. The exchanger specification is saved as an Xist input
file. You do not have to enter information about the exchanger’s
physical characteristics through the Aspen Plus user interface or
through input language.
HTRI-Xist:
Input Specify the name of the Xist input file, parameters
for calculating the property curves, optional Xist
program inputs, flash convergence parameters, and
valid phases
Results View inlet and outlet stream conditions and material
and energy balance results
Detailed View inlet and outlet stream conditions and material
Results and energy balance results
Flowsheet Cold Inlet
Connectivity for Hot Inlet
HTRI-Xist
Hot Outlet
Cold Outlet
Cold Water (optional)
Material Streams
inlet One hot inlet

One cold inlet

One cold outlet
Specifying HTRI-Xist Enter the input for the shell and tube heat exchanger through the
Xist program’s graphical user interface. The input for HTRI-Xist in
Aspen Plus is limited to:
• The Xist input file name that contains the heat exchanger
specification
generated
• A set of Xist program inputs that you can change from within
Aspen Plus (for example, fouling factors and film coefficients)
Flash Specifications Use the FlashOptions sheet to enter flash specifications.
calculations
the FlashOptions sheet. You can use different physical property
methods for the hot side and cold side of the heat exchanger. If you
supply only one set of property specifications, HTRI-Xist uses that
set for both hot- and cold-side calculations.
Solids HTRI-Xist cannot currently handle streams with solids substreams.

CHAPTER 4
Columns
This chapter describes the unit operation models for distillation

columns using shortcut and rigorous calculations, and for liquid-
liquid extraction. The models are:
DSTWU Shortcut Determines minimum Columns with one feed and two product
distillation design reflux ratio, minimum streams
using the Winn- number of stages, and
Underwood- either actual reflux ratio or
Gilliland method actual number of stages
Distl Shortcut Determines separation Columns with one feed and two product
distillation rating based on reflux ratio, streams
using the number of stages, and
Edmister method distillate-to-feed ratio
SCFrac Shortcut Determines product Complex columns, such as crude units and
distillation for composition and flow, vacuum towers
complex number of stages per
petroleum section, and heat duty
fractionation using fractionation indices
units
RadFrac Rigorous Performs rigorous rating Ordinary distillation, absorbers, strippers,
fractionation and design calculations for extractive and azeotropic distillation, three-
single columns phase distillation, reactive distillation
MultiFrac Rigorous Performs rigorous rating Heat integrated columns, air separation
fractionation for and design calculations for columns, absorber/stripper combinations
complex columns multiple columns of any ethylene plant primary fractionator quench
complexity tower combinations, petroleum refining
applications
PetroFrac Petroleum Performs rigorous rating Preflash tower, atmospheric crude unit, vacuum
refining and design calculations for unit, catalytic cracker main fractionator,
fractionation complex columns in delayed coker main fractionator, vacuum lube
petroleum refining fractionator, ethylene plant primary fractionator
applications and quench tower combinations
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Columns • 4-1

RateFrac† Rate-based Performs rigorous rating Distillation columns, absorbers, strippers,
distillation and design for single and reactive systems, heat integrated units,
multiple columns. Based petroleum applications, such as crude and
on nonequilibrium vacuum units, absorber-stripper combination
calculations. Does not
require efficiencies and
HETPs.
†
BatchFrac Batch distillation Performs rigorous Batch distillation
calculations for batch
distillation
Extract Rigorous liquid- Models countercurrent Liquid-liquid extractors
liquid extraction extraction of a liquid
stream using a solvent
†
RateFrac and BatchFrac require a separate license and can be
used only by customers who have purchased it through a specific
license agreement with Aspen Technology, Inc.
This chapter is organized into the following sections:
Section Models
Shortcut Distillation DSTWU, Distl, SCFrac
Rigorous Distillation RadFrac, MultiFrac, PetroFrac, RateFrac,
BatchFrac
Liquid-Liquid Extraction Extract
4-2 • Columns Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

DSTWU Reference
DSTWU performs shortcut design calculations for single-feed,
two-product distillation columns with a partial or total condenser.
DSTWU assumes constant molal overflow and constant relative
volatilities.
DSTWU uses this To estimate
method/correlation
Winn Minimum number of stages
Underwood Minimum reflux ratio
Gilliland Required reflux ratio for a specified
number of stages or the required number
of stages for a specified reflux ratio
For the specified recovery of light and heavy key components,
DSTWU estimates:
• Minimum reflux ratio
• Minimum number of theoretical stages
DSTWU then estimates one of the following:
• Required reflux ratio for the specified number of theoretical
stages
• Required number of theoretical stages for the specified reflux
ratio
DSTWU also estimates the optimum feed stage location and the
condenser and reboiler duties. DSTWU can produce tables and
plots of reflux ratio versus number of stages.
DSTWU:
Input Specify configuration and calculation options,
block-specific report options, flash convergence
parameters, valid phases, and DSTWU
convergence parameters
Results View summary results, material and energy
balance results, and reflux ratio profile

Heat Heat
Flowsheet (optional) (optional)
Connectivity for 1 Distillate
DSTWU Water
2
(optional)
Feed
N-1
N Bottoms
Heat Heat
Material Streams
inlet One material feed stream

outlet One distillate stream
One bottoms stream
One water decant stream from condenser (optional)
Heat Streams
inlet One stream for condenser cooling (optional)

One stream for reboiler heating (optional)
outlet One stream for condenser cooling (optional)
Each outlet heat stream contains the net heat duty for either the
condenser or the reboiler. The net heat duty is the inlet heat stream
minus the actual (calculated) heat duty.
If you use heat streams for the reboiler, you must also use them for
the condenser.
Specifying DSTWU Use the Input Specifications sheet to enter column specifications.
The following table shows the specifications and what is calculated
based on them:
Specification Result
Recovery of light and heavy key Minimum reflux ratio and minimum
components number of theoretical stages
Number of theoretical stages Required reflux ratio
Reflux ratio Required number of theoretical
stages
DSTWU also estimates the optimum feed stage location, and the
condenser and reboiler duties.
DSTWU can generate an optional table of reflux ratio versus
number of stages. Use the Input CalculationOptions sheet to enter
specifications for the table.

Distl Reference
Distl simulates multistage multicomponent columns with a feed
stream and two product streams.
Distl performs shortcut distillation rating calculations for a single-
feed, two-product distillation column. The column can have either
a partial or total condenser. Distl calculates product composition
using the Edmister approach. Distl assumes constant mole
overflow and constant relative volatilities.
Distl:
Input Specify basic column configuration, operating
conditions, Distl convergence parameters, and flash
Results View summary of column results and material and
energy balance results
Dynamic Specify parameters for dynamic simulation
Flowsheet Heat Heat
Connectivity for Distl
1 Distillate
2
Water
(optional)
Feed
N-1
N Bottoms
Heat Heat
Material Streams

One bottoms stream
One water decant stream from condenser (optional)
Heat Streams
inlet One stream for condenser cooling (optional)


outlet One stream for condenser cooling (optional)
Each outlet heat stream contains the net heat duty for either the
condenser or the reboiler. The net heat duty is the inlet heat stream
If you use heat streams for the reboiler, you must also use them for
the condenser.
Specifying Distl Use the Input Specifications sheet to enter the number of stages,
reflux ratio, distillate to feed ratio, and other column specifications.
Use the Input Convergence sheet to override default valid phases
for condenser, convergence parameters for flash calculations, and
model convergence parameters.

SCFrac Reference
Use SCFrac to simulate complex distillation columns with a single
feed, optional stripping steam, and any number of products.
SCFrac also estimates the number of theoretical stages and the
heating/cooling duty for each section.
SCFrac can model complex columns, such as crude units and
vacuum towers. SCFrac performs shortcut distillation calculations
for columns with a single feed, one optional stripping steam
stream, and any number of products. SCFrac divides a column with
n products into n – 1 sections. These sections are numbered from
the top down. SCFrac assumes:
• Relative volatilities are constant for each section
• The flow of liquid from section to section is negligible
SCFrac does not handle solids. SCFrac can perform free-water
calculations in the condenser.
SCFrac:
Input Specify operating parameters, valid phases, SCFrac
convergence parameters, and flash convergence
parameters
Results View condenser results, material and energy
balance results, design specification results, section
profiles, and product summary
Flowsheet Distillate
Connectivity for
SCFrac Side Products
Steam (any number)
(optional)
Feed
Bottoms
Material Streams

One optional stripping steam stream (used for all sections)

One bottoms stream
At least one side product stream
Specifying SCFrac SCFrac divides an n–product column into n – 1 sections (see the
next figure, SCFrac Multidraw Column). SCFrac numbers the
column sections from the top down. For each section, you must
specify:
• Product pressure
• Estimate of product flow or flow fraction based on feed flow
You must specify the ratio of steam to product flow rate for all
product streams except the distillate. You must also enter 2(n – 1)
specifications from the following:
• Fractionation index (number of theoretical stages at total
reflux) of a section
• Total flow, flow rate, or recovery of any group of components
for a product stream
• Value of a property set property for a product stream (see
Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 28)
• Difference of any pair of property set properties for one or a
pair of product stream(s)
• Ratio of any pair of property set properties for one or a pair of
product stream(s)
Because SCFrac performs steam calculations, water must always
be present. All water flow leaves with the top product stream.
A Multidraw
Column P1 P1
P2
Stream-1 Stream-1
P3 P2
Stream-2
Stream-2 P3
P4 Feed Stream-3
Feed P4
Stream-3 Stream-4
P5 P5
Stream-4
SCFrac Multidraw Column

RadFrac Reference
RadFrac is a rigorous model for simulating all types of multistage
vapor-liquid fractionation operations. These operations include:
• Ordinary distillation
• Absorption
• Reboiled absorption
• Stripping
• Reboiled stripping
• Extractive and azeotropic distillation
RadFrac is suitable for:
• Two-phase systems
• Three-phase systems
• Narrow and wide-boiling systems
• Systems exhibiting strong liquid phase nonideality
RadFrac can detect and handle a free-water phase or other second
liquid phase anywhere in the column. RadFrac can handle solids
on every stage.
RadFrac can handle pumparounds leaving any stage and returning
to the same stage or to a different stage.
RadFrac can model columns in which chemical reactions are
occurring. Reactions can have fixed conversions, or they can be:
• Equilibrium
• Rate-controlled
• Electrolytic
RadFrac can also model columns in which two liquid phases and
chemical reactions occur simultaneously, using different reaction
kinetics for the two liquid phases. In addition, RadFrac can model
salt precipitation.
Although RadFrac assumes equilibrium stages, you can specify
either Murphree or vaporization efficiencies. You can manipulate
Murphree efficiencies to match plant performance.
You can use RadFrac to size and rate columns consisting of trays
and/or packings. RadFrac can model both random and structured
packings.

RadFrac:
Setup Specify basic column configuration and operating conditions
DesignSpecs Specify design specifications and view convergence results
Vary Specify manipulated variables to satisfy design specifications and view final values
HeatersCoolers Specify stage heating or cooling
Pumparounds Specify pumparounds and view pumparound results
Pumparounds Specify pumparound heating or cooling curve tables and view tabular results
Hcurves
Decanters Specify decanters and view decanter results
Efficiencies Specify stage, component or sectional efficiencies
Reactions Specify equilibrium, kinetic, and conversion reaction parameters
CondenserHcurves Specify condenser heating or cooling curve tables and view tabular results
ReboilerHcurves Specify reboiler heating or cooling curve tables and view tabular results
TraySizing Specify sizing parameters for tray column sections, and view results
TrayRating Specify rating parameters for tray column sections, and view results
PackSizing Specify sizing parameters for packed column sections, and view results
PackRating Specify rating parameters for packed column sections, and view results
Properties Specify physical property parameters for column sections
Estimates Specify initial estimates for stage temperatures, and vapor and liquid flows and
compositions
Convergence Specify convergence parameters for the column and feed flash calculations, and
block-specific diagnostic message levels
Report Specify block-specific report options and pseudostreams
BlockOptions Override global values for physical properties, simulation options, diagnostic
message levels, and report options for this block
UserSubroutines Specify user subroutines for reaction kinetics, KLL calculations, tray sizing and
rating, and packing sizing and rating
ResultsSummary View key column results for the overall RadFrac column
Profiles View and specify column profiles

Flowsheet
Connectivity for
RadFrac
RadFrac can have any number of:

• Stages
• Interstage heaters/coolers
• Decanters
• Pumparounds
Material Streams
inlet At least one inlet material stream

outlet One vapor or liquid distillate product stream, or both
One water distillate product stream (optional)
One bottoms liquid product stream
Up to three side product streams per stage (optional)
Any number of pseudo-product streams (optional)
Each stage can have:
• Any number of inlet streams
• Up to three outlet streams (one vapor and two liquid)
Outlet streams can be partial or total drawoffs of the stage flows.
Decanter outlet streams can return to the stage immediately below.
Or they can be split into any number of streams, each returning to a
different user-specified stage. Pumparounds can go between any
two stages, or to the same stage.
Any number of pseudoproduct streams can represent column
internal flows, pumparound flows, and thermosyphon reboiler
flows. A pseudoproduct stream does not affect column results.
Heat Streams
inlet One inlet heat stream per stage (optional)

One heat stream per pumparound (optional)
outlet One outlet heat stream per stage (optional)
One heat stream per pumparound (optional)

RadFrac uses an inlet heat stream as a duty specification for all
stages except the condenser, reboiler, and pumparounds. If you do
not give two column operating specifications on the Setup
Configuration sheet, RadFrac uses a heat stream as a specification
for the condenser and reboiler. If you do not give two
specifications on the Pumparounds Specifications sheet, RadFrac
uses a heat stream as a specification for pumparounds.
If you give two specifications on the Setup Configuration sheet or
Pumparounds Specifications sheet, RadFrac does not use the inlet
heat stream as a specification. The inlet heat stream supplies the
required heating or cooling.
Use optional outlet streams for the net heat duty of the condenser,
reboiler, and pumparounds. The value of the outlet heat stream
equals the value of the inlet heat stream (if any) minus the actual
(calculated) heat duty.
Specifying RadFrac This section describes the following topics on RadFrac column
configuration:
• Stage Numbering
• Feed Stream Conventions
• Columns Without Condensers or Reboilers
• Reboiler Handling
• Heater and Cooler Specifications
• Decanters
• Pumparounds
Stage Numbering RadFrac numbers stages from the top down, starting with the
condenser (or starting with the top stage if there is no condenser).
Feed Stream Use the Setup Streams sheet to specify the feed and product stages.
Conventions
RadFrac provides three conventions for handling feed streams:
• Above-Stage
• On-Stage
• Decanter (for three phase calculations only)
(See the following figures, RadFrac Feed Convention Above-Stage
and RadFrac Feed Convention On-Stage.)
When the feed convention is Above-Stage, RadFrac introduces a
material stream between adjacent stages. The liquid portion flows
to the stage you specify. The vapor portion flows to the stage
above. You can introduce a liquid feed to the top stage (or
condenser) by specifying Stage=1. You can introduce a vapor feed
to the bottom stage (or reboiler) by specifying Stage= the number
of equilibrium stages + 1. Feed convention Decanter is used only

in three-phase calculations (Valid Phases=Vapor-Liquid-Liquid on
the Setup Configuration sheet) involving decanters. You can
introduce a feed directly to a decanter attached to a stage using this
convention.
n-1
Vapor
Mixed feed to
stage n
Liquid
RadFrac Feed Convention Above-Stage
n-1
Mixed feed to
stage n n
RadFrac Feed Convention On-Stage
When the Feed Convention is On-Stage, both the liquid and vapor
portions of a feed flow to the stage you specify.
Columns Without You can specify the column configuration on the Setup
Condensers or Reboilers Configuration sheet.
If the column has no Then specify On sheet
Condenser None for Setup Configuration
Condenser
Reboiler None for Setup Configuration
Reboiler
Reboiler Handling RadFrac can model two reboiler types:
• Kettle
• Thermosyphon
A kettle reboiler is modeled as the last stage in the column on the
Setup Configuration sheet. Select Kettle for reboiler. By default,
RadFrac uses a kettle reboiler. To specify the reboiler duty, enter

Reboiler Duty as one of the operating specifications on the Setup
Configuration sheet or leave it as a calculated value.
A thermosyphon reboiler is modeled as a pumparound with a
heater, from and to the bottom stage. Select Thermosyphon for
Reboiler on the Setup Configuration sheet. Enter all other
thermosyphon reboiler specifications on the Setup Reboiler sheet.
The next figure shows the thermosyphon reboiler configuration.
By default, RadFrac returns the reboiler outlet to the last stage
using the On-Stage feed convention. You can also use the Reboiler
Return Feed Convention on the Reboiler sheet to specify Above-
Stage. This directs the vapor portion of the reboiler outlet to
Stage= the number of equilibrium stages - 1.
Nstage - 1
Reboiler
Bottoms (B)
Thermosyphon Reboiler
The thermosyphon reboiler model has five related variables:

• Pressure
• Flow rate
• Temperature
• Temperature change
• Vapor fraction
You must specify one of the following:
• Temperature
• Vapor fraction
• Flow rate
• Flow rate and temperature
• Flow rate and temperature change
• Flow rate and vapor fraction

If you choose an option consisting of two variables, you must
specify the reboiler heat duty on the Setup Configuration sheet.
RadFrac treats the value you enter for the reboiler heat duty as an
initial estimate.
The reboiler pressure is optional. If you do not enter a value,
RadFrac uses the bottom stage pressure.
Heater and Cooler You can specify interstage heaters and coolers in one of two ways:
Specifications
• Specifying the duty directly on the HeatersCoolers SideDuties
sheet
• Requesting UA calculations on the HeatersCoolers
UtilityExchangers sheet
If you specify the duty directly on the HeatersCoolers SideDuties
sheet, enter a positive duty for heating and a negative duty for
cooling.
If you request UA calculations on the HeatersCoolers
UtilityExchangers sheet, RadFrac calculates the duty and outlet
temperature of the heating/cooling fluid simultaneously with the
column. The UA calculations:
• Assume the stage temperature is constant
• Use an arithmetic average temperature difference
• Assume the heating or cooling fluid does not experience any
phase change
To request UA calculations, specify the:
• UA
• Heating or cooling fluid component
• Flow and inlet temperature of the fluid
You can specify the heat capacity of the fluid directly on the
HeatersCoolers UtilityExchangers sheet or RadFrac can compute it
from a property method. If RadFrac computes the heat capacity,
you must also enter the pressure and phase of the heating or
cooling fluid. By default, RadFrac calculates the heat capacity
using the block property method. But you can also use a different
property method.
You can also specify the heat loss for sections of the column on the
HeatersCoolers HeatLoss sheet.
Decanters For three-phase calculations (Valid Phases=Vapor-Liquid-Liquid
on the Setup Configuration sheet), you can define any number of
decanters. Enter decanter specifications on the Decanters form.
For the decanter on the top stage, you must enter the return fraction
of at least one of the two liquid phases (Fraction of 1st Liquid

Returned, Fraction of 2nd Liquid Returned on the Decanters
Specifications sheet). For decanters on other stages, you must
always specify both Fraction of 1st Liquid Returned and Fraction
of 2nd Liquid Returned.
You can enter Temperature and Degrees Subcooling on the
Decanters Options sheet to model subcooled decanters. If you do
not specify Temperature and Degrees Subcooling, the decanter is
operated at the temperature of the stage to which the decanter is
attached. If side product streams are decanter products, you cannot
specify their flow rates. RadFrac calculates their flow rates from
the Fraction of 1st Liquid Returned and Fraction of 2nd Liquid
Returned.
By default RadFrac returns decanter streams to the stage
immediately below. You can return the decanter streams to any
other stage by entering a different Return Stage number on the
Decanters Specifications sheet. You can split a return stream into
any number of streams by giving a split fraction (Split Fraction of
Total Return for the 1st Liquid and 2nd Liquid). Each resulting
stream may go to a different return stage.
When return streams do not go to the next stage, a feed or
pumparound must go to the next stage. This prevents dry stages.
Pumparounds RadFrac can handle pumparounds from any stage to the same or
any other stage. Use the Pumparounds form to enter all
pumparound specifications.
You must enter the source and destination stage locations for
pumparounds. A pumparound can be either a partial or total
drawoff of the:
• Stage liquid
• First liquid phase
• Second liquid phase
• Vapor phase
You can associate a heater or cooler with a pumparound. If the
pumparound is a partial drawoff of the stage flow, you must enter
two of the following specifications:
• Flow rate
• Temperature
• Vapor fraction
• Heat Duty

If the pumparound is a total drawoff, you must enter one of the
following specifications:
• Temperature
• Vapor fraction
• Heat Duty
Vapor fraction is allowed only when Valid Phases=Vapor-Liquid
or Vapor-Liquid-Liquid.
Use the Pumparounds Specifications sheet to enter these operating
specifications.
Pressure specification is optional. The default pumparound
pressure is the same as the source stage pressure. RadFrac assumes
that the pumparound at the heater/cooler outlet has the same phase
condition as the pumparound at the inlet. You can override the
phase condition using the Valid phases field on Pumparound
Specifications sheet.
RadFrac can return the pumparound to a stage using either the:
• On-stage option
• Above-stage option (returns the pumparound to the column
between two stages)
In three-phase columns, RadFrac can also return the pumparound
to a decanter associated with a stage. You can select above-stage
using the Return option field.
RadFrac assumes the pumparound at the heater/cooler outlet has
the same phase condition as the inlet.
You can use Return-Phase on the Pumparounds Specifications
sheet to assign a different phase at the heater/cooler outlet. Or you
can specify Valid Phases=VaporLiquid or Vapor-Liquid-Liquid
and let RadFrac determine the return phase condition from the
heater/cooler specifications.
RadFrac formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• Thermosyphon Reboiler *
• TPSAR with pressure update
* Thermosyphon reboiler is supported in the EO formulation when
vfrac is one of the specifications.

RadFrac is capable of performing three-phase calculations in the
equation-oriented formulation. By default, the EO formulation
assumes the same stages will have three-phase separation as in the
sequential-modular solution. You can force the EO formulation to
check for three-phase separation on all stages specified on the
RadFrac | Setup | 3-Phase sheet by selecting the checkbox for the
Phase splitting on all specified trays option on the RadFrac |
Block Options | EO Options | Additional Variables dialog box..
When three-phase calculations are specified, RadFrac checks the
final EO solution for missed three-phase separation (on stages
modeled as two-phase) using Gibbs free energy minimization. If
such three-phase separation is found, RadFrac issues an error. You
can either reconcile results with SM and run again, or use the
Phase splitting on all specified trays option to specify the stages
where RadFrac should look for three-phase separation.
Free-Water and RadFrac can perform both free-water and rigorous three-phase
Rigorous Three- calculations. (See Aspen Plus Physical Property Methods and
Phase Calculations Models, Chapter 6.) These calculations are controlled by options
you specify on the Setup Configuration sheet.
You can select from three types of calculations:
• Free water in the condenser only
• Free water on any or all stages
• Rigorous three-phase calculations
When you choose free-water calculations in the condenser, only
free water can be decanted from the condenser. You cannot use
nonideal for the Overall Loop convergence method.
Specify one of the following on the Setup Configuration sheet:
Valid Phases= On Sheet For
Vapor-Liquid- Setup Free water in the
FreeWaterCondenser Configuration condenser only
Vapor-Liquid- Setup Free water on all
FreeWaterAnyStage Configuration stages
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid Setup Rigorous three-phase
Configuration calculations
For RadFrac calculations, you must also specify which stages to
test for two liquid phases on the Setup 3-Phase sheet.
When you choose completely rigorous three-phase calculations on
all stages selected, RadFrac makes no assumptions about the nature
of the two liquid phases. You can associate a decanter with any
stage. You cannot use Sum-Rates for the Overall Loop
convergence method.

Efficiencies You can specify one of two types of efficiencies:
• Vaporization
• Murphree
Vaporization efficiency is defined as:
yi , j
Effi v =
K i, j x i , j
Murphree efficiency is defined as:

y i , j − y i , j +1
Effi ,Mj =
K i, j x i , j − yi , j +1
Where:
K = Equilibrium K value
x = Liquid mole fraction
y = Vapor mole fraction
Eff v = Vaporization efficiency
Eff M = Murphree efficiency
i = Component index
j = Stage index
To specify vaporization or Murphree efficiencies, enter the number
of actual stages on the Setup Configuration sheet. Then use the
Efficiencies form to enter the efficiencies.
For three-phase calculations, the vaporization and Murphree
efficiencies you enter apply equally to the following equilibrium
by default:
• Vapor-liquid1 (VL1E)
• Vapor-liquid2 (VL2E)
You can use the Efficiencies form to enter separate efficiencies for
VL1E and VL2E. You cannot enter separate efficiencies for VL1E
and VL2E when you specify equilibrium reactions or when using
Murphree efficiencies.
You can use any of these efficiencies to account for departure from
equilibrium. But you cannot convert from one efficiency to the
other. Magnitudes of the efficiencies can be quite different. You
should manipulate the Murphree efficiency to match the operating
data when:
• Efficiency is unknown
• Actual column operating data are available

When manipulating the Murphree efficiency, use design
specifications on the DesignSpecs and Vary forms. Details on
using and estimating efficiencies are described by Holland,
Fundamentals of Multi-Component Distillation, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, 1981.
Algorithms You can select an algorithm and/or initialization option for column
simulation on the Convergence Basic sheet. The default standard
algorithm and standard initialization option are appropriate for
most applications. You can improve convergence behavior for the
following applications using the guidelines described in this
section:
• Petroleum and Petrochemical Applications
• Highly Nonideal Systems
• Azeotropic Distillation
• Absorbers and Strippers
• Cryogenic Applications
In order to change the algorithm and initialization option on the
Convergence Basic sheet, you must first choose Custom as the
option in the Convergence field on the Setup Configuration sheet.
Petroleum and In petroleum and petrochemical applications involving extremely
Petrochemical wide-boiling mixtures and/or many components and design
Applications specifications, you can improve the convergence efficiency and
reliability by choosing Sum-Rates in the Algorithm field on the
Convergence Basic sheet.
Highly Nonideal Systems When liquid phase nonidealities are exceptionally strong, choose
Nonideal in the Algorithm field on the Convergence Basic sheet to
improve the convergence behavior. Use this algorithm only when
the number of outside loop iterations (using the standard
algorithm) exceeds 25.
You can also use the Newton algorithm for highly nonideal
systems. Newton is better for columns with highly sensitive
specifications. But it is usually slower, especially for columns with
many stages and components.
Azeotropic Distillation For azeotropic distillation applications where an entraining agent
separates an azeotropic mixture, specify the following on the
Convergence Basic sheet:
• Algorithm, Newton
• Initialization method, Azeotropic
A classic example of azeotropic distillation is ethanol dehydration
using benzene.

Absorbers and Strippers To model absorbers and strippers specify Condenser=None and
Reboiler=None on the Setup Configuration sheet. The heat duty is
zero for adiabatic operation. For extremely wide-boiling mixtures,
specify one of the following:
• Algorithm=Sum-Rates on the Convergence Basic sheet
• Convergence=Standard on the Setup Configuration sheet and
choose Absorber=Yes on the Convergence Basic sheet
Cryogenic Applications For cryogenic applications such as air separation, the standard
algorithm is recommended. To invoke a special initialization
procedure designed for cryogenic systems, specify Cryogenic for
Initialization on the Convergence Basic sheet.
Rating Mode RadFrac allows the column to be operated in a rating mode or a
design mode. Rating mode requires different column specifications
for two- and three-phase calculations.
For two-phase calculations, you must enter the following on the
Setup Form:
• Valid Phases=Vapor-Liquid or Vapor-Liquid-
FreeWaterCondenser for handling free water in condenser
• A Total, Subcooled, or Partial-Vapor condenser
• Two additional column operating variables
If the condenser or reflux is subcooled, you can also specify the
degrees subcooling or the subcooled temperature.
For three-phase calculations, you must specify Valid Phases=
Vapor-Liquid-Liquid or Vapor-Liquid-FreeWaterAnyStage (for
free water calculations) on the Setup Configuration sheet. The
required specifications depend on what you specify for the return
fractions of the two liquid phases (Fraction of 1st Liquid Returned
and Fraction of 2nd Liquid Returned) in the top stage decanter.
The following table lists the three specification options:
If you specified this on
Decanters Specifications Enter on Setup Configuration
Fraction of 1st Liquid Returned A Total, Subcooled, or Partial-Vapor
or Fraction of 2nd Liquid condenser and two operating
Returned, or no top decanter specifications
Fraction of 1st Liquid Returned A Total, Subcooled, or Partial-Vapor
and Fraction of 2nd Liquid condenser and one operating
Returned specification
Fraction of 1st Liquid Returned Two operating specifications, and an
and Fraction of 2nd Liquid estimate for the amount of vapor in the
Returned distillate on the Estimates Vapor
Composition sheet. RadFrac assumes a
partial condenser with both vapor and
liquid distillates.

Design Mode RadFrac allows the column to be operated in rating mode or design
mode. In design mode, use the DesignSpecs form to specify
column performance parameters (such as purity or recovery). You
must indicate which variables to manipulate to achieve these
specifications. You can manipulate any variables that are allowed
in rating mode, except:
• Number of stages
• Pressure profile
• Vaporization efficiency
• Subcooled reflux temperature
• Degrees of subcooling
• Decanter temperature and pressure
• Locations of feeds, products, heaters, pumparounds, and
decanters
• Pressures of thermosyphon reboiler and pumparounds
• UA specifications for heaters
The flow rates of inlet material streams and the duties of inlet heat
streams can also be manipulated variables.
These are the design specifications.
You can specify For any
Purity Stream including internal streams †
Recovery of any components Set of product streams, including
groups sidestreams ††
Flow rate of any components Internal stream or set of product
groups streams
Temperature Stage
Value of any Prop-Set property Internal or product stream †††
Ratio or difference of any pair of Single or paired internal or product
Prop-Set properties streams
Flow ratio of any components Internal streams to any other internal
groups to any other component streams, or to any set of feed or
groups product streams
† Express the purity as the sum of mole, mass, or standard liquid
volume fractions of any group of components relative to any other
group of components.
†† Express recovery as a fraction of the same components in any
set of feed streams.
††† See Aspen Plus User Guide, chapter 28.

Reactive Distillation RadFrac can handle chemical reactions. These reactions can occur
in the liquid and/or vapor phase. The details about the reactions are
entered on a generic Reactions form outside RadFrac. RadFrac
allows two different reaction model types: REAC-DIST or USER.
RadFrac can model the following types of reactions:
• Equilibrium-controlled
• Rate-controlled
• Conversion
• Electrolytic
RadFrac can also model salt precipitation, especially in the case of
electrolytic systems. You can request reaction calculations for the
entire column, or you can restrict reactions to a certain column
segment (for example, to model the presence of catalyst). For
three-phase calculations, you can restrict reactions to one of the
two liquid phases, or use separate reaction kinetics for the two
liquid phases.
To include reactions in RadFrac you must enter the following
information on the Reactions Specifications sheet:
• Reaction type and Reaction/Chemistry ID
• Column section in which the reactions occur
Depending on the reaction type, you must enter equilibrium
constant, kinetic, or conversion parameters on the generic
Reactions form outside RadFrac. For electrolytic reactions, you
can also enter the reaction data on the Reactions Chemistry form
outside RadFrac. To consider salt precipitation, enter the salt
precipitation parameters on the Reactions Salt sheet or the
Reactions Chemistry form outside RadFrac.
To associate reactions and salt precipitation with a column
segment, enter the corresponding Reactions ID (or Chemistry ID)
on the Reactions Specifications sheet.
For rate-controlled reactions, you must enter holdup or residence
time data in the phase where the reactions occur. Use the Reactions
Holdups or Residence Times sheets. For conversion reactions, use
the Reactions Conversion sheet to override the conversion
parameters specified on the Reactions Conversion form. RadFrac
also supports User Reaction Subroutine. The name and other
details of the reaction subroutine are entered on the
UserSubroutines form.

Solution Strategies RadFrac uses two general approaches for column convergence:
• Inside-out
• Napthali-Sandholm
The standard, sum-rates, and nonideal algorithms are variants of
the inside-out approach. The MultiFrac, PetroFrac, and Extract
models also use this approach. The Newton algorithm uses the
classical Napthali-Sandholm approach. Use the Convergence form
to select the algorithm and specify the associated parameters.
Inside-Out Algorithms The inside-out algorithms consist of two nested iteration loops.
The K-value and enthalpy models you specify are evaluated only
in the outside loop to determine parameters of simplified local
models. When using nonideal, algorithm RadFrac introduces a
composition dependence into the local models. The local model
parameters are the outside loop iteration variables. The outside
loop is converged when the changes of the outside loop iteration
variables are sufficiently small from one iteration to the next.
Convergence uses a combination of the bounded Wegstein method
and the Broyden quasi-Newton method for selected variables.
In the inside loop, the basic describing equations (component mass
balances, total mass balance, enthalpy balance, and phase
equilibrium) are expressed in terms of the local physical property
models. RadFrac solves these equations to obtain updated
temperature and composition profiles. Convergence uses one of the
following methods:
• Bounded Wegstein
• Broyden quasi-Newton
• Schubert quasi-Newton
• Newton
RadFrac adjusts the inside loop convergence tolerance with each
outside loop iteration. The tolerance becomes tighter as the outside
loop converges.
Newton Algorithm The Newton algorithm solves column-describing equations
simultaneously, using Newton’s method. The convergence is
stabilized using the dogleg strategy of Powell. Design
specifications may be solved either simultaneously with the
column-describing equations or in an outer loop.

Design Mode RadFrac provides two methods for handling design specification
Convergence convergence:
• Nested convergence
• Simultaneous convergence
Nested Design Spec The Nested Middle Loop convergence method attempts to satisfy
Convergence (for all the design specifications by determining the values of the
algorithms except SUM- manipulated variables (within their bounds) that minimize the
RATES) weighted sum of squares function:
2
∧ 
 G m − GM 
Φ= ∑ Wm
 Gm*


m
 
Where:
m = Design specification number
∧
G = Calculated value
G = Desired value
G* = Scaling factor
w = Weighting factor
The algorithm that manipulates the variables to minimize Φ does
not depend on matching particular variables with corresponding
design specifications. You should carefully select the manipulated
variables and design specifications. Make sure that each
manipulated variable has a significant effect on at least one design
specification.
The number of design specifications must be equal to or greater
than the number of manipulated variables. If there are more design
specifications than manipulated variables, assign weighting factors
to reflect the relative importance of the specifications. The larger
the weighting factor, the more nearly a specification will be
satisfied. Scale factors normalize the errors, so that different
specification types are compared on a consistent basis.
When a value of a manipulated variable reaches a bound, that
bound is active. If a problem has no active bounds and the same
number of manipulated variables as design specifications, then Φ
will approach zero (within some tolerance) when all specifications
are satisfied.
If there are active bounds or more design specifications than
manipulated variables, RadFrac minimizes Φ . The weighting
factors determine the relative degree to which the design
specifications are satisfied.

Simultaneous Design The Simultaneous Middle Loop convergence method algorithm
Spec Convergence (for solves the design specification functions simultaneously with the
Algorithm=SUM-RATES, column-describing equations:
NEWTON)
∧ 
 G m − GM 
Fm =   =0
 Gm* 
 
Because the Simultaneous Middle Loop convergence method uses

an equation-solving approach, there must be an equal number of
design specifications and manipulated variables. In the nested
method, no coupling is assumed between design specifications and
manipulated variables. However, each design specification must be
significantly affected by at least one manipulated variable. Bounds
and weighting factors are not used. In general, the Simultaneous
method gives better performance if all the specifications are
feasible.
Physical Properties To override the global physical property method, use the Properties
PropertySections sheet. You can specify different physical
properties for different parts of the column.
For three-phase calculations, you can specify separate calculation
methods for Vapor-Liquid1 Equilibrium (VL1E) and Liquid1-
Liquid2 Equilibrium (LLE). Use one of the following methods:
• Associate separate property methods with VL1E and LLE
using the Phase Equilibrium list box
• Calculate VL1E using a property method. Specify LLE using
liquid-liquid distribution (KLL) coefficients
You can use the Properties KLLSections sheet to enter the KLL
coefficients using a built-in temperature polynomial, and associate
the coefficients with one or more column segments. Or you can use
the Properties KLLCorrelations sheet to associate a user-KLL
subroutine with one or more column segments.
Solids Handling RadFrac has two methods for handling inert solids:
• Overall-balance
• Stage-by-stage
Use the Solids handling option on the Convergence Basic sheet to
select either an overall balance or stage-by-stage. The two methods
differ in how they treat solids in the mass and energy balances.
Neither method considers inert solids in the phase equilibrium
calculations. However, salts formed by salt precipitation reactions
(see Reactive Distillation) are considered in phase equilibrium
calculations.

The overall-balance method:
• Temporarily removes all solids from inlet streams
• Performs column calculations without solids
• Adiabatically mixes solids removed from inlet streams with
liquid product from the bottom stage
The overall-balance method maintains an overall mass and energy
balance around the column. But it does not satisfy individual stage
balances. This is the default method.
The stage-by-stage method treats solids rigorously in all stage
mass and energy balances. The ratio of liquids to solids on a stage
is maintained in the product streams withdrawn from that stage.
The specified product flow is the total flow rate of the stream,
including the solids. If a nonconventional (NC) solids substream is
present in the column feeds, you must give all column flow and
flow ratio specifications on a mass basis.
When you specify a decanter, RadFrac can decant the solids
partially or totally. By default, RadFrac decants the solids partially
along with the second liquid phase. RadFrac uses the return
fraction you specify for the second liquid phase (Fraction of 2nd
Liquid Returned on the Decanters Specifications sheet) to decant
the solids. If there is no second liquid phase in the decanter,
RadFrac decants the solids partially along with the first liquid
phase. RadFrac uses the return fraction you specify for the first
liquid phase (Fraction of 2nd Liquid Returned on the Decanters
Specifications sheet) in this case. You can request complete
decanting of the solids by selecting Decant Solids Totally on the
Decanters Options sheet.
Sizing and Rating of RadFrac has extensive capability to size, rate and perform pressure
Trays and Packings drop calculations for trayed and packed columns. Use the
following forms to enter specifications:
• TraySizing
• TrayRating
• PackSizing
• PackRating
See Appendix A of the Unit Operation Models Reference Manual
for details on tray and packing types and correlations.

MultiFrac Reference
MultiFrac is a rigorous model for simulating general systems of
interlinked multistage fractionation units. MultiFrac models can
handle a complex configuration consisting of:
• Any number of columns, each with any number of stages
• Any number of connections between columns or within each
column
• Arbitrary flow splitting and mixing of connecting streams
MultiFrac can handle operations with:
• Side strippers
• Pumparounds
• External heat exchangers
• Single-stage flashes
• Feed furnace
Typical MultiFrac applications include:
• Heat-interstaged columns, such as Petlyuk towers
• Air separation column systems
• Absorber/stripper combinations
• Ethylene plant primary fractionator/quench tower combinations
You can also use MultiFrac for petroleum refining fractionation
units such as atmospheric crude units and vacuum units. But for
these applications, PetroFrac is more convenient to use. Use
MultiFrac only when the configuration is beyond the capabilities
of PetroFrac.
MultiFrac can detect a free-water phase in the condenser or
anywhere in the column. It can decant the free-water phase on any
stage.
Although MultiFrac assumes equilibrium stage calculations, you
can specify either Murphree or vaporization efficiencies.
You can use MultiFrac for both sizing and rating trays and
packings. MultiFrac can model both random and structured
packings.

MultiFrac:
Columns Specify parameters and view results for columns
Inlets Outlets Specify inlet and outlet material and heat stream
locations
ConnectStreams Specify sources and destinations of connecting
material and heat streams, view connecting stream
results
FlowRatios Specify stream flow ratios
DesignSpecs Specify design specifications, and view
convergence results
Vary Specify manipulated variables to satisfy design
specifications and view final values
Condenser Hcurves Specify condenser heating or cooling curve tables
Reboiler HCurves Specify reboiler heating or cooling curve tables
Connect Stream Specify connecting stream heating or cooling
HCurves curve tables and view tabular results
Tray Sizing Specify sizing parameters for tray column
sections, and view results
Tray Rating Specify rating parameters for tray column
Pack Sizing Specify sizing parameters for packed column
Pack Rating Specify rating parameters for packed column
Convergence Specify convergence parameters for column
calculations, and block-specific diagnostic
message levels
Report Specify block-specific report options and
pseudostream information
UserSubroutines Specify user subroutine parameters for tray sizing
and rating, and packing sizing and rating
ResultsSummary View results of balances and splits

Top Stage
Flowsheet Vapor Distillate
or Condenser
Connectivity for Heat Duty 1
(optional) Heat
MultiFrac Reflux
Liquid Distillate (optional)
Water Distillate (optional)
Feeds Side Products (optional)
Heat Interconnecting Streams

(Heater Optional)
Pumparounds Interconnecting Streams

and Bypasses (Heater Optional)
(Heater Optional)
Heat (optional)
Nstage
Nstage
Bottom Stage or Heat (optional)
Reboiler Heat Duty
(optional) Bottoms
(or Interconnecting
Stream)
Top Stage
Vapor Distilate
or Condenser
Heat Duty 1
(optional) Heat
Feeds Side Products (optional)
Heat Interconnecting Streams

(Heater Optional)
Pumparounds Interconnecting Streams

and Bypasses (Heater Optional)
(Heater Optional)
Heat (optional)
Nstage
Bottom Stage or Heat (optional)
Reboiler Heat Duty
(optional) Bottoms
(or Interconnecting
Stream)
Material Streams

outlet Any number of optional pseudo-product streams
Up to three optional outlet material streams per stage (one
vapor, one liquid, and one free water)
You can connect any number of columns by any number of
connecting streams. For each column, any number of connecting
streams can represent pumparounds and bypasses. These streams
can flow between any two stages, or to the same stage. Each
connecting stream can have an associated heater.
Each column must have one liquid product or connecting stream
leaving the bottom stage. The top stage of the main column
(column 1) must have a product stream, which cannot be a
connecting stream. The top stage of the other columns (column 2,
3, ...) must have a vapor product or a vapor connecting stream.
The pseudoproduct streams represent column internal flows and
connecting stream flows.
Heat Streams
inlet One inlet heat stream per stage (optional)

One inlet heat stream per connecting stream (optional)
outlet One outlet heat stream per connecting stream (optional)
MultiFrac uses an inlet heat stream as a duty specification for all
stages except the condenser, reboiler, and connecting streams. If
you do not provide two column operating specifications on the
Columns Setup Configuration sheet, MultiFrac uses a heat stream
as a specification for the condenser and reboiler.
If you do not provide two specifications on the ConnectStreams
form, MultiFrac uses a heat stream as a specification for
connecting streams.
If you provide two specifications on the Columns Setup
Configuration sheet or ConnectStreams form, MultiFrac does not
use the inlet heat stream as a specification. The inlet heat stream
supplies the required heating or cooling.
You can use optional outlet heat streams for the net heat duty of
the condenser, reboiler, and connecting streams. The value of the
outlet heat stream equals the value of the inlet heat stream (if any),
Specifying MultiFrac Individual columns are identified by column numbers. The
numbering order does not affect algorithm performance. Column 1
has different specifications from the other columns. Within each
column, the stages are numbered from the top down, starting with
the condenser.

Stream Definitions MultiFrac uses four types of streams:
• External streams
• Connecting streams
• Internal streams
• Pseudostreams
External streams are standard MultiFrac inlet and outlet streams.
They are identified by stream IDs.
Connecting streams are within MultiFrac but external to individual
columns. They can connect two columns, or stages of the same
column (bypasses and pumparounds). You can associate a heater
with any connecting stream. Connecting stream heaters are
identified by connecting stream numbers.
Internal streams are liquid or vapor flows between adjacent stages
of the same column. An internal stream is identified by a source
stage number and a column number.
Pseudostreams store the results of internal and connecting streams.
They are a subset of external outlet streams. Unlike normal outlet
streams, pseudostreams do not participate in block mass balance
calculations.
Required Specifications Follow these guidelines when entering specifications for column 1:
• The number of stages must be greater than 1
• Two additional operating specifications are required
• The distillate flow may not be a connecting stream
You must specify:
• Bottoms rate or distillate rate. The distillate rate includes both
the vapor and liquid distillate flows
• Either condenser duty, reboiler duty, reflux ratio or reflux rate
• Distillate vapor fraction or condenser temperature
If you specify the condenser stage temperature:
• Both liquid and vapor distillate products must be present
(distillate vapor fraction is greater than 0 or less than 1)
• You must also specify an estimate for the distillate vapor
fraction
Follow these guidelines when entering specifications for other
columns:
• The number of stages can be 1 (for example, to model a single-
stage flash or feed furnace)
• The distillate can be a connecting stream
• MultiFrac calculates the distillate vapor fraction

• The distillate rate includes only the vapor distillate flow and
must be greater than zero. If a liquid distillate is present,
specify flow on the InletsOutlets form.
For columns with more than one stage, you may specify condenser
duty, reboiler duty, bottoms rate, distillate rate, and reflux rate.
For columns with one stage, you must specify either:
• Bottoms rate
• Distillate rate (includes only the vapor distillate)
• Condenser duty
Feed Stream MultiFrac provides two conventions for handling feed streams (see
Conventions MultiFrac Feed Convention Above-Stage and MultiFrac Feed
Convention On-Stage in the following figures):
• Above-Stage
• On-Stage
When Feed-Convention is Above-Stage, MultiFrac introduces a
to the stage (n) you specify. The vapor portion flows to the stage
above (n – 1). You can introduce a liquid feed to the top stage (or
to the bottom stage (or reboiler) by specifying Stage=Number of
stages + 1.
n-1
Vapor
Mixed feed
to stage n
Liquid
MultiFrac Feed Convention Above-Stage

n-1
Mixed feed n
to stage n
n+1
MultiFrac Feed Convention On-Stage
When Feed-Convention is On-Stage, both the liquid and vapor

portions of a feed flow to the stage (n) you specify.
Connecting Streams MultiFrac allows any number of connecting streams. Any number
of these streams can have the same:
• Source column, stage, and phase
• Destination column and stage
MultiFrac introduces connecting streams on the destination stage
regardless of their phase (that is, Feed Convention=On-Stage). All
connecting streams can have a heater with heat duty, temperature,
or temperature change specified. Use the ConnectStreams form to
enter all specifications for connecting streams.
Each terminal stream can be the source of a product stream and
any number of connecting streams. If there is no product stream, at
least one connecting stream must have an unspecified flow.
For a connecting stream, required specifications depend on
whether the stream:
• Has a flow rate that is fixed indirectly on the FlowRatios or
Columns FlowSpecs form
• Is a terminal stream
• Is a pumparound to the top stage of column 1
For this type of connecting You must specify
stream
One that does not satisfy the Two of the following: flow, temperature
above conditions (or temperature change), and duty †
One whose flow is fixed Either temperature (or temperature
indirectly on the FlowRatios or change), or duty †
Columns FlowSpecs form
A terminal stream (vapor Either temperature (or temperature
distillate or liquid bottoms) change) or duty †
† Duty can default to 0 if necessary.

You can enter a second specification. If this specification is
missing, MultiFrac uses the net flow from the stage excluding any
other connecting stream with flow specifications.
For a connecting stream that is the liquid pumparound to the top
stage of column 1, enter two of the following:
• Flow
• Temperature (or temperature change)
• Duty (specify 0 if there is no associated heater or cooler)
If you enter only one of flow, temperature, or temperature change,
MultiFrac uses the top stage duty for the missing requirement.
When a stage is the destination of a connecting stream, MultiFrac
uses the heat duty associated with the stage to determine the
temperature of the connecting stream. When you enter the duty,
temperature, or temperature change of the connecting stream, the
stage duty does not affect the connecting stream temperature. Stage
duty is properly accounted for in the stage enthalpy calculations.
When a pumparound, bypass, or other connecting stream has a
specified temperature change or outlet temperature, MultiFrac
assumes that the specific value does not result in a phase change of
any fraction of the stream. When you specify heat duty, a phase
change may occur.
Connecting streams can be either a total or partial drawoff of the
stage flow. MultiFrac determines the drawoff type based on the
number of specifications you give.
If the drawoff type is You enter
Partial Two of the following: flow, temperature,
temperature change, and heat duty †
Total One of the following: temperature, temperature
change, and heat duty ††
† Enter zero for heat duty if heater is absent.
†† Enter zero for heat duty if heater is absent. Flow rate is taken as
the net flow of the stage, excluding any product flow and any other
connecting stream flow.
MultiFrac allows total drawoff only for the top vapor stream and
bottom liquid stream. For partial drawoffs you can specify the flow
rate. Or MultiFrac can determine the flow rate based on one of the
following:
• Another flow specification (Columns FlowSpecs form)
• A flow ratio specification (FlowRatios form)

If you enter only one specification for pumparounds to the top
stage of the main column, MultiFrac uses the top stage heat duty as
the second specification.
When a connecting stream has a specified temperature or
temperature change, MultiFrac assumes the specified value does
not result in a phase change of any fraction of the stream. When
you specify the heat duty, a phase change can occur.
Heaters Use the Columns HeatersCoolers form to enter heater stage
locations and duties. You can specify heaters indirectly by
choosing a heater duty as the adjusted variable in one of the
following forms:
Form Used to specify
Columns FlowSpecs Stage liquid or vapor flow rate
FlowRatios Vapor-to-liquid flow ratio
Flow Rate Specifications You can use the Columns FlowSpecs form to specify any stage
liquid and vapor flow rates. The value you specify refers to the net
flow of the stage liquid or vapor flow. This value excludes any
portions withdrawn by side products and other connecting streams
with flow specifications. This feature is typically used for
specifying:
• Internal reflux rate or total internal drawoff
• Overflash in refining applications
• Boilup rate
For a terminal stream, flow specifications refer to the net flow of
the stream excluding any portion withdrawn by connecting streams
with flow specifications. Flow specifications include:
• Specifications provided on the ConnectStreams form
• Specifications fixed by the associated heater specifications
• Another FlowSpecs or FlowRatios specification
For an internal stream, flow specifications refer to the net flow of
the stream excluding any portions withdrawn as products or
connecting streams.
When you enter a flow specification, MultiFrac adjusts the flow
rate of a connecting stream or the duty of a heater.
If the adjusted variable You enter the
is
A connecting stream flowConnecting stream number in the IC-Stream
field
A heater duty Heater column and stage numbers

You can place the calculated heat duty in an outlet heat stream
using the InletsOutlets form. Initial estimates for adjusted variables
are not required.
If a product or connecting stream of the same phase is leaving the
stage, a specified value may be zero to model a total drawoff .
MultiFrac will vary the heat duty associated with the heater of the
same stage or another stage or the flow rate of an associated
connecting stream to satisfy enthalpy and mass balances.
If this will be varied You must specify
Heat duty Q-Column and Stage
Flow rate of a connecting stream Stream number (IC-Stream)
Be cautious when selecting the:
• Associated stage with varied heat duty
• Connecting stream with varied flow rate
An initial guess for the associated heat duty is not required.
Flow Ratio Specifications Use the FlowRatios form to specify the ratio of two flow rates. The
flows can be of different phases, and come from any stage of any
column. This feature is typically used for specifying the:
• Internal reflux ratio
• Overflash in refining applications
• Boilup ratio
For a terminal stream, the flows refer to the net flow of a stream,
excluding any portion withdrawn by connecting streams with flow
specifications. Flow specifications include those:
• Specified on the ConnectStreams form
• Fixed by either the associated heater specification, another
Columns FlowSpecs sheet, or a FlowRatios Specifications
sheet)
For an internal stream, the flows refer to the net flow of the stream,
excluding any portion withdrawn as products or connecting
streams. When you specify a flow ratio, these will be varied to
satisfy enthalpy and mass balances:
• Heat duty of the same stage or another stage
• Flow rate of an associated connecting stream

When you enter a flow ratio specification, MultiFrac adjusts the
flow rate of a connecting stream or the duty of a heater.
If the adjusted variable You enter the
is
A connecting stream flowConnecting stream number in the IC-Stream
field
A heater duty Heater column and stage numbers
You can place the calculated heat duty in an outlet heat stream
using the InletsOutlets form. Initial estimates for these adjusted
variables are not required.
Be cautious when selecting the:
• Associated stage with varied heat duty
• Connecting stream with varied flow rate
Efficiencies You can specify one of two types of efficiencies:
• Vaporization
• Murphree
yi , j
Effi v =
Ki, j xi, j

y i , j − y i , j +1
Effi ,Mj =
K i, j x i , j − yi , j +1
Where:

i = Component index
j = Stage index
of actual stages on the Columns Setup Configuration sheet. Then
use the Columns Efficiencies form to enter the efficiencies.
other. Magnitudes of the efficiencies can be quite different. Details

on using and estimating these efficiencies are described by
Holland, Fundamentals of Multi-Component Distillation,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1981.
Algorithms MultiFrac has three convergence algorithms. Use the Overall field
on the Convergence Methods sheet to select the algorithm. The
default standard algorithm is appropriate for most applications.
Your choice of algorithm depends on the types of systems you are
modeling:
Application Algorithm
Air separation Standard
Close-boiling, e.g., C3 splitter Standard
Wide-boiling, e.g., absorbers Sum-Rates
Petroleum refining, e.g., crude unit Sum-Rates
Ethylene plant primary fractionator Sum-Rates
Highly-nonideal, e.g., azeotropic Newton
Highly-coupled design specifications Sum-rates or Newton
Rating Mode In rating mode, MultiFrac calculates column profiles and product
compositions based on specified values of column parameters.
Examples of column parameters are reflux ratio, reboiler duties,
and feed flow rates.
Design Mode In design mode, use the DesignSpecs form to specify column
performance parameters (such as purity or recovery). You must
indicate which variables to manipulate to achieve these
specifications using the Vary form. You can specify any variables
that are allowed in rating mode, except:
• Efficiencies
• Subcooled reflux temperature
• Degrees of subcooling
• Locations of feeds, products, heaters, and connecting streams

The flow rates of inlet material streams and the duties of inlet heat
Purity Stream, including an internal
stream †
Recovery of any component groups Set of product streams ††
Flow rate of any component groups Internal stream or set of product
streams
Temperature Stage
Heat duty Stage or connecting stream
Heat duty ratio Stage or connecting stream to any
other stage or connecting stream
Ratio or difference of any pair of Single or paired internal or
properties in a Prop-Set product stream
Flow ratio of any component groups First group can be in any internal
to any other component groups streams ‡
volume fractions of any group of components, relative to any other
†† You can express recovery as a fraction of the same components
in a subset of the feed stream.
††† See Aspen Plus User Guide, chapter 28.
‡ The second group can be in any other internal streams, or set of
feed or product streams.
Column Convergence MultiFrac uses the inside-out approach for column convergence.
You can choose from two algorithm variants of this approach:
• Standard
• Sum-rates
To select an algorithm, use the Overall field on the Convergence
Methods sheet.
The standard algorithm uses the standard inside-out formulation
for the inside loop. It uses either the nested or simultaneous
approach (specified as the Middle loop method on the
Convergence Methods sheet) to converge the design specifications.
This algorithm is appropriate for most systems.
The sum-rates algorithm uses:
• A sum-rates variant formulation for the inside loop
• The simultaneous approach to converge the design
specifications

Sum-rates is well suited for:
• Wide-boiling systems
• Columns with steep flow gradients
MultiFrac also has the Newton algorithm, which uses a Napthali-
Sandholm formulation. It solves the column-describing equations
and design specifications simultaneously, using Newton’s method.
This method can enhance convergence for highly-nonideal
systems, such as azeotropic distillation. The Newton algorithm is
generally slower than the other algorithms.
Design Specification MultiFrac provides two methods for handling design specification
Convergence convergence:
• Nested middle loop
• Simult middle loop
When you use the nested middle loop method, the algorithm
attempts to satisfy the design specifications by determining the
values of the manipulated variables (within their bounds) that
minimize the weighted sum of squares function:
2
 G^ − G 
Φ = ∑wm  
 
m  G ** 
Where:
G$ = Calculated value
G = Desired value
G ** = Scaling factor
For purity and recovery, G$ and G are transformed by taking the

**
logarithm, and G is taken as unity.
When you use the simult middle loop method, the following
algorithm solves the design specification functions simultaneously
with the column describing equations:
( )
Fm = G$ m − Gm / Gm** = 0
The weighting factor is not available for this method.

You can handle design specification convergence by using either
scaling factors or weighting factors. The following algorithm
attempts to satisfy design specifications by determining the values

of the manipulated variables (within their bounds) that minimize
the weighted sum of squares function:
 G$ − G 
2
Φ = ∑wm  ** 
m  G 
Where:
G$ = Calculated value
G = Desired value
G ** = Scaling factor
Initialization Use Initialization Method on the Convergence Methods sheet to
choose the initialization method.
MultiFrac has two initialization procedures:
• Standard
• Crude
Standard is appropriate for most systems. You must enter at least
the top and bottom temperature estimates for each column.
Crude invokes a special initialization procedure designed for
petroleum refining and ethylene plant primary fractionator/quench
tower applications. This procedure is designed for systems
consisting of a main column connected to any number of
sidestrippers. If you specify the following information on the
Columns Setup and/or Columns FlowSpecs forms, you do not need
to provide estimates:
• All stripper bottoms flow rates
• Either the distillate or bottoms flow rate of the main column
Otherwise, you must enter at least the top and bottom temperature
estimates for each column. You may enter profile estimates on the
Columns Estimates form to enhance convergence. Temperature
estimates are usually adequate. Highly nonideal systems may
require composition estimates.
Physical Properties Use the BlockOptions form to override the global physical
property method. You can specify a single property method on the
BlockOptions form. MultiFrac uses this property method for all
stages in all columns.
Use the Columns Properties form to specify physical property
methods when you use a separate property method for an

individual column. You can also split a column into any number of
segments, each using a different property methods.
Free Water Handling MultiFrac can perform free-water calculations. By default,
MultiFrac performs free-water calculations for the main column
condenser. The free-water phase, if present, is decanted.
Use the Columns Properties form to request free-water calculations
for additional stages in any column. You can define additional
water decant product streams on the InletsOutlets form. You can
use this capability to simulate the primary fractionator/quench
tower combination of an ethylene plant.
Solids Handling MultiFrac handles solids by:
• Temporarily removing all solids from inlet streams
• Performing calculations without solids
• Adiabatically mixing solids removed from inlet streams with
main column liquid bottoms
This calculation approach maintains an overall mass and energy
balance around the MultiFrac block. But the bottom stage liquid
product will not be in exact thermal or phase equilibrium with
other bottom stage flows (for example, the bottom stage vapor
flow).
Sizing and Rating of MultiFrac has extensive capability to size, rate and perform
Trays and Packings pressure drop calculations for trayed and packed columns. Use the
following forms to enter specifications:
• TraySizing
• TrayRating
• PackSizing
• PackRating

PetroFrac Reference
PetroFrac is a rigorous model designed for simulating all types of
complex vapor-liquid fractionation operations in the petroleum
refining industry. Typical operations include:
• Preflash tower
• Atmospheric crude unit
• Vacuum unit
• Catalytic cracker main fractionator
• Delayed coker main fractionator
• Vacuum lube fractionator
You also can use PetroFrac to model the primary
fractionator/quench tower combination in the quench section of an
ethylene plant. PetroFrac can detect a free-water phase in the
condenser or anywhere in the column. It can decant the free-water
phase on any stage. Although PetroFrac assumes equilibrium stage
calculations, you can specify either Murphree or vaporization
efficiencies. You can use PetroFrac to size and rate columns
consisting of trays and/or packings. PetroFrac can model both
random and structured packings.
Use the following forms to enter specifications and view results of
PetroFrac:
Setup Specify basic column configuration and
operating conditions
Pumparounds Specify pumparound specifications and view
results
Pumparounds Hcurves Specify pumparound heating or cooling curve
tables and view tabular results
Strippers Specify parameters and view results of side
strippers
HeatersCoolers Specify stage heating or cooling specifications
RunbackSpecs Specify runback specification parameters
Efficiencies Specify stage or component efficiencies
DesignSpecs Specify design specifications, manipulated
variables, and view convergence results
CondenserHcurves Specify condenser heating or cooling curve
tables and view tabular results
ReboilerHcurves Specify reboiler heating or cooling curve tables

TraySizing Specify sizing calculation parameters for tray
column sections, and view results
TrayRating Specify rating calculation parameters for tray
PackSizing Specify sizing calculation parameters for packed
PackRating Specify rating calculation parameters for packed
Properties Specify physical property parameters for
column sections
Estimates Specify estimates for column temperatures and
flows
Convergence Specify convergence parameters
pseudostreams
UserSubroutines Specify user subroutines for tray and packing
rating and sizing
Connectivity View stream connectivity for the PetroFrac
block
ResultsSummary View key column results for the overall
PetroFrac column
Profiles View column profiles

Flowsheet
Connectivity for
PetroFrac
PetroFrac models column configurations consisting of a main

column with any number of pumparounds and side strippers. You
can specify a feed furnace. For single columns without
pumparounds and side strippers, use RadFrac. For other
multicolumn systems such as air separation systems, Petlyuk
towers, and complex primary fractionators, use MultiFrac.
Material Streams

One steam feed per stripper (optional)
outlet One vapor or liquid distillate, or both
One free water distillate stream (optional)
One bottoms product from the main column
Any number of side products from main column (optional)
Any number of water decant products from main column
(optional)
One bottoms product per side stripper
Any number of pseudoproduct streams (optional)
You can use any number of pseudoproduct streams to represent:
• Column internal streams
• Pumparound streams
• Column connecting streams
A pseudoproduct stream does not affect column results.

Heat Streams
inlet One heat stream per stage for the main column (optional)
One heat stream per pumparound heater/cooler (optional)
One heat stream per stripper reboiler (optional)
One heat stream per stripper bottom liquid return (optional)
outlet One heat stream per stage for the main column (optional)
One heat stream per pumparound heaters/cooler (optional)
One heat stream per stripper reboiler (optional)
One heat stream per stripper bottom liquid return (optional)
PetroFrac uses an inlet heat stream as a duty specification for all
stages except the condenser, reboiler, pumparounds, and stripper
bottom liquid return.
If you do not give sufficient operating column specifications on the
Setup Configuration sheet, PetroFrac uses a heat stream as a
specification for the condenser and reboiler.
If you do not give two specifications on the Pumparounds
Specifications sheet, PetroFrac uses a heat stream as a specification
for pumparounds.
If you do not give two specifications for the bottom liquid return
on the Strippers Setup LiquidReturn sheet, PetroFrac uses a heat
stream as a specification.
If you give two specifications on the Setup Configuration sheet or
Pumparounds Specifications sheet, PetroFrac does not use the inlet
heat stream as a specification. The heat stream supplies the
required heating or cooling.
Use optional outlet streams for the net heat duty of the condenser,
reboiler, and pumparounds. The value of the outlet heat stream
equals the value of the inlet heat stream (if any) minus the actual
Main Column The main column can have any number of inlet streams. It can also
have up to three product streams per stage (one vapor, one
hydrocarbon liquid, and one free water).
Side Strippers The side strippers can have a steam feed. They must have a liquid
bottoms product. You can use a heat stream as the heat source for
the reboiler. If you do not specify the reboiler duty, bottoms flow
rate, and steam feed, PetroFrac uses the heat stream as a duty
specification.
Optionally, the stripper liquid bottoms may be partially returned to
the main column. To specify a bottom liquid return, you must enter
two specifications on the Strippers Setup LiquidReturn sheet.

Feed Furnace You can specify a feed furnace. A feed furnace can have any
number of feeds. The vapor and liquid streams from the furnace
are fed to the stage where the furnace is attached.
Specifying PetroFrac Within each column or stripper, stages are numbered from the top
down. If present, the main column condenser is stage 1.
Main Column You define the main column configuration using Condenser and
Reboiler on the Setup Configuration sheet. PetroFrac allows six
condenser types:
• Subcooled
• Total
• Partial with vapor distillate product only
• Partial with both vapor and liquid distillate products
• No condenser, with pumparound to top stage
• No condenser, with external feed to top stage
You can specify one of three reboiler types:
• Kettle reboiler
• No reboiler, with pumparound to bottom stage
• No reboiler, with external feed to bottom stage
The types and number of required operating specifications depend
on the column configuration. Normally, you must enter two
column operating specifications. If either a condenser or a reboiler
is absent, you must enter one specification. If both the condenser
and reboiler are absent, do not enter any specification.
Feed Stream Handling Use the Setup Streams sheet to specify the feed and product stage
locations. You may also identify a feed as the stripping steam, and
override its flow by specifying a steam-to-product ratio.
PetroFrac provides three conventions for handling feed streams
(see PetroFrac Feed Convention Above-Stage and PetroFrac Feed
Convention On-Stage in the following figures):
• Above-Stage
• On-Stage
• Furnace
When Feed-Convention is Above-Stage, PetroFrac introduces a
to the stage (n) you specify. The vapor portion flows to the stage
above (n – 1). You can introduce a liquid feed to the top stage (or
to the bottom stage (or reboiler) by specifying Stage=Number of
stages+1.

When Feed-Convention is On-Stage, both the liquid and vapor
portions of a feed flow to the stage (n) you specify.
n-1
Vapor
Mixed feed
to stage n
Liquid
PetroFrac Feed Convention Above-Stage
n-1
Mixed feed
n
to stage n
n+1
PetroFrac Feed Convention On-Stage
When Feed-Convention is Furnace, a furnace is attached to the

stage (n) you specify. The feed enters the furnace before being
introduced to the specified stage.
Feed Furnace PetroFrac can simulate a feed furnace simultaneously with the
column/strippers. You can simulate the feed furnace as a simple
heater or as a single stage flash with or without feed overflash
bypass to the furnace. You can specify one of the following:
• Heat Duty
• Temperature
• Fractional overflash
To do this Use this sheet
Define a feed to the feed furnace Setup Streams (Feed
Convention)
Enter a furnace model type and associated Setup Furnace
specifications
You can select from three furnace model types, as shown in the
next three figures.

Main Column
Heat
Feed
Furnace Modeled as a Stage Heat Duty
Main Column
Feed Furnace
Furnace Modeled as a Single Stage Flash

Main Column
Feed
Furnace
Furnace Modeled as a Single Stage Flash with Overflash Bypass

If Model= PetroFrac models the And calculates
furnace as
Heater Stage heat duty on the —
feed stage
Flash Single-stage flash Furnace temperature, degree of
vaporization, vapor/liquid
compositions
Flash-Bypass Single-stage flash with Furnace temperature, degree of
the overflash bypassed vaporization, vapor/liquid
back to the furnace compositions
Liquid Runbacks Use the RunbackSpecs form to specify the flow rate of liquid
runback from any stage. When you enter a liquid runback
specification, you must allow PetroFrac to adjust one of the
following:
• Flow rate of a pumparound
• Duty of an interstage heater/cooler
Pumparounds Use the following sheets to enter specifications for pumparounds.
Use this sheet To enter
Pumparounds Pumparound connectivity and cooler/heater
Specifications specifications
Report PseudoStreams Pseudostream assignment for the pumparound
Hcurves Specifications Heating/cooling curve specifications
Pumparounds are associated with the maincolumn. They can be
total or partial drawoffs of the stage liquid flow. You must specify
the draw and return stage locations for each pumparound. For
partial drawoffs, you must specify two of the following:
• Flow rate
• Temperature
• Heat Duty
For total drawoffs, you must specify one of the following:
• Temperature
• Heat Duty
Side Strippers Use the Stripper forms and sheets to enter specifications for side
strippers.
Side strippers may be either steam-stripped or reboiled. For steam
strippers, you must enter a steam stream. You can override its flow

rate by specifying a steam-to-product ratio. For reboiled strippers,
you must specify a reboiler duty.
PetroFrac assumes:
• A liquid draw goes from the main column to the top of the
stripper.
• The stripper overhead is returned to the main column.
You must specify the draw and return stage locations. You can
also:
• Return a fraction of the stripper bottoms to the main column
• Specify additional liquid draws from other stages of the main
column as feeds to the strippers
Efficiencies PetroFrac supports two kinds of efficiencies: vapor-liquid-
equilibrium efficiencies and thermal efficiencies.
Vapor-Liquid-Equilibrium Efficiencies
You can specify one of two types of vapor-liquid-equilibrium

efficiencies:
• Vaporization
• Murphree
yi , j
Effi v =
K i, j x i , j

yi, j − yi , j +1
Effi ,Mj =
ki , j x i , j − yi , j +1
Where:
i = Component index
j = Stage index
of actual stages on the Setup Configuration sheet and Strippers
Setup Configuration sheet as Number of stages. Then use the

Efficiencies and Strippers Efficiencies forms to enter the
efficiencies.
other. Magnitudes of the efficiencies can be quite different. Details
on using and estimating these efficiencies are described by
Holland, Fundamentals of Multi-Component Distillation,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1981.
Thermal efficiencies
Thermal tray efficiencies are an AspenTech proprietary type of

efficiency used to model the thermal non-equilibrium effects found
in large refinery columns such as crude columns and main
fractionators.
Vapor thermal efficiencies are designed for columns that have high
vapor loads such as crude columns, cat cracker, and coker main
fractionators. These columns typically have superheated vapor
feeds and are characterized by high vapor-to-liquid ratios,
especially near the bottom of the column. The thermal tray
efficiency allows the vapor and liquid temperatures to be different
(not at equilibrium), thus allowing for the calculation of both a
compositional and a thermal deviation from equilibrium. In
contrast, Murphree tray efficiencies assume thermal equilibrium
between the vapor and liquid phases.
Thermal tray efficiencies are defined strictly over the range 0.0 to
1.0 with 1.0 corresponding to an ideal stage at thermal equilibrium.
Vapor thermal tray efficiencies should be used where high and/or
superheated vapor flows dominate the column profile. Liquid
thermal tray efficiencies should be used in the opposite situation
where high and/or sub-cooled liquid flows dominate the column
profile. Only one of these two types of thermal efficiency may be
used on any given section of the column.
Thermal tray efficiencies are defined analogously to Murphree tray
efficiencies. Murphree tray efficiencies can be used with vapor of
liquid tray efficiencies, but care must be taken to understand the
relative effects of the two efficiencies and to ensure that
independent measurements are used to tune them.
Convergence For convergence PetroFrac uses:
• The sum-rates variant of the inside-out algorithm
• A special initialization procedure designed for petroleum
refining applications

PetroFrac generally does not need initial estimates. For ethylene
plant primary fractionator/quench tower combinations, you should
provide temperature estimates.
To enhance convergence, you may enter profile estimates on the
following PetroFrac forms:
• Estimates
• Strippers Estimates
Temperature estimates are usually adequate. You can increase
convergence stability by selecting varying degrees of damping on
the Convergence Basic sheet.
Rating Mode In rating mode, PetroFrac calculates the column profiles and
product compositions based on specified values of column
parameters. Examples of column parameters are:
• Reflux ratio
• Reboiler duties
• Feed flow rates
• Furnace temperature
• Pumparound loads
Design Mode In design mode you can manipulate subsets of the column
parameters to achieve certain specifications on column
performance.
Purity Stream, including internal
streams †
Recovery of any components group Set of product streams ††
Flow rate of any components group Internal stream or set of product
streams
Flow rates of any components groups Internal streams to any other
to any other component groups internal streams, or set of feed or
product streams
Temperature Stage
Heat duty Stage
Fractional overflash Stage
TBP and D86 temperature gaps Pair of product streams
TBP temperature Product stream
D86 temperature Product stream
D1160 temperature Product stream
Vacuum distillation temperature Product stream
API gravity Product stream
Standard liquid density Product stream
Specific gravity Product stream

Flash point Product stream
Pour point Product stream
Refractive index Product stream
Reid vapor pressure Product stream
Difference of any pair of Prop-Set Pair of product streams
properties
Watson UOP K factor Product stream
volume fraction of any group of components relative to any other
†† Express recovery as a fraction of the same components in a
subset of feed streams.
††† See Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 28.
You can also specify overflash for a furnace feed stream.
Physical Properties Use the BlockOptions form to override the global physical
property method. You can specify one method on this form, which
PetroFrac uses for all stages in the main column and strippers.
You can also split the main column or a stripper into any number
of segments, each using a different property method.
Use this sheet When you use different properties for
Properties Property Sections The main column
Strippers Properties Property A stripper
Sections
Free Water Handling PetroFrac can perform free-water calculations in the main column
and side strippers. By default, PetroFrac performs free-water
calculations for the main column condenser. The free-water phase,
if present, is decanted.
To do this Use these sheets
Request free-water calculations Properties Freewater Stages
for additional stages in the main Strippers Properties Freewater Stages
columns and strippers
Define additional water decant Setup Streams
product streams for the main
column
Solids Handling PetroFrac handles solids by:
• Temporarily removing all solids from inlet streams
• Performing calculations without solids

• Adiabatically mixing solids removed from inlet streams with
main column liquid bottoms
This calculation approach maintains an overall mass and energy
balance around the PetroFrac block. But the bottom stage liquid
product will not be in exact thermal or phase equilibrium with
other bottom stage flows (for example, the bottom stage vapor
flow).
Sizing and Rating of PetroFrac has extensive capabilities to size, rate, and perform
Trays and Packings pressure drop calculations for trayed and packed columns. Use the
following PetroFrac forms to enter specifications:
• TraySizing, TrayRating, PackSizing, PackRating
• Strippers TraySizing, Strippers TrayRating, Strippers
PackSizing, Strippers PackRating
PetroFrac formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• Feed conventions FURNACE and ABOVE-STAGE
• Multiple feeds to trays
• All Furnace specifications
• Ratio of steam to products specifications
• Additional feed from main column to strippers
• Stage pseudostreams for main shell and strippers with total
liquid/total vapor phase
• Liquid return from strippers to main column
• Free-water stage specifications in the main column or strippers
• TPSAR with pressure update
• Prop-sections
Some features in Petrofrac are not supported in the EO
formulation. When these features appear in Petrofrac blocks
running in EO mode, they are dropped from the problem
specifications with a warning.
• Design specs involving property differences
• Design specs and manipulated variables spanning different
columns

RateFrac Reference
RateFrac is a rate-based nonequilibrium model for simulating all
types of multistage vapor-liquid fractionation operations. RateFrac
simulates actual tray and packed columns, rather than the idealized
representation of equilibrium stages. RateFrac explicitly accounts
for the underlying interphase mass and heat transfer processes to
determine the degree of separation. RateFrac does not use
empirical factors such as efficiencies and the Height Equivalent to
a Theoretical Plate (HETP).
RateFrac is applicable for:
• Ordinary distillation
• Absorption
• Reboiled absorption
• Stripping
• Reboiled stripping
• Extractive and azeotropic distillation
RateFrac is suitable for:
• Two-phase systems
• Narrow and wide-boiling systems
• Systems exhibiting strong liquid phase nonideality
RateFrac can also detect and handle a free water phase in the
condenser.
RateFrac can model columns with chemical reactions. Reactions
include:
• Equilibrium
• Rate-controlled
• Electrolytic
RateFrac models a complex configuration consisting of a single
column or interlinked columns. The configuration may have:
• Any number of columns, each with any number of RateFrac
Segments
• Any number of connections between columns or within each
column
• Arbitrary flow splitting and mixing of connecting streams
RateFrac can handle operations with:
• Side strippers

• Pumparounds
• Bypasses
• External heat exchangers
RateFrac can be used to
• Rate existing columns
• Design new columns
You can define pseudoproduct streams to represent column
internal flows or connecting streams in RateFrac.
You can use Fortran Blocks, Sensitivity Analysis, and Case Study
blocks to vary configuration parameters, such as feed location or
number of segments.
RateFrac can produce segmentwise column profile plots.
RateFrac can be used with other Aspen Plus features and
capabilities much in the same way as the equilibrium-based
models, RadFrac, PetroFrac, and MultiFrac.
RateFrac:
BlockParameters Specify overall block parameters, convergence and initialization parameters,
block-specific diagnostic message levels, and feed flash convergence
parameters
Columns Enter specifications and view results for individual columns
Inlets Outlets Specify feed and product stream locations and conventions, inlet and outlet
heat streams
Connect Streams Specify connecting stream sources and destinations and view results
Design Specs Specify design specifications and view convergence results
Vary Specify manipulated variables to satisfy design specifications and view final
values
Flow Ratios Specify the flow ratio and view results
Condenser Hcurves Specify condenser heating or cooling curve tables and view tabular results
Reboiler Hcurves Specify reboiler heating or cooling curve tables and view tabular results
Connect Stream Specify connecting stream heating or cooling curve tables and view tabular
Hcurves results
Reports Specify block-specific report options, and pseudostream information
User Subroutines Specify user subroutine parameters for mass and heat transfer coefficients,
interfacial area, pressure drop, and kinetics
Block Options Override global values for physical properties, simulation options, diagnostic
message levels, and report options for this block
Results Summary View material and energy balance results and overall split fractions

Vapor Distillate or
Flowsheet Top Segment or Interconnecting Stream
Connectivity for Condenser Heat
RateFrac Duty (optional) 1
Heat (optional)
Feeds Reflux Side Products
Heat (optional)
Interconnecting Streams
(Heater optional)
Pumparounds
and Bypasses
(Heater optional)
(Heater optional)
Heat (optional)
Bottom Segment N
Heat (optional)
or Reboiler Heat
Duty (optional)
Bottoms or
RateFrac models single and interlinked columns. Any number of

columns can be connected by any number of connecting streams.
Each connecting stream can have an associated heater.
Each column may have:
• Any combination of packed and tray segments
• Any number of connecting streams
• Any number of side product streams
Material Streams

outlet Up to two product streams (one vapor, one liquid) per
segment
One water distillate product stream (optional)
Each column must have:
• At least one vapor or liquid stream leaving the top segment
• One liquid stream leaving the bottom segment
When you model interlinked columns, the top and bottom streams
can be connecting streams. However, the free-water stream from
the condenser cannot be a connecting stream.
Heat Streams
inlet One heat stream per segment (optional)

One heat stream per connecting stream (optional)
outlet One heat stream per connecting stream (optional)

RateFrac uses an inlet heat stream as a duty specification for all
segments except the condenser, reboiler, and connecting streams.
If you do not provide two column operating specifications on the
Columns Setup Configuration sheet, RateFrac uses a heat stream as
a specification for the condenser and reboiler.
If you do not provide two specifications on the ConnectStreams
Input sheet, RateFrac uses a heat stream as a specification for
connecting streams.
If you provide two specifications on the Columns Setup
Configuration sheet or ConnectStreams Input sheet, RateFrac does
not use the inlet heat stream as a specification. The inlet heat
stream supplies the required heating or cooling.
You can use optional outlet heat streams for the net heat duty of
the condenser, reboiler, and connecting streams. The value of the
outlet heat stream equals the value of the inlet heat stream (if any),
The Rate-Based Most models available for simulating and designing
Modeling Concept multicomponent, multistage separation processes are based on the
idealized concept of equilibrium or theoretical stages. This
approach assumes that the liquid and vapor phases leaving any
stage are in thermodynamic equilibrium with each other. The phase
compositions, temperature, and vapor and liquid flow profiles are
calculated by solving the governing material balances, energy
balances, and equilibrium relations for each stage.
In practice, columns rarely operate under thermodynamic
equilibrium conditions. Vapor-liquid equilibrium prevails only at
the interface separating vapor and liquid phases. The separation
achieved in a multistage column depends on the interphase mass
and heat transfer rate processes. Multicomponent mass transfer
interactions can also have pronounced effects on the separation.
When the equilibrium approach is used to model a tray column, a
correction factor (referred to as an efficiency) attempts to account
for the departure from equilibrium. Many definitions for efficiency
exist, with wide variations in complexity and accuracy. In general,
efficiencies depend on:
• Physical characteristics of the equipment, such as column
configuration
• Hydrodynamics of the column
• Fluid properties of the system
Murphree vapor efficiencies are the most widely used. These
efficiencies generally vary from stage to stage within a column,
and from component to component. For multicomponent systems,

there are no theoretical limitations on Murphree efficiencies.
Experimental evidence shows that component efficiencies:
• May vary strongly from component to component
• Can take any value including negative values
Methods used to calculate component efficiencies generally do not
include the effect of the departure from thermal equilibrium.
Packed columns are also designed using the equilibrium stage
concept. However, HETP is commonly used in place of
efficiencies. HETP varies with:
• Type and size of the packing
• Hydrodynamics of the column
• Fluid properties of the system
Like efficiencies, HETPs may vary strongly from point to point
within a column and from system to system.
RateFrac is based on a fundamental and rigorous approach. This
approach avoids uncertainties that result when the equilibrium
approach is used with estimated efficiencies or HETP. RateFrac
directly includes mass and heat transfer rate processes in the
system of equations representing the operation of separation
process units. RateFrac:
• Describes the simultaneous mass and heat transfer rate
phenomena
• Accounts for the multicomponent interactions between
simultaneously diffusing species
For nonreactive systems, RateFrac comprises:
• Mass and heat balances around vapor and liquid phases
• Mass and heat transfer rate models to determine interphase
transfer rates
• Vapor-liquid equilibrium relations applied at interfacial
conditions
• Correlations to estimate mass and heat transfer coefficients and
interfacial areas
For chemically reactive systems, RateFrac includes equations to
account for the influence of chemical reactions on heat and mass
transfer rate processes. For systems involving equilibrium
reactions, RateFrac includes equations to represent the chemical
equilibrium conditions.
RateFrac completely avoids the need for efficiencies in tray
columns or HETPs in packed columns. RateFrac has far greater
predictive capabilities than the conventional equilibrium model.

RateFrac numbers segments from the top down, starting with the
Specifying RateFrac
condenser (or starting with the top segment if there is no
condenser).
Column Numbering Individual columns are identified by a column number. The
numbering order does not affect algorithm performance. Within
each column, segments are numbered from top to bottom, starting
with the condenser (when present).
Stream Definition RateFrac uses four types of streams:
• External streams
• Connecting streams
• Internal streams
• Pseudostreams
External streams are the standard RateFrac inlet and outlet streams.
They are identified by stream IDs.
Connecting streams are streams within RateFrac but external to
individual columns. These streams are identified by connecting
stream numbers. Connecting streams may connect two columns or
segments of the same column (such as bypasses and
pumparounds). You can associate a heater with any connecting
stream. Heaters are identified by the connecting stream number.
Internal streams are the liquid or vapor flows between adjacent
segments of the same column. These streams are identified by a
segment number and a column number.
Pseudostreams store the results of internal and connecting streams.
They are a subset of external outlet streams. Unlike normal outlet
streams, pseudostreams do not participate in the block material
balance calculations.
Material Feed Streams RateFrac uses two conventions for handling material feed streams
(see RateFrac Feed Conventions in the following figures):
• Above segment
• On segment
Segment n-1
Vapor
Mixed Feed to
Segment n Liquid
Segment n
RateFrac Feed Convention Above Segment

Segment n-1
Liquid
Mixed Feed to
Segment n
Segment n
Vapor
Segment n + 1
RateFrac Feed Convention On Segment
When the feed convention is defined as Above segment, RateFrac

introduces a material stream between adjacent segments. The
liquid portion flows to segment n, specified as the feed segment.
The vapor portion flows to the segment above (segment n-1 in the
figure RateFrac Feed Convention Above segment). You can
introduce a liquid to the top segment (or condenser) by specifying
Segment=1. You can introduce a vapor feed to the bottom segment
(or reboiler), by specifying the segment equal to the last segment in
the column +1. When a two-phase feed stream is fed to segment 1,
the vapor phase is combined directly with the vapor distillate.
Similarly, when a two-phase feed stream is fed to the last segment
of that column + 1, the liquid phase is combined directly with the
liquid bottoms product.
When the feed convention is defined as On segment, both the
liquid and vapor portions of the feed flow to segment specified
(segment n in the previous figure RateFrac Feed Convention On
segment).
RateFrac assumes that a vapor feed (or the vapor portion of a
mixed feed) combines with the vapor phase in the segment it
enters. RateFrac also assumes that a liquid feed (or the liquid
portion of a mixed feed) combines with the liquid phase in the
segment it enters.
Column Configuration Specify the column configuration by indicating the following on
the Columns Configuration sheet:
• Number of segments
• Presence or absence of condensers and reboilers
• Equilibrium and nonequilibrium segments

Connecting Streams RateFrac allows any number of connecting streams. Any number
of these streams can have the same:
• Source column, segment, and phase
• Destination column and segment
RateFrac introduces connecting streams on the destination segment
regardless of their phase (Convention = On Segment). All
connecting streams can have a heater. Enter all specifications for
connecting streams on the ConnectStreams Input sheet. RateFrac
does not allow phase change for connecting streams.
Connecting streams can be either a total or a partial drawoff of the
segment flow. Enter the required specifications as follows:
If the drawoff type is You enter
Partial Two of the following: flow, temperature or
temperature change and heat duty †
Total One of the following: temperature or temperature
change and heat duty ††
† Enter zero for heat duty if heater is absent.
†† Enter zero for heat duty if heater is absent. Flow is taken as the
net flow of the segment, excluding any product flow and any other
connecting stream flow.
Required Specifications You must specify the total number of columns and connecting
streams.
Use this form To enter Such as
Columns Tray specifications Number of trays or
TraySpecs Number of trays per segment
Tray type
Tray characteristics
Columns Packing Total height of packing or
PackSpecs specifications Height of packing per segment
Packing type
Packing characteristics
You must also specify:
• Inlet stream locations
• Heat stream locations, heat duty, and phase
• Pressure profile for each column
• Condenser type
• Two operating specifications for multisegment columns and
one for single-segment columns
• Source and destination of any connecting stream and associated
heater specifications

• Outlet stream locations and phases. If the outlet stream is a side
drawoff stream from a segment, you must specify its flow.
A segment refers to one of the following:
• A slice (or portion) of packing in a packed column (see the
preceding figure, Nonequilibrium Segment in a Packed
Column)
• One (or more) tray(s) in a tray column (see the preceding
figure, Nonequilibrium Segment in a Tray Column)
A column consists of segments. To evaluate mass and heat transfer
rates between contacting phases, RateFrac uses one of the
following:
• Height of packing in a packed segment
• Number of trays in a tray segment
Nonequilibrium Segment in a Packed Column

Nonequilibrium Segment in a Tray Column
Equilibrium Stages RateFrac can model both equilibrium stages and nonequilibrium
segments in the same column. Use the Columns
EquilibriumSegments form to specify the location of equilibrium
stages. When all stages are equilibrium, you can obtain the same
results using RateFrac as you can using RadFrac, MultiFrac, or
PetroFrac with ideal stages.
Reactive Systems RateFrac can handle kinetically controlled reactions and
equilibrium reactions in both liquid and vapor phases. Chemical
reactions can be of any type, including:
• Simultaneous
• Consecutive
• Parallel
• Forward
• Reverse
For kinetically controlled reactions, the kinetics can be defined by
one of the following:
• Built-in power law expressions
• User-supplied Fortran subroutines
For equilibrium reactions, the chemical reaction equilibrium
constant can be defined either in terms of user-supplied
coefficients for a temperature-dependent polynomial, or can be
computed from the reference state free energies of participating
components.
RateFrac can model electrolyte systems using both the apparent
and the true component approaches.

Enter the following information on the Reactions form:
• Reaction stoichiometry
• Reaction type
• Phase in which reactions occur
Depending on the reaction type, you must enter either the
equilibrium constant or kinetic parameters. For electrolytic
reactions, you can also enter the reaction data on the Chemistry
form.
To associate reactions with a column segment, enter the
corresponding Reactions ID (or Chemistry ID or User Reactions
ID) on the Columns Reactions Specifications sheet.
For rate-controlled reactions, you must enter holdup data for the
phase where reactions occur.
For these Use this form to enter holdup information
segments
Equilibrium Columns Reactions
Tray Columns TraySpecs
Packed Columns PackSpecs
Heaters and Coolers Use the Columns HeatersCoolers Side Duties sheet to specify:
• Heat duty for a segment
• Heater segment location (column and segment)
• Phase
Use the Columns HeatersCoolers Utility Exchangers sheet to
specify cooling (or heating) of any segment using a coolant (or
heating fluid).
You can use a heat stream to provide heat integration. Heat
integration occurs when the duty recovered from another block is
used as the heat source of heaters and coolers. Enter heat stream
data on the InletsOutlets Heat Streams sheet.
Physical Property Use the RateFrac BlockOptions form to override the global
Specifications physical property property method. You can specify only one
property method on the BlockOptions form. RateFrac uses this
property method for the whole column. RateFrac does not allow
multiple physical property methods.
Handling Free Water RateFrac can perform free-water calculations only in condensers.
Rating Mode In rating mode, RateFrac calculates temperatures, flows, and mole
fraction profiles based on specified values of column parameters
such as:
• Reflux ratio
• Product flows

• Heat duties
Design Mode In design mode, use the DesignSpecs form to specify column
performance parameters (such as purity or recovery). You must
indicate which variables to manipulate to achieve these
specifications using the Vary form. You can specify any variables
that are allowed in rating mode, except:
• Number of columns, segments, and connecting streams
• Locations of feeds, products, heaters, and connecting streams
• Column configurations, including the number of trays, tray
characteristics, height of packing, packing specifications
The flows of inlet material streams and the duties of inlet heat
Purity Stream, including an internal stream †
Recovery of any component Set of product streams ††
groups
Flow of any component groups Internal stream or set of product streams
Component ratio Internal stream and a second internal
stream or feed streams and product
streams
Temperature of vapor stream Segment
Temperature of liquid stream Segment
Heat duty Condenser, reboiler, or a connecting
stream
Ratio or difference of any pair Single or paired internal or product
of properties in a Prop-Set stream
volume fractions of any group of components, relative to any other
†† You can express recovery as a fraction of the same components
in a subset of the feed stream.
††† See Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 28.
Calculating Efficiency and From converged vapor and liquid composition profiles, RateFrac
HETP back-calculates the component Murphree vapor efficiencies. These
efficiencies are defined for each component as the fractional
approach to equilibrium of the vapor stream leaving any segment,
with the liquid stream leaving the same segment.
y ij − y ij +1
Eff ij =
K ij x ij − Yij +1

Where:
Eff = Murphree vapor efficiency
K = Vapor-liquid equilibrium K value
i = Component index
j = Segment index
For each segment of packed columns, RateFrac calculates the
fractional approach to equilibrium using the same definition as
used for Murphree vapor efficiency. RateFrac reports the height of
packing required to achieve equilibrium as the HETP for that
segment.
Convergence and RateFrac must solve many more equations for a given column than
Computing Time an equilibrium model. Computing times for RateFrac are greater
than they are for equilibrium models, particularly for problems
containing many components. The solution algorithm RateFrac
uses is an efficient, Newton-based simultaneous correction
approach. RateFrac solution times increase with the square of the
number of components. Solution times can be an order of
magnitude greater than RadFrac, MultiFrac, or PetroFrac solution
times for the same problems.
References for Built-In RateFrac uses well-known and accepted correlations to calculate:
Correlations
• Binary mass transfer coefficients for the vapor and liquid phase
• Interfacial areas
In general, these quantities depend on column diameter and
operating parameters such as:
• Vapor and liquid flow
• Densities
• Viscosities
• Surface tension of liquid
• Vapor and liquid phase binary diffusion coefficients
Mass transfer coefficients and interfacial areas depend on:
Packing characteristics Tray characteristics
Type (random or structured) Type (sieve, valve, or bubble-cap)
Size Weir and flow path length
Specific surface area Downcomer area
Material of construction Weir height

The correlations involve well-defined dimensionless groups, such
as the Reynolds, Froude, Weber, Schmidt, and Sherwood numbers.
The correlations have been fitted to experimental measurements
from laboratory and pilot plant absorption and distillation columns.
The correlations RateFrac uses for mass transfer coefficients and
interfacial areas are:
Column type Correlation used
Packed Columns (random packing) Onda et al. (1968)
Packed Columns (structured) Bravo et al. (1985, 1992)
Sieve Trays † Chan and Fair (1984)
Valve Trays Scheffe and Weiland (1987)
Bubble-Cap Trays † Grester et al. (1958)
† These correlations do not provide the mass transfer coefficients
and interfacial areas separately.
RateFrac allows you to write Fortran subroutines to calculate:
• Binary mass transfer coefficients
• Heat transfer coefficients
• Interfacial areas
The subroutines are described in the Aspen Plus User Models
reference manual.
By applying a rigorous multicomponent mass transfer theory
(Krishna and Standart, 1976), RateFrac uses binary mass transfer
coefficients to evaluate:
• Multicomponent binary mass transfer coefficients
• Component mass transfer rates between vapor and liquid
phases
RateFrac calculates the vapor phase and liquid phase heat transfer
coefficients using the Chilton-Colburn analogy (King, 1980). This
analogy relates:
• Mass transfer coefficients
• Schmidt number
• Prandtl number

Mass and Heat RateFrac uses several mass and heat transfer correlations:
Transfer Correlations • Packed column mass transfer coefficients
• Valve Tray column mass transfer coefficients
• Bubble-Cap Tray column mass transfer coefficients
• Sieve Tray column mass transfer coefficients
Packed Column RateFrac calculates the mass transfer coefficients and the
interfacial area available for mass transfer using the correlations
developed by Onda et al., 1968.
The correlation for the liquid phase binary mass transfer
coefficients is:
 L  ρ L  1/ 3   L 
2/3
 ( ScinL )
−1/ 2
( )
0 .4
k in    = 0.0051 a pd p
  gµ L    aω µ L 
The correlation for the gas phase binary mass transfer coefficient
is:
 g  RT g  
0 .7
 G 
( Sc ) ( a )
−2
k in    = 5.23  g 1/ 3
pd p
   p g 
in
 a p in 
D  a u
The interfacial area available for mass transfer is given by the

correlation:
{ [
a ω = a p 1 − exp − 145
. Re L
0.1
FrL − 0.05We L
0 .2
(σ σ ) c
−0.75
]}
Where:
2
L aρ L2 L
Re L = FrL = We L =
a pµ L gρ 2L , a p σρ L
,
and:
L = Binary mass transfer coefficient for the binary
k in
pair i and n in the liquid phase (m/sec)
ρL = Density of liquid (kg/m )
3
g = 2
Acceleration due to gravity (m/sec )
µL = Viscosity of liquid (Newton-sec/m )
2
2
L = Liquid superficial mass velocity (kg/m /sec)
aw = Wetted interfacial area (m interfacial area/m
2 3
packing volume)

L = Schmidt number for the binary pair i and n in
Sc in
the liquid phase = µ L ( ρ L Din )
L
L = Binary Maxwell-Stefan diffusion coefficient

D in 2
for the binary pair i and n (m /sec)
ap = Specific surface area of the packing
dp = Nominal diameter of packing or packing size
(m)
g = Binary mass transfer coefficient for the binary
k in
pair i and n in the vapor phase (kg
2
mole/atm/m /sec)
3
R = Universal gas constant (m atm/kg mole/K)
T
g = Gas phase temperature (K)
2
G = Gas superficial mass velocity (kg/m /sec)
µg = Viscosity of gas mixture (Newton-sec/m )
2
g = Gas phase Schmidt number for the binary pair

(ρ D )
Sc in
µg g
g
in
i and n =
ρg = Density of gas mixture (kg/m )
3
g = Gas-phase binary Maxwell-Stefan diffusion

D in 2
coefficient for the binary pair i and n (m /sec)
σ = Surface tension (Newton/m)
σc = Critical surface tension of the packing material
(Newton/m)
Valve Tray Column RateFrac calculates the mass transfer coefficients and the
interfacial area available for mass transfer using the correlations
developed by Scheffe and Weiland, 1987.
The correlation for the liquid phase binary mass transfer
coefficient is:
( ) ( Re ) ( v ) 0.05 ( ScinL )
0.68 0.09 0.5
ShinL = 125.4 Re g L
The correlation for the gas phase binary mass transfer coefficients
is:
( ) ( Re ) ( ϖ) 0.39 ( Scing )
0.87 0.13 0.5
Shing = 9.93 Re g L

The interfacial area available for mass transfer is given by the
correlation:
( ) ( Re )
0.37
( ϖ) 0.52
0.25
a = 0.27 Re g L
Where:
L g
k in ad k in ad µL µg
Sh = L
in Sh = g
in ScinL = Scing =
ρ L D in ρ g D in ρ L D in ρ g D in
L g L g
, , , ,
Ld Gd W
Re L = Re g =
µL , µg ϖ = d
,
and:
2
L = Liquid mass velocity (kg/m /sec) (Velocity is
based on tower active area.)
d = Geometric parameter of unit length (m)
µL = Viscosity of liquid mixture (Newton-sec/m )
2
2
G = Gas mass velocity (kg/m /sec) (Velocity is
based on tower active area.)
2

k in 2
pair i and n in the liquid phase (kg mole/m
/sec)
2 2
a = Interfacial area (m interfacial area/m tower
active area)
ρL
3
= Molar density of liquid (kg mole/m )
D in 2
k in 2
pair i and n in the vapor phase (kg mole/m
/sec)
ρg
3
= Molar density of gas mixture (kg mole/m )

D in 2
ρL = Density of liquid mixture (kg/m )
3

3
W = Weir height (m)

Bubble-Cap Tray Column RateFrac calculates the product of the binary mass transfer
coefficients and interfacial areas using the correlations developed
by Grester et al., 1958.
The product of liquid phase binary mass transfer coefficients and
interfacial area is given by the correlation:
k in a = ( 4.127 × 10 8 DinL ) (0.21313F + 015

. ) Lt L
L 0.5
The product of gas phase binary mass transfer coefficient and

( 0.776 + 4.567h − 0.2377 F + 104.85Q L )

k in a =
g w
G
( Sc ) g 0.5
in
Where:
k in 2
/sec)
2 2
active area)
D in 2
F = µ g ρ1g/ 2  kg 1/2 / sec / m1/2 
F-Factor =
µg = Gas volumetric flow per unit active area (m
3
2
/sec/m )
3
2
L = Liquid molar velocity (kg mole/m /sec)
(Velocity is based on active area.)
tL = Liquid residence time = 0.9998hL Z L / QL (sec)
hL = Liquid holdup =
0.04191 + 0.19hw + 2.4545QL − 0.0135 F ( m )
ZL = Liquid flow path length (m)
QL 3
= Liquid flow per average path width (m
/sec/m)

hw = Outlet weir height (m)
k in 2
pair i and n in the vapor phase (kg mole/m
/sec)
2
G = Gas molar velocity (kg mole/m /sec)
g = Gas-phase Schmidt number for the binary pair
(ρ D )
Sc in
µg g
g
in
i and n =
2

D in 2
Sieve Tray Column RateFrac calculates the product of mass transfer coefficients and
interfacial areas using the correlations developed by Chan and Fair,
1984.
The product of liquid phase binary mass transfer coefficient and
k in a = ( 4.127 x10 8 DinL ) ( 0.21313F + 0.15) Lt L

L 0.5
The product of the gas phase binary mass transfer coefficient and
( D ) (1030 F − 867 F )
g 0.5 2
k in a =
g in
h L 0.5
Where:
k in 2
/sec)
2 2
active area)
D in 2
F = µ g ρ g 1/ 2 ( kg 1/ 2 / sec / m1/ 2 )
F-Factor =
µg = Gas volumetric flow per unit active area (m
3
2
/sec/m )

3
2
L = Liquid molar velocity (kg mole/m /sec)
tL = Liquid residence time = 0.9998hL Z L / QL (sec)
hL = 0.04191 + 0.19hw + 2.4545QL − 0.0135 F ( m )
ZL = Liquid flow path length (m)

QL = Liquid flow per average path width
3
(m /sec/m)
hw = Outlet weir height (m)
k in
pair i and n in the vapor phase (m/sec)
g = Binary Maxwell-Stefan diffusion coefficient
D in 2
F = Fractional approach to flooding gas velocity =
µg / µgF
µgF = Gas velocity through active area at flooding

(m/sec)
hL = Liquid height =
Γe hw + 1533Γe B( Q L / Γe ) ( m)
2/ 3
Γe = exp( − 12.55K s 0.91 )

B = 0.0327 + 0.0286 exp( − 137.8hω )
Ks =
( )
0.5
µ g ρ g (ρ L − ρ g ) ( m / sec)
ρL = Density of liquid mixture (kg/m )
3
Heat Transfer RateFrac calculates the heat transfer coefficients, using the
Coefficients Chilton-Colburn analogy (King, 1980).
The heat transfer coefficient is given by:
htc
k av ( Sc) =
2/3
Cpmix
Where:
k av = Average binary mass transfer coefficients
(kg mole/sec)
Sc = Schmidt number

htc = Heat transfer coefficient (Watts/K)
Cpmix = Molar heat capacity (Joules/kg mole/K)
Pr = Prandtl number
References Bravo, J.L., Rocha, J.A., and Fair, J.R., "Mass Transfer in Gauze
Packings", Hydrocarbon Processing, January, 91 (1985).
Bravo, J.L., Rocha, J.A., and Fair, J.R., "A Comprehensive Model
for the Performance of Columns Containing Structured Packings",
ICHEME Symposium Series, 128, A439 (1992).
Chan, H. and Fair, J.R., "Prediction of Point Efficiencies in Sieve
Trays: 1. Binary Systems, 2. Multicomponent Systems," Ind. Eng.
Chem. Process Des. Dev., 23, (1984) p. 814.
Grester, J.A., Hill, A.B., Hochgraf, N.N., and Robinson, D.G.,
"Tray Efficiencies in Distillation Columns," AIChE Report,
(1958).
King, C.J., Separation Processes, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill
Company, (1980).
Krishna, R. and Standart, G.L., "A Multicomponent Film Model
Incorporating a General Matrix Method of Solution to the
Maxwell-Stefan Equations," AIChE J., 22, (1976) p. 383.
Onda, K., Takeuchi, H., and Okumoto, Y., "Mass Transfer
Coefficients between Gas and Liquid Phases in Packed Columns,"
J. Chem. Eng., Japan, 1, (1968) p. 56.
Perry, R.H. and Chilton, C.H., "Chemical Engineers’ Handbook,"
Fifth Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Section 18 (1973).
Scheffe, R.D. and Weiland, R.H., "Mass Transfer Characteristics
of Valve Trays," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 26, (1987) p. 228.

BatchFrac Reference
BatchFrac is a batch distillation model that solves unsteady-state
heat and material balance equations. These equations describe the
behavior of a multi-stage batch distillation column. BatchFrac
applies rigorous heat balances, material balances, and equilibrium
relationships at each stage. BatchFrac calculates the profiles of
column composition, temperature, pressure, and vapor and liquid
flows as a function of time.
BatchFrac can model the following systems:
• Narrow-boiling
• Wide-boiling
• Strong liquid phase nonideality
• Three-phase
• Reactive
BatchFrac assumes:
• Equilibrium stages
• Constant liquid holdup and zero vapor holdup
BatchFrac can handle:
• Continuous feeds to the column
• Continuous sideproduct withdrawal
• Nonadiabatic column operation
• Interstage heaters and coolers
• Vaporization efficiencies for modeling nonequilibrium stages
BatchFrac can also handle the presence of:
• A free-water phase in the condenser
• Two liquid phases in the condenser
BatchFrac does not model column hydraulics.

Use these forms to enter specifications and view results for
BatchFrac:
Operation Steps Specify column operating conditions and view
results for different operation steps
Heaters Coolers Specify stage heating or cooling
Efficiencies Specify stage, component, or sectional
efficiencies
Reactions Specify equilibrium, kinetic, and conversion
reaction parameters
Properties Specify physical property parameters for
column sections
Estimates Specify initial estimates for stage
temperatures, and vapor and liquid flows and
compositions
Convergence Specify convergence parameters for column
calculations, and block-specific diagnostic
message levels
Records Specify stage variables to be tracked during the
simulation
Report Specify block-specific report options
User Subroutines Specify user subroutines for pressure drop and
reboiler duties
ResultsSummary View overall key column results
SnapshotResults View configurational and operating
specification results
Profiles View stage profiles
TimeProfiles View columnn profiles as a function of time
RecordProfiles View specific stage profiles recorded
RecordTimeProfiles View specific column profiles recorded as a
function of time

Flowsheet
Connectivity for
BatchFrac
inlet One material stream for the initial charge; any number of
optional material streams for intermediate charges; any
number of optional material streams for continuous feeds
outlet One material stream for final column contents; one material
stream for final main accumulator contents; one material
stream for the final contents of optional additional
accumulators; any number of optional streams for
intermediate dump products; any number of optional
pseudo-product streams.
Specifying BatchFrac BatchFrac numbers stages from the top down, starting with the
condenser. The distillation operation is represented by a series of
sequential operation steps. BatchFrac performs a total reflux
calculation at the beginning of the first operation step.
BatchFrac has two types of data specifications:
• Column setup
• Column operation
Column Setup Setup specifications define the column you are modeling, but they
do not define its operation. These specifications include:

• Column holdup profile
• Initial charge
• Final product specifications
You can choose to specify these on the BatchFrac Setup Form:
• Interstage heaters and coolers
• Heat-loss profile
• Three-phase distillation and decanters
• Vaporization efficiency
• Reactions and property options for column segments
All Column Setup specifications, except for the initial feed and
final charge, can be overridden during any subsequent operation
step. You can also request the simulation to record result profiles
other than the default at the Setup level. You can set specific block
options, algorithm convergence parameters, and diagnostic levels.
You can specify user subroutines for pressure profile calculation
and reboiler heat duty calculation.
You must specify On this sheet
Total number of stages Setup Configuration
Column holdup profile Setup Holdup
Column pressure profile Setup Pressure
Initital charge stream Setup Charge/Products
and final outlet streams
Column Operation Column operation specifications define the operating conditions of
the column during an operation step. They include operating
specifications such as reflux ratio and distillate rate, and stop-
criterion information. You can choose to specify intermediate
charges to the reboiler, continuous feeds, sidedraws, and
intermediate dumps at the operation step level. You can override
some global specifications at the operation step level. Other
specifications depend on the column configuration and algorithm
being used.
Free-Water and BatchFrac can perform
Rigorous Three- • Free-water calculations
Phase Calculations
• Rigorous three-phase calculations
BatchFrac can perform free-water calculations for the condenser
only.
To specify free water calculations:

On sheet Specify
Block Options Free-Water=Yes
BatchFrac Setup Valid phases=Vapor -liquid -free water
Configuration condenser
To specify the fraction of free-water phase returned to the column,
use the Retfrac2 field on the OperationSteps Setup
ColumnSpecifications sheet.
BatchFrac can perform rigorous three-phase calculations for:
• Any stage
• Any column segments
• The entire column
To specify rigorous three-phase calculations
On sheet Specify
BatchFrac Setup Valid phases=Vapor-liquid -liquid
Configuration
BatchFrac Setup 3- Key components in the second liquid
Phase phase,column segments tested for two liquid
phase,decanter locations
Reactive Distillation BatchFrac can handle chemical reactions. Reactions can be
equilibrium and/or rate-controlled.
These Can occur in these phases
reactions
Equilibrium Liquid and/or vapor
Rate-controlled Liquid
Reactions may not occur in accumulators or on stages with zero
holdup.
Reactions Enter reaction chemistry and associated
ReactiveDistillation equilibrium and/or kinetic data.
Batchfrac Reactions Associate a set of reactions with one or
more segments of the column.
BatchFrac cannot perform reactive distillation calculations for
three-phase distillation.
Physical Property Normally, you enter physical property specifications on the
Specifications Properties Specification Form. When column calculations require
more than one property option specification, you can use the
BatchFrac Properties PropertySection sheet to specify property
options for a segment of the column or a decanter. You can also
override property specifications for an individual operation step
using the OperationSteps Properties PropertySection sheet.

Feed Conventions When Feed-Convention=Above-Stage, a material stream is
introduced between adjacent stages. The liquid portion of the
stream flows to the stage specified in the feed location Stage field.
The vapor portion of the stream goes to the stage above (Stage 1).
You can introduce a By specifying
Liquid feed to the top stage (or Stage=1
condenser
Vapor feed to the bottom stage (or Stage=Number Of Stages
reboiler) (Setup Configuration sheet) + 1
When Feed-Convention=On-Stage, both the liquid and vapor
portions of a feed flow to the stage specified in the feed location
Stage field.

Extract Reference
Extract is a rigorous model for simulating liquid-liquid extractors.
It can have multiple feeds, heater/coolers, and side streams. Extract
can calculate distribution coefficients using:
• An activity coefficient model or equation of state capable of
representing two liquid phases
• A built-in temperature-dependent correlation (KLL Correlation
sheet)
• A Fortran subroutine (KLL Subroutine sheet)
Although equilibrium stages are assumed, you can specify
component or stage separation efficiencies. Extract can be used
only for rating calculations.
You can define pseudoproduct streams (Report PseudoStreams
sheet) to represent extractor internal flows. You can use Fortran
and sensitivity blocks to vary configuration parameters, such as
feed location or number of stages.
Extract:
Efficiencies Specify stage or component efficiencies
Properties Specify parameters for KLL correlations and
KLL subroutines
Estimates Specify initial estimates for stage temperatures
and compositions
Convergence Specify convergence parameters and block-
specific diagnostic message levels
pseudostream information
Results View column performance summary, material
and energy balance results, and split fractions
Profiles View extractor profiles

L1 Phase L2 Phase
Flowsheet
Connectivity for 1
Extract Side feeds Side products
(any number) (any number)
Nstage
L1 Phase L2 Phase
Material Streams
inlet One material stream to the first (top) stage, rich in the first
liquid phase (L1)
One material stream to the last (bottom) stage, rich in the
second liquid phase (L2)
One material stream per intermediate stage (optional)
outlet One material stream for L1 from the last stage
One material stream for L2 from the first stage
Up to two side product streams per stage, one for L1 and
one for L2 (optional)
Specifying Extract Extract can operate in one of the following ways:
• Adiabatically (default)
• At a specified temperature
• With specified stage heater or cooler duties
You must specify:
• Feed and product stream stage locations
• Side product stream phase and mole flow rate
The first liquid phase (L1) flows from the first stage to the last
stage. The second (L2) flows in the opposite direction. You must
identify the key components in each phase using L1-Comps and
L2-Comps on the Setup form. Extract can treat phase L1 as the
solvent/extract phase or the feed/raffinate phase.

Liquid-liquid distribution coefficients are required to represent the
liquid-liquid equilibrium. Extract calculates these coefficients
using one of the following methods:
You can use You enter On sheet
Any physical property A global property method or a BlockOptions
method that can property method name to Properties
represent two liquid override the global physical
phases property method
A built-in temperature- Polynomial coefficients Properties KLL
dependent polynomial Correlation
A Fortran subroutine Subroutine name Properties KLL
Subroutine
See Aspen Plus User Models for more information about Fortran
subroutines.
Extract formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• User KLL subroutine
• KLL correlation
• Pseudo streams

CHAPTER 5
Reactors
This chapter describes the unit operation models for reactors. The
models are:
RStoic Stoichiometric Models stoichiometric Reactors where reaction kinetics are unknown or
reactor reactor with specified unimportant but stoichiometry and extent of reaction
reaction extent or are known
conversion
RYield Yield reactor Models reactor with Reactors where stoichiometry and kinetics are
specified yield unknown or unimportant but a yield distribution is
known
REquil Equilibrium Performs chemical and Reactors with simultaneous chemical equilibrium
reactor phase equilibrium by and phase equilibrium
stoichiometric
calculations
RGibbs Equilibrium Performs chemical and Reactors with phase equilibrium or simultaneous
reactor with phase equilibrium by phase and chemical equilibrium. Calculating phase
Gibbs energy Gibbs energy equilibrium for solid solutions and vapor-liquid-
minimization minimization solid systems.
RCSTR Continuous Models continuous One-, two, or three-phase stirred tank reactors with
stirred tank stirred tank reactor rate-controlled and equilibrium reactions in any
reactor phase based on known stoichiometry and kinetics
RPlug Plug flow reactor Models plug flow One-, two-, or three-phase plug flow reactors with
reactor rate-controlled reactions in any phase based on
known stoichiometry and kinetics
RBatch Batch reactor Models batch or semi- One-, two-, or three-phase batch and semi-batch
batch reactor reactors with rate-controlled reactions in any phase
based on known stoichiometry and kinetics
RCSTR, RPlug, and RBatch are kinetic reactor models. Use the
Reactions Reactions form to define the reaction stoichiometry and
data for these models.
You do not need to specify heats of reaction, because Aspen Plus
uses the elemental enthalpy reference state for the definition of the
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Reactors • 5-1

component heat of formation. Therefore, heats of reaction are
accounted for in the mixture enthalpy calculations for the reactants
versus the products.
5-2 • Reactors Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

RStoic Reference
Use RStoic to model a reactor when:
• Reaction kinetics are unknown or unimportant and
• Stoichiometry and the molar extent or conversion is known for
each reaction
RStoic can model reactions occurring simultaneously or
sequentially. In addition, RStoic can perform product selectivity
and heat of reaction calculations.
RStoic:
Setup Specify operating conditions, reactions, reference
conditions for heat of reaction calculations, product
and reactant components for selectivity calculations,
particle size distribution, and component attributes
Convergence Specify estimates and convergence parameters for
flash calculations
Results View summary of operating results, mass and
energy balances, heats of reaction, product
selectivities, reaction extents, and phase equilibrium
results for the outlet stream
Flowsheet Material
Connectivity for (any number)
RStoic
Heat Heat (optional)

(optional)
Water (optional)
Material
Material Streams

outlet One product stream

Heat Stream

RStoic uses the sum of the inlet heat streams as the heat duty
specification, if you do not specify an outlet heat stream.
The value of the outlet heat stream is the net heat duty (sum of the
inlet heat streams minus the calculated heat duty) for the reactor.
Specifying RStoic Use the Setup Specifications sheet to specify the reactor operating
conditions and to select the phases to consider in flash calculations
in the reactor.
Use the Setup Reactions sheet to define the reactions occurring in
the reactor. You must specify the stoichiometry for each reaction.
In addition, you must specify either the molar extent or the
fractional conversion for all reactions. Alternatively, you can use
the Setup Combustion sheet to have RStoic generate combustion
reactions.
When solids are created or changed by the reactions, you may
specify the component attributes and the particle size distribution
in the outlet stream using the Setup Component Attr. sheet and the
Setup PSD sheet respectively.
If you wish to calculate the heats of reaction, use the Setup Heat of
Reaction sheet to specify the reference component for each
reaction defined in the Setup Reactions sheet. You may also
choose to specify the heats of reaction, and RStoic adjusts the
calculated reactor duty, if needed.
If you wish to calculate product selectivities use the Setup
Selectivity sheet to specify the selected product component and the
reference reactant component.
Heat of Reaction RStoic calculates the heat of reaction from the heats of formation
in the databanks when you select the Calculate Heat of Reaction
option on the Setup Heat of Reaction sheet. The heats of reaction
are calculated at the specified reference conditions based on
consumption of a unit mole or mass of the reference reactant
selected for each reaction. The following reference conditions are
used by default:
Specification Default
Reference temperature 25 degrees C
Reference pressure 1 atm
Reference fluid phase Vapor phase
You can also use the Setup Heat of Reaction sheet to specify the
heats of reaction. The specified heat of reaction may differ from

the heat of reaction that Aspen Plus computes from the heats of
formation at reference conditions. If this occurs, RStoic adjusts the
calculated reactor heat duty to reflect the differences. Under these
circumstances, the calculated reactor heat duty will not be
consistent with the inlet and outlet stream enthalpies.
Selectivity The selectivity of the selected component P to the reference
component A is defined as:
 ∆P 
 ∆A 
S P, A = Real
 ∆P 
 ∆A 
Ideal
Where:
∆P = Change in number of moles of component P due to
reaction
∆A = Change in number of moles of component A due to
reaction
In the numerator, real represents changes that actually occur in the
reactor. Aspen Plus obtains this value from the mass balance
between the inlet and outlet.
In the denominator, ideal represents changes according to an
idealized reaction scheme. This scheme assumes that no reactions
are present, except for the reaction that produces the selected
component from the reference component. Therefore, the
denominator indicates how many moles of P are produced per
mole of A consumed in an ideal stoichiometric equation, or:
 ∆P  υ
 ∆A  = P
Ideal υ A
where υ P and υ A are stoichiometric coefficients.

This example shows how RStoic calculates selectivity:
a1 A + b1 B → c1 C + d1 D
c2 C + e2 E → p2 P
a3 A + f3 F → q3 Q
The selectivity of P to A is:
 Moles of P produced   c1∗ p2 
S P, A =  / 
 Moles of A consumed   a1∗ c2 
In most cases, selectivity ranges between 0 and 1. However, if the
selected component is also produced from components other than
the reference component, selectivity may be greater than 1. If the

selected component is consumed in other reactions, selectivity may
be less than 0.
RStoic formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• Reactions in series
• Specifications which result in modified conversions during
sequential-modular calculations

RYield Reference
Use RYield to model a reactor when:
• Reaction stoichiometry is unknown or unimportant
• Reaction kinetics are unknown or unimportant
• Yield distribution is known
You must specify the yields (per mass of total feed, excluding any
inert components) for the products or calculate them in a user-
supplied Fortran subroutine. RYield normalizes the yields to
maintain a mass balance. RYield can model one-, two-, and three-
phase reactors.
RYield:
Setup Specify reactor operating conditions, component
yields, inert components, flash convergence
parameters, and PSD and component attributes for
the outlet stream
Assay Analysis Specify distillation, gravity, molecular weight,
petroleum properties, and viscosity data for
petroleum characterization and petroleum properties
calculation
UserSubroutine Specify subroutine name and parameters for the
user-supplied yield subroutine
energy balances for the reactor and phase
equilibrium results for the outlet stream
Flowsheet Material
RYield

(optional)
Water (optional)
Material

Material Streams

outlet One product stream
Heat Streams

If you give only one specification on the Setup Specifications sheet
(temperature or pressure), RYield uses the sum of the inlet heat
streams as a duty specification. Otherwise, RYield uses the inlet
heat stream(s) only to calculate the net heat duty. The net heat duty
is the sum of the inlet heat streams minus the actual (calculated)
heat duty.
You can use an outlet heat stream for the net heat duty.
Specifying RYield Use the Setup Specifications and Setup Yield sheets to specify the
reactor conditions and the component yields. For each reaction
product, specify the yield as either moles or mass of a component
per unit mass of feed. If you specify inert components on the Setup
Yield sheet, the yields will be based on unit mass of non-inert feed.
Calculated yields are normalized to maintain an overall material
balance. For this reason, yield specifications establish a yield
distribution, rather than absolute yields. RYield does not maintain
atom balances because you enter the fixed yield distribution.
You can also use Ryield to re-characterize an assay or a blend
defined on the Components Assay/Blend Form.
You can request one-, two-, or three-phase calculation.
When solids are created or changed by the reactions, you can
specify their component attributes and/or particle size distribution
in the outlet stream using the Setup Component Attr. and Setup
PSD sheets, respectively.
RYield formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• User yield subroutines
• Specifications which result in renormalized yields during
sequential-modular calculations
• Petroleum characterization option for specifying yield

REquil Reference
Use REquil to model a reactor when:
• Reaction stoichiometry is known and
• Some or all reactions reach chemical equilibrium
REquil calculates simultaneous phase and chemical equilibrium.
REquil allows restricted chemical equilibrium specifications for
reactions that do not reach equilibrium. REquil can model one- and
two-phase reactors.
REquil:
Input Specify reactor operating conditions, valid
phases, reactions, convergence parameters, and
solid and liquid entrainment in the vapor stream
energy balances, and calculated chemical
equilibrium constants
Flowsheet Material Material (vapor phase)
REquil
Material (liquid phase)

(optional)
Material Streams

One material stream for the liquid phase
Heat Streams

If you give only one specification on the REquil Input
Specifications sheet (temperature or pressure), REquil uses the
sum of the inlet heat streams as a duty specification. Otherwise,
REquil uses the inlet heat stream(s) only to calculate the net heat

duty. The net heat duty is the sum of the inlet heat streams minus
the actual (calculated) heat duty.
Specifying REquil You must specify the reaction stoichiometry and the reactor
conditions. If no additional specifications are given, REquil
assumes that the reactions will reach equilibrium.
REquil calculates equilibrium constants from the Gibbs energy.
You can restrict the equilibrium by specifying one of the
following:
• The molar extent for any reaction
• A temperature approach to chemical equilibrium (for any
reaction)
If you specify temperature approach, ∆T, REquil evaluates the
chemical equilibrium constant at T + ∆T, where T is the reactor
temperature (specified or calculated).
REquil performs single-phase property calculations or two-phase
flash calculations nested inside a chemical equilibrium loop.
REquil cannot perform three-phase calculations.
Solids Reactions can include conventional solids. REquil treats each
participating solid component as a separate pure solid phase, not as
a component in a solid solution. Any participating solids must have
a free energy formation (DGSFRM) and enthalpy of formation
(DHSFRM), or heat capacity parameters (CPSXP1).
Solids not participating in reactions, including any
nonconventional components, are treated as inert. These solids
have no effect on the equilibrium calculations except on the energy
balance.

RGibbs Reference
RGibbs uses Gibbs free energy minimization with phase splitting
to calculate equilibrium. RGibbs does not require that you specify
the reaction stoichiometry. Use RGibbs to model reactors with:
• Single phase (vapor or liquid) chemical equilibrium
• Phase equilibrium (an optional vapor and any number of liquid
phases) with no chemical reactions
• Phase and/or chemical equilibrium with solid solution phases
• Simultaneous phase and chemical equilibrium
RGibbs can also calculate the chemical equilibria between any
number of conventional solid components and the fluid phases.
RGibbs also allows restricted equilibrium specifications for
systems that do not reach complete equilibrium.
RGibbs:
Setup Specify reactor operating conditions and phases to
consider in equilibrium calculations, identify
possible products, assign phases to outlet streams,
specify inert components and specify equilibrium
restrictions
Advanced Specify atomic formula of components, estimates for
temperature and component flows, and convergence
parameters
simulation options, diagnostic message levels and
Results View summary of operating results, mass and energy
balances, molar compositions of fluid and solid
phases present, the atomic formula of components,
and calculated reaction equilibrium constants
Flowsheet Material Material
Connectivity for (any number) (any number)
RGibbs
Heat Heat
Material Streams

outlet At least one material stream
If you specify as many outlet streams as the number of phases that
RGibbs calculates, RGibbs assigns each phase to an outlet stream.
If you specify fewer outlet streams, RGibbs assigns the additional
phases to the last outlet stream.
Heat Streams

If you specify only pressure on the Setup Specifications sheet,
RGibbs uses the sum of the inlet heat streams as a duty
specification. Otherwise, RGibbs uses the inlet heat stream(s) only
to calculate the net heat duty. The net heat duty is the sum of the
inlet heat streams minus the actual (calculated) heat duty.
Specifying RGibbs This section describes how to specify:
• Phase equilibrium only
• Phase and chemical equilibrium
• Restricted chemical equilibrium
• Reactions
• Solids
Phase Equilibrium Only
To specify Use this option On
Phase equilibrium calculations Phase Equilibrium Only Setup Specifications sheet
only
Maximum number of fluid Maximum Number of Fluid Setup Specifications sheet
phases that RGibbs should Phases
consider
Maximum number of solid Maximum Number of Solid Solid Phases dialog box from the Setup
solution phases Solution Phases Specifications sheet
RGibbs distributes all species among all solution phases by default.
You can use the Setup Products sheet to assign different sets of
species to each solution phase. You can also assign different
thermodynamic property methods to each phase.
If there is a possibility that a solid solution phase may exist, use the
Setup Products sheet to identify the species that will exist in that
phase.

Phase Equilibrium and
Chemical Equilibrium
To specify Use this option On
Chemical equilibrium Phase Equilibrium and Setup Specifications sheet
calculations (with or without Chemical Equilibrium
phase equilibrium)
Maximum number of fluid Maximum Number of Fluid Setup Specifications sheet
phases that RGibbs should Phases
consider
Maximum number of solid Maximum Number of Solid Solid Phases dialog box from the Setup
solution phases Solution Phases Specifications sheet
By default, RGibbs considers all components entered on the
Components Specifications Selection sheet as possible fluid phase
or solid products. You can specify an alternate list of products on
the Setup Products sheet.
RGibbs distributes all solution species among all solution phases
by default. You can use the Setup Products sheet to assign different
sets of species to each solution phase. You can also assign different
thermodynamic property methods to each phase.
RGibbs needs the molecular formula for each component that is
present in a feed or product stream. RGibbs retrieves this
information from the component databanks. For non-databank
components, use the Properties Molec-Struct Formula sheet to
enter:
• Atom (the atom type)
• Number of occurrences (the number of atoms of each type)
Alternatively, you can enter the atom matrix on the Advanced
Atom Matrix sheet. The atom matrix defines the number of each
atom in each component. If you enter the atom matrix, you must
enter it for all components and atoms, including databank
components.
If there is a possibility that a solid solution phase may exist, use the
Setup Products sheet to identify the species which will exist in that
phase.

Restricted Chemical To restrict chemical equilibrium:
Equilibrium Specify On
The molar extent of the reaction Edit Reactions dialog box (from the
Setup RestrictedEquilibrium sheet)
A temperature approach to Edit Reactions dialog box (from the
equilibrium for individual Setup RestrictedEquilibrium sheet)
reactions
A temperature approach to Edit Reactions dialog box (from the
chemical equilibrium for the Setup RestrictedEquilibrium sheet)
entire system
The outlet amount of any Setup Inerts sheet †
component as total mole flow or
as a fraction of the feed of that
component
† You can specify inert components by setting the fraction to 1.
For temperature approach specifications, RGibbs evaluates the
chemical equilibrium constant at T + ∆T, where T is the actual
reactor temperature (specified or calculated) and ∆T is the desired
temperature approach.
You can enter one of the following restricted equilibrium
specifications for individual reactions:
• The molar extent of a reaction
• The temperature approach for an individual reaction
Use the Setup RestrictedEquilibrium sheet to supply the reaction
stoichiometry.
If you enter one of the preceding specifications, you must also
supply the stoichiometry for a set of linearly independent reactions
involving all components in the system.
Reactions You can have RGibbs consider only a specific set of reactions.
You can restrict the chemical equilibrium by specifying
temperature approach or molar extent for the reactions. You must
specify the stoichiometric coefficients for a complete set of
linearly independent chemical reactions, even if only one reaction
is restricted.
The number of linearly independent reactions required equals the
total number of products in the product list, including solids (see
the Setup Products sheet), minus the number of atoms present in
the system. The reactions must involve all participating
components. A component is participating if it satisfies these
criteria:
• It is in the product list.

• It is not inert. A component is inert if it consists entirely of
atoms not present in any other product components.
• It has not been dropped. A component listed on the Setup
Products sheet is dropped if it contains an atom not present in
the feed.
Solids RGibbs can calculate the chemical equilibria between any number
of conventional solid components and the fluid phases. RGibbs
detects whether the solid is present at equilibrium, and if so,
calculates the amount. RGibbs treats each solid component as a
pure solid phase, unless it is specified as a component in a solid
solution. Any solid that RGibbs considers a product must have
both:
• Free energy of formation (DGSFRM or CPSXP1)
• Heat of formation (DHSFRM or CPSXP1)
Nonconventional solids are treated as inert and have no effect on
equilibrium calculations. If chemical equilibrium is not considered,
RGibbs treats all solids as inert. RGibbs cannot perform solids-
phase-only calculations.
RGibbs places all pure solids in the last outlet stream unless you
specify otherwise on the Setup AssignStreams sheet. RGibbs can
handle only a single CISOLID substream, which contains all
conventional solids products defined as pure solid phases. RGibbs
places the solid solution phases in the MIXED substream of the
outlet stream(s).
RGibbs cannot directly handle phase equilibrium between solids
and fluid phases (for example, water-ice equilibrium). To work
around this, you can list the same component twice on the
Components Specifications Selection sheet, with different
component IDs. If you want RGibbs to calculate the chemical
equilibrium between these components:
• Specify both component IDs on the Setup Products sheet.
• Designate one ID as a solids phase component, the other as a
fluid phase component.
References Gautam, R. and Seider, W.D., "Computation of Phase and
Chemical Equilibrium," Parts I, II, and III, AIChE J. 25, 6,
November, 1979, pp. 991-1015.
White, C.W. and Seider, W.D., "Computation of Phase and
Chemical Equilibrium: Approach to Chemical Equilibrium,"
AIChE J., 27, 3, May, 1981, pp.446-471.
Schott, G. L., "Computation of Restricted Equilibria by General
Methods," J. Chem. Phys., 40, 1964.

RCSTR Reference
RCSTR rigorously models continuous stirred tank reactors.
RCSTR can model one-, two-, or three-phase reactors. RCSTR
assumes perfect mixing in the reactor, that is, the reactor contents
have the same properties and composition as the outlet stream.
RCSTR handles kinetic and equilibrium reactions as well as
reactions involving solids. You can provide the reaction kinetics
through the built-in Reactions models or through a user-defined
Fortran subroutine.
RCSTR:
Setup Specify reactor operating conditions and holdup,
select the reaction sets to be included, and
specify PSD and component attributes in the
outlet stream
Convergence Provide estimates for component flow rates,
reactor temperature and volume, and specify
flash convergence parameters, RCSTR
convergence methods and parameters, and
initialization options
UserSubroutine Specify parameters for the user-supplied kinetics
subroutine and block-specific report option for
the kinetics subroutine
Results View summary of operating results and mass and
energy balances for the block
Connectivity for
RCSTR
Material
(any number) Material
Heat
(optional)

Material Streams

Heat Streams

If you specify only pressure on the Setup Specifications sheet,
RCSTR uses the sum of the inlet heat streams as a duty
specification. Otherwise, RCSTR uses the inlet heat stream only to
calculate the net heat duty. The net heat duty is the sum of the inlet
heat streams minus the actual (calculated) heat duty.
Specifying RCSTR You must specify the reactor operating conditions, which are
pressure and either temperature or heat duty. You must also enter
the reactor volume or residence time (overall or phase).
Reactions You must specify reaction kinetics on the Reactions Reactions
forms and select the Reaction Set ID on the Setup Reactions sheet.
You can specify one-, two-, or three-phase calculations. You can
specify the phase for each reaction on the Reactions Reactions
forms. RCSTR can handle the kinetic and equilibrium type
reactions.
Phase Volume In a multi-phase reactor, by default, Aspen Plus calculates the
volume of each phase, using phase equilibrium results, as:
Vi f i
V Pi = VR
ΣV j f j
Where:
VPi = Volume of phase i
VR = Reactor volume
Vi = Molar volume of phase i
fi = Molar fraction of phase i
You can override the default calculation by specifying the volume
of a phase directly (Phase Volume) or as a fraction of the reactor
volume (Phase Volume Frac) on the Setup Specifications sheet.
Alternatively, when you specify the residence time of a phase in
the reactor, Aspen Plus calculates the phase volume iteratively.

Residence Time Aspen Plus calculates the residence time (overall and phase) in the
CSTR as:
VR
RT =
F * Σf iVi
V Pi
RTi =
F * f iVi
Where:
RT = Overall residence time
RTi = Residence time of phase i
VR = Reactor volume
F = Total molar flow rate (outlet)
Vi = Molar volume of phase i
fi = Molar fraction of phase i
VPi = Volume of phase i
When the default calculation for phase volume, based on phase
equilibrium results, is used, the phase residence time is equal for
all phases. If you specify Phase Volume or Phase Volume Frac on
the Setup Specifications sheet, the residence time for the phase
specified in the Holdup Phase is calculated with the specified
phase volume rather than the default phase volume.
Solids RCSTR can handle reactions involving solids. RCSTR assumes
that solids are at the same temperature as the fluid phase. RCSTR
cannot perform solids-phase-only calculations.
Scaling of Variables Four types of variables are predicted by RCSTR: component flow
rates, stream enthalpy, component attributes and PSD (if present).
RCSTR normalizes these variables, for faster convergence, by
dividing each one by a scale factor.
Two types of scaling are available in RCSTR: component-based
scaling and substream-based scaling. Component-based scaling
weighs each variable against its previous or estimated value.
Substream-based scaling weighs each variable in a substream
against the substream flow rate. For component-based scaling,
minimum scale values are set by the Trace Scaling Factor in the
Advanced Parameters dialog box (from the Convergence
Parameters sheet). You may reduce the trace scaling threshold to
increase the prediction accuracy of trace components.

Component-based scaling generally provides more accuracy than
substream-based scaling, especially for trace components. Use
component-based scaling when:
• The reaction network involves trace intermediates
• The reaction rates are very sensitive to trace reactants (such as
catalysts and initiators which participate in degradation
reactions)
The following tables summarize the scale factors used by each
method.
Substream-based Scaling Method
Variable Type Variable Initial Scale Factor
Component Flows Component mole flow in outlet stream Estimated outlet substream mole flow
rate
Stream Enthalpy Net enthalpy flow of outlet stream Net enthalpy flow of inlet stream
Component Product of component mass flow (with Default attribute scale factor
Attributes (attr/kg) attributes) and attribute value in outlet stream
PSD Product of substream mass flow rate (with Default attribute scale factor
PSD) and PSD value in outlet stream
Note: If any substream-based scaling factor is equal to zero, the

default scaling factor is used instead (the default factor is 1.0 for
component flow rates and 1.0E5 for stream enthalpy).
Component-based Scaling Method

Variable Type Variable Initial Scale Factor
Component Flows Component mole flow in outlet Larger of:
stream - Estimated component mole flow in outlet
stream
- Product of Trace threshold and estimated
outlet substream mole flow
Stream Enthalpy Net enthalpy flow of outlet stream Net enthalpy flow of inlet stream
Component Product of component mass flow Larger of:
Attributes (attr/kg) with attributes and attribute value in - Product of estimated attributed component
outlet stream mass flow and estimated attribute value in outlet
stream
- Product of Trace threshold and estimated
outlet substream mole flow
PSD Product of substream mass flow rate Larger of:
and PSD value in outlet stream - Product of estimated substream mass flow with
PSDs and estimated PSD value in outlet stream
- Product of Trace threshold and default
attribute scale factor

RPlug Reference
RPlug is a rigorous model for plug flow reactors. RPlug assumes
that perfect mixing occurs in the radial direction and that no
mixing occurs in the axial direction. RPlug can model one-, two-,
or three-phase reactors. You can also use RPlug to model reactors
with coolant streams (co-current or counter-current).
RPlug handles kinetic reactions, including reactions involving
solids. You must know the reaction kinetics when you use RPlug
to model a reactor. You can provide the reaction kinetics through
the built-in Reactions models or through a user-defined Fortran
subroutine.
RPlug:
Setup Specify operating conditions and reactor
configuration, select reaction sets to be included,
and specify pressure drops
Convergence Specify flash convergence parameters,
calculation options and parameters for the
integrator
Report Specify block-specific report options
UserSubroutine Specify user subroutine parameters for kinetics,
heat transfer, pressure drop, and list user
variables to be included in the profile report
BlockOptions Override global values for property methods,
simulation options, diagnostic levels, and report
options for this block
energy balances for the block
Profiles View profiles versus reactor length for process
stream conditions, coolant stream conditions,
properties, component attributes, PSD, and user
variables
Connectivity for
RPlug
Material Material
Flowsheet Reactor without Coolant Stream

Material Coolant
(optional)
Material Material
Material Coolant
(optional)
Flowsheet Reactor with Coolant Stream
Material Streams

One coolant stream (optional)
outlet One material product stream
One coolant stream (optional)
Heat Streams

outlet One heat stream (optional) for the reactor heat duty. Use
the heat outlet stream only for reactors without a coolant
stream.

Specifying RPlug Use the Setup Configuration sheet to specify reactor tube length
and diameter. If the reactor consists of multiple tubes, you can also
specify the number of tubes. You can specify the pressure drop
across the reactor on the Setup Pressure sheet. Additional required
input for RPlug depends on the reactor type.
When you use this And solid And fluid and solid Specify
Reactor Type phase is phase
temperatures are
Reactor with specified - - Reactor temperature, or temperature
temperature profile
Adiabatic reactor Not - No required specifications
present
Present Same No required specifications
Present Different U (fluid phase - solids phase)
Reactor with constant Not - Coolant temperature, and
coolant temperature present U (coolant - process stream)
Present Same Coolant temperature, and
U (coolant - process stream)
Present Different Coolant temperature,
U (coolant - fluid phase),
U (coolant - solids phase), and
U (fluid phase - solids phase)
Reactor with co- Not - U (coolant - process stream)
current coolant present
Present Same U (coolant - process stream)
Present Different U (coolant - fluid phase),
Reactor with counter- Not - Coolant outlet temperature or molar
current coolant present vapor fraction, and
Present Same Coolant outlet temperature or molar
vapor fraction, and
Present Different Coolant outlet temperature or molar
vapor fraction,
U (coolant - fluid phase),
For reactors with countercurrent external coolant, RPlug calculates
the coolant inlet temperature. The result overrides your specified
inlet coolant temperature. You can use a design specification that
manipulates the coolant exit temperature or vapor fraction to
achieve a specified coolant inlet temperature.

For reactors with an external coolant stream, you can use different
physical property methods and options (BlockOptions Properties
sheet) for the process stream and the coolant stream.
Reactions You must specify reaction kinetics on the Setup Reactions sheet,
by referring to Reaction IDs that you select. You can specify one-,
two-, or three-phase calculations. Specify the reaction phases on
the Reactions Reactions forms. RPlug can handle only kinetic type
reactions.
Solids Reactions can involve solids. Solids can be:
• At the same temperature as the fluid phases
• At a different temperature from the fluid phases (only for
Reactor Types other than the reactor with specified
temperature)
In the latter case, you must specify the heat transfer coefficients on
the Setup Specifications sheet.

RBatch Reference
RBatch is a rigorous model for batch or semi-batch reactors. Use
RBatch when you know the kinetics of the reactions taking place.
You can specify any number of continuous feed streams. A
continuous vent is optional. The reaction runs until it reaches a
stop criterion that you specify.
Batch operations are unsteady-state processes. RBatch uses
holding tanks and your specified cycle times to provide an
interface between the discrete operations of the batch reactor and
the continuous streams used by other models.
RBatch can model one-, two-, or three-phase reactors.
RBatch:
Setup Specify operating conditions, select reaction sets to
be included, specify operation stop criteria, operation
times, continuous feeds, and controller parameters
Convergence Specify convergence parameters for flash
calculations, integration, and pressure calculations
Report Specify block-specific report options for profiles and
reactor, vent, and vent accumulator property profiles
UserSubroutine Specify parameters for the user kinetics subroutine,
name and parameters for the user heat transfer
subroutine, and user variables for the profile report
Results View summary of block operating results and mass
and energy balances
Profiles View time profiles of reactor conditions,
compositions, continuous feed stream flows,
properties, component attributes, and user variables
Flowsheet Batch charge Heat (optional)
Connectivity for
RBatch Vent
(optional)
Continuous feeds
(optional)
Product

Material Streams
inlet One batch charge stream (required)

One or more continuous feed streams for semi-batch
reactors (optional)
outlet One product stream (required)
One vent stream for semi-batch reactors (optional)
Heat Streams

Specifying RBatch Use the Setup Specifications sheet to specify the reactor
conditions.
Use the Setup Operations sheet to specify:
• One or more stop criteria
• Either a feed time or a batch cycle time
Other required input for RBatch depends on reactor type.
To establish the pressure of the vessel, enter one of the following
specifications on the Setup Specifications sheet:
• Constant pressure
• Reactor volume
Use the Setup ContinuousFeeds sheet to enter mass flow rates for
the continuous feeds at any number of points in time. You can thus
simulate delayed feeds and step changes in feeds.
For specified duty reactors, you can specify either a constant heat
duty or a heat duty profile. For a reactor with constant duty,
RBatch assumes adiabatic operation if you do not specify a heat
duty.
For reactors with specified coolant temperature, you must specify:
• Coolant temperature
• An over-all heat transfer coefficient
• Total heat transfer area
For constant temperature and specified temperature reactors,
RBatch handles the temperature specification in one of the
following ways:
• By assuming perfect control
• By interpreting the specified temperature(s) as the setpoint(s)
of a PID controller

Controller RBatch assumes perfect control when one of these conditions
exists:
• Pressure in the reactor is converged upon (that is, reactor
volume is specified)
• A single-phase batch reactor is used with no continuous feed
streams
If RBatch cannot assume perfect control, it interprets the specified
temperature(s) as the setpoint(s) of a PID controller. This
interpretation occurs when:
• A two-phase reactor is used.
• RBatch does not calculate reactor pressure (that is, pressure or
pressure profile is specified).
• Continuous feeds are present during semi-batch operation.
Use the Setup Controllers sheet to specify the controller tuning
parameters.
The controller equation is:
 t
d (T − T s ) 
Q = M c  K (T − T ) + ( K / I ) ∫ (T − T )dt + KD
s s

 0
dt 
Where:
Q = Reactor heat duty (J/sec)
Mc = Reactor charge (kg)
K = Proportional gain (J/kg/K)
T = Reactor temperature (K)
Ts = Temperature set point (K)
I = Integral time (sec)
D = Derivative time (sec)
t = Time (sec)
The gain factor is a specific gain per unit mass.
Reactions Reactions may or may not be present in RBatch. If they are, you
must include the Reaction Set IDs on the Setup Reactions sheet.
You can specify one-, two-, or three-phase calculations. You
specify the reaction phases on the Reactions Reactions forms.
RBatch can only handle kinetic type reactions.

Specifying Stop Criteria A reaction runs until one of your specified stop criteria reached. A
stop criterion can be one of the following:
• Reaction time
• Reactor composition
• Vent accumulator or continuous vent composition
• Conversion of a component
• Amount of material in the reactor or vent accumulator
• Vent flow rate
• Temperature in the reactor
• Vapor fraction in the reactor
• Any property specified on the Properties Prop-Sets Properties
sheet
As the stop criterion variable approaches its cut-off from above or
below, you can specify whether or not RBatch should halt the
reaction. If you specify more than one stop criterion, RBatch halts
the reaction as soon as one of the criteria is reached. In addition,
you must specify a halt time for the reaction. If the reaction does
not reach the specified stop criteria by this time, RBatch halts the
reaction.
Cycle Time You can specify a reactor cycle time. Or, you can let RBatch
calculate it from your specified reaction and down times for
draining, cleaning, and charging the reactor. If you do not specify
reactor cycle time, then specify a feed cycle time. RBatch uses this
time to determine the batch charge, because the reaction time is not
known at the beginning of block execution.
Note: If the reactor batch charge stream is in a recycle loop, you
must specify the reactor cycle time.
Mass Balances Because RBatch uses different cycle times to calculate time-
averaged flows, RBatch may not maintain a mass balance around
the block. For example, suppose you specify a feed time of 30
minutes, but the down time plus the calculated value reaction time
equals 45 minutes. The resulting net mass flow from the reactor is
less than the charge flow by a factor of 45/30=1.5.
Remember that the mass balance pertains to the time-averaged
inlet and outlet continuous streams. RBatch always satisfies a mass
balance for its own internal batch computations. If there is no
continuous feed stream, the mass balance around RBatch closes
only if the cycle time is specified. This ensures that the same time
is used for averaging the batch change and product streams. If
there is a continuous feed stream, and it is not time-varying, the
mass balance closes only if the cycle time is specified, and the
specified value is equal to the calculated reaction time. In all other

cases, the mass balance around RBatch does not close, although
the compositions, temperature, and so on are correct.
Batch Operation RBatch can operate in a batch or in semi-batch mode. The reactor
mode is determined by the streams you enter on the flowsheet. A
semi-batch reactor can have a vent product stream, one or more
continuous feed streams, or both. The vent product stream exits a
vent accumulator. It does not exit the reactor itself. The vent
accumulator is for the continuous (but time-varying) vapor vent
leaving the reactor. The composition and temperature of each
continuous feed stream remain constant throughout the reaction.
The flow rate also remains constant, unless you specify a time
profile for the flow rate of a continuous stream.
Batch operations are unsteady-state processes. Variables like
temperature, composition, and flow rate change with time, in
contrast to steady-state processes. To interface RBatch with a
steady-state flowsheet, it is necessary to use time-averaged
streams.
Four types of streams are associated with RBatch, as follows:
Batch Charge: The material transferred to the reactor at the start of
the reactor cycle. The mass of the batch charge equals the flow rate
of the batch charge stream, multiplied by the feed cycle time. The
mass of the batch charge is equivalent to accumulating the batch
charge stream in a holding tank during a reactor cycle. The
contents of the holding tank are transferred to the reactor at the
beginning of the next cycle . (See figure RBatch Reactor
Configuration - No Vent Case.)
To compute the amount of the batch charge, RBatch multiplies the
flowsheet stream representing the batch charge by a cycle time you
enter (either Cycle Time or Batch Feed Time). Batch Feed Time is
not the time required to charge the reactor; it is a total cycle time
used only to compute the amount of the charge. Batch Feed Time
is required when Cycle Time is unknown.
If Batch Feed Time differs from the actual computed cycle time,
the RBatch flowsheet inlet and outlet streams are not in mass
balance. However, all internal RBatch calculations and reports will
be correct for the computed batch charge.
Continuous Feed: A steady-state flowsheet stream fed
continuously to the reactor during reaction. Its composition and
temperature remain constant throughout the reaction. Its flow rate
either remains constant or follows a specified time profile.
Reactor Product: The material left in the reactor at the end of the
reactor cycle. The flow rate of the reactor product stream equals
the total mass in the reactor, divided by the reactor cycle time. You

can think of this process as analogous to transferring the reactor
product to a product holding tank. This tank is drawn down during
the next reactor cycle to feed the continuous blocks downstream
(see figure RBatch Reactor Configuration - No Vent Case ).
Vent Product: The contents of the vent accumulator at the end of
the reactor cycle. During the reactor cycle, the time-varying vent
stream accumulates in the vent accumulator (see figure RBatch
Reactor Configuration - Vent Case). The flow rate of the vent
product stream is the total mass in the vent accumulator, divided
by the reactor cycle time.
Feed
Holding
Tank
Flowsheet
Stream for
Batch Charge
Batch charge Product
transferred Holding
once each Reactor Tank
cycle
Reactor
Optional Flowsheet product Flowsheet
Stream for transferred Stream for
Continuous Feed once each Reactor
cycle Product
RBatch Reactor Configuration—No Vent Case
Feed Vent Vent
Holding Tank Accumulator Holding Tank
Flowsheet Vent Flowsheet

Stream for Product Stream
Batch transferred for Vent
Charge once per cycle Product
Batch charge
transferred
once each Product
cycle Reactor Holding Tank
Optional Flowsheet Reactor

Stream for product Flowsheet
Continuous Feed transferred Stream for
once each Reactor
cycle Product
RBatch Reactor Configuration—Vent Case

CHAPTER 6
Pressure Changers
This chapter describes the unit operation models for pumps and
compressors, and models for calculating pressure change through
pipes and valves. The models are:
Pump Pump or hydraulic Changes stream Pumps and hydraulic turbines
turbine pressure when the
power requirement is
needed or known
Compr Compressor or turbine Changes stream Polytropic compressors, polytropic positive
pressure when power displacement compressors, isentropic
requirement is needed compressors, isentropic turbines
or known
MCompr Multistage compressor Changes stream Multistage polytropic compressors,
or turbine pressure across multiple polytropic positive displacement
stages with intercoolers. compressors, isentropic compressors,
Allows for liquid isentropic turbines
knockout streams from
intercoolers
Valve Valve pressure drop Models pressure drop Control valves and pressure changers
through a valve
Pipe Single segment pipe Models pressure drop Pipe with constant diameter (may include
through a single fittings)
segment of pipe
Pipeline Multiple segment Models pressure drop Pipeline with multiple lengths of different
pipeline through a pipe or diameter or elevation
annular space
Use Pump, Compr, and MCompr models when energy-related
information such as power requirement is needed or known.
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Pressure Changers • 6-1

Pump Reference
Use Pump to model a pump or a hydraulic turbine.
Pump is designed to handle a single liquid phase. For special cases,
you can specify two- or three-phase calculations to determine the
outlet stream conditions and to compute the fluid density used in
the pump equations. The accuracy of the results depends on a
number of factors, such as the relative amounts of the phases
present, the compressibility of the fluid, and the efficiency
specified.
Use Pump to change pressure when the power requirement is
needed or known. For pressure change only, you can use other
models such as Heater.
Pump can model pumps and hydraulic turbines.
Use the Pump block to rate a pump or a turbine by specifying
scalar parameters or by specifying the related performance curves.
To use the performance curves, you can specify either:
• Dimensional curves such as head versus flow or power versus
flow
• Dimensionless curves such as head coefficient versus flow
coefficient
Pump:
Setup Specify operating conditions, efficiencies, net
positive suction head parameters, specific speed
parameters, valid phases, and flash convergence
parameters
PerformanceCurve Specify parameters and enter data for the
s performance curves
UserSubroutine Specify name and parameters for the user
performance curve subroutine
Results View summary of Pump results, material and
energy balance results, and performance curve
summary
6-2 • Pressure Changers Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Work (optional)
Flowsheet
Connectivity for
Pump Material
Material
(any number)
Water (optional)
Work
(optional)
Material Streams

Work Streams
inlet Any number of work streams (optional)

outlet One work stream for the net work load (optional)
If you do not specify either power or pressure on the Setup
Specifications sheet, Pump uses the sum of the inlet work streams
as a power specification. Otherwise, Pump uses the inlet work
stream(s) only to calculate the net work load. The net work load is
the sum of the inlet work streams minus the actual (calculated)
work load.
You can use an optional outlet work stream for the net work load.
Specifying Pump Use the Setup Specifications sheet for Pump specifications.
If you specify Pump calculates
Discharge pressure Power required or produced
Pressure increase (for a pump) or decrease Power required or produced
(for a turbine)
Pressure ratio (outlet pressure to inlet Power required or produced
pressure)
Power required (for a pump) or produced Discharge pressure
(for a turbine)
Curves of head, discharge pressure, pressure Power required or produced
ratio, pressure change, or head coefficient
Power curve Discharge pressure
You can supply a Fortran subroutine to calculate performance
curves in Pump. See Aspen Plus User Models for more
information.

NPSH Available The Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) available for a pump is
defined as:
NPSHA = Pin − Pvapor + H v + H s
Where:
NPSHA = Net Positive Suction Head Available
Pin = Inlet pressure
Pvapor = Vapor pressure of the liquid at inlet conditions
Hv = Velocity head =
u 2 / 2 g where u is the velocity and g is
gravitation constant
Hs = Hydraulic static head corrected to the pump
centerline
The NPSH available has to be greater than the NPSH required
(NPSHR) to avoid cavitation. NPSH required is a function of
pump design.
NPSH Required The Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) required can be considered
the suction pressure required by the pump for safe, reliable
operation. The NPSHR can be specified using the performance
curves on the PerformanceCurves NPSHR sheet, or calculated
from the following empirical equation by specifying suction
specific speed ( N ss ) on the Setup CalculationOptions sheet.
4
 N Q 0.5 
3
NPSHR =  
 N ss 
Where:
NPSHR = Net Positive Suction Head Required
N = Pump shaft speed (rpm)
Q = Volumetric flow rate at the suction conditions
N ss = Suction specific speed
The units for Q and NPSHR are:

US: Q in gal/min and NPSHR in feet
Metric: Q in cum/hr and NPSHR in meters
Specific Speed Specific speed and suction specific speed are two important
parameters that define the suitability of a pump design for its
intended conditions. The pump specific speed is defined as:

N Q 0.5
Ns =
Head 0.75
Where:
Head = Head developed across the pump
Ns = Specific speed
The units for Q and Head are:

US: Head in feet
Metric: Head in meters
In general, pumps with a low specific speed are termed low
capacity and those with a high specific speed are termed high
capacity. For a turbine, the specific speed is defined as follows:
N BHP 0.5
Ns =
Head 1.25
Where:
Ns = Specific speed
BHP = Developed horsepower
Head = Total dynamic head across turbine
Suction Specific Speed
Suction specific speed ( N ss ) is an index number for a centrifugal
pump and is used to define its suction characteristic. It is defined
as follows:
N Q 0.5
N ss =
NPSHR 0.75
Where:
NPSHR = Net positive suction head required for a pump or
net positive discharge head required for a turbine
N ss = Suction specific speed
The units for Q and NPSHR are:

US: Q in gal/min and NPSHR in feet
Metric: Q in cum/hr and NPSHR in meters

Suction specific speed is a criterion of a pump’s performance with
regard to cavitation. For a pump of normal design, values of N ss
vary from 6,000 to 12,000 in US units. A typical value is 8,500.
Head Coefficient Head coefficient is defined as follows:
Head
Headc =
u2
Where:
Headc = Head coefficient
Head = Head developed across the pump
u = Impeller tip speed
Flow Coefficient Flow coefficient is the ratio of discharge throat velocity to impeller
tip speed. It is defined as:
Q
Flowc =
A1 u
A1 = π × d 12 / 4
Where:
Flowc = Flow coefficient
Q = Volumetric flow rate
A1 = Cross-sectional area of discharge throat
d1 = Diameter of discharge throat
u = Impeller tip speed
The diameter of throat and diameter of impeller are related by the
following empirical equation:
d1
N s = 5500
Diam
Where:
Ns = Specific speed at the best efficiency point
Diam = Diameter of impeller
You can specify Specific Speed ( N s ) on the Setup

CalculationOptions sheet.

Performance Curves The performance curves can be entered in one of the following
curve formats:
• Tabular data
• Polynomials
• User subroutine
You can select one of the following performance curves (the
dependent variable) for the pump type you specified on the Pump
Setup Specifications sheet:
Performance Curve Data for a pump Data for a turbine
Type
Head Head required Head produced
Head-Coeff Head coefficient Head coefficient
Power Power required Power produced
Dis-Pressure Outlet pressure Outlet pressure
Pres-Ratio Pressure ratio Pressure ratio
Pres-Change Pressure increase Pressure decrease
The flow variable (the independent variable) can be one of the
following:
• Volume flow rate at suction conditions
• Mass flow rate at suction conditions
• Specific volumetric flow rate (for head coefficient only)
• Flow coefficient (for head coefficient only)
You can select one of the following options for specifying curves:
• A single curve at the operating shaft speed
• A single curve; use affinity laws to scale the performance from
a reference speed
• Multiple curves at multiple shaft speeds
Pump formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• Power, discharge pressure, and pressure-ratio performance
curves
• Multiple performance curves of other types
Single performance curves for head, head coefficient, and pressure
change are supported.

Compr Reference
Use Compr to model:
• A polytropic centrifugal compressor
• A polytropic positive displacement compressor
• An isentropic compressor
• An isentropic turbine
Use Compr to change stream pressure when energy-related
information, such as power requirement, is needed or known.
Compr can handle single-phase as well as two- and three-phase
calculations.
You can use Compr to rate a single stage of a compressor or a
single wheel of a compressor, by specifying the related
performance curves. Compr allows you to specify either:
• Dimensional curves, such as head versus flow or power versus
flow
• Dimensionless curves, such as head coefficient versus flow
coefficient
Compr can also calculate compressor shaft speed.
Compr cannot handle performance curves for a turbine.
Compr:
Setup Identify compressor specifications, calculation
options, convergence parameters, and valid
phases
Performance Specify parameters and enter data for the
Curves performance curves
User Subroutine Enter performance curve subroutine parameters
and name
Results View summary of Compr results, material and
energy balance results, and performance curve
summary

Material
Flowsheet (any number)
Connectivity for
Compr
Work Work (optional)
(optional)
Water (optional)
Material
Material Streams

Work Streams

outlet One work stream for net work load (optional)
If you do not specify either power or pressure on the Compr Setup
Specifications sheet, Compr uses the sum of the inlet work streams
as a power specification. Otherwise, Compr uses the inlet work
stream(s) only to calculate the net work load. The net work load is
the sum of the inlet work streams minus the actual (calculated)
work load.
You can use an optional outlet work stream for the net work load.
Specifying Compr If you specify Compr calculates
Power required (for a compressor) or Discharge pressure
produced (for a turbine)
Curves of head, power, discharge Power required and discharge
pressure, pressure ratio, pressure pressure
change, or head coefficient
Discharge pressure and curves of head Power required, discharge
or power or head coefficient pressure, and shaft speed
Power required and curves of discharge Discharge pressure, and shaft
pressure, pressure ratio, or pressure speed
change
When you use performance curves, you can specify either a scalar
value of efficiency or efficiency curves.
curves in Compr. See Aspen Plus User Models for more
information.

Some required specifications depend on the compressor type.
Specify the compressor type on the Setup Specifications sheet.
You can model a polytropic compressor using either the GPSA or
ASME method. You can model an isentropic compressor using
either the GPSA, ASME, or Mollier-based methods. To model a
turbine, you must use the Mollier-based method.
The GPSA method can be based on either:
• Suction conditions
• Average of suction and discharge conditions
The ASME method is more rigorous than the GPSA method for
polytropic or isentropic compressor calculations. The Mollier
method is the most rigorous for isentropic calculations.
Polytropic Efficiency η
The polytropic efficiency p is used in the equation for the
polytropic compression ratio:
n − 1  k − 1
=  ηp
n  k 
The basic compressor relation is:
 n −1 
PinVin  Pout  n 
∆h =   − 1
 n − 1   Pin 
ηp  
 n 
Where:
n = Polytropic coefficient
k = Heat capacity ratio Cp/Cv
ηp = Polytropic efficiency
∆h = Enthalpy change per mole

P = Pressure
V = Molar volume
There are two equations for the isentropic efficiency η s

Isentropic Efficiency
For compression:
s
hout − hin
ηs =
hout − hin

For expansion:
hout − hin
ηs = s
hout − hin
Where :
h = Molar enthalpy
s
hout = Outlet molar enthalpy assuming isentropic
compression or expansion to the specified outlet
pressure
Mechanical efficiency η m is used to calculate the brake

Mechanical Efficiency
horsepower:
IHP = F∆h
BHP = IHP / η m
Where:
IHP = Indicated horsepower
F = Mole flow rate
BHP = Brake horsepower
ηm = Mechanical efficiency
Integration Method The head developed for a compressor to change the pressure of a
stream from the inlet pressure P1 to the outlet pressure P2 is given
by:
p2
HEAD = ∫ VdP
p1
where V is the molar volume and subscripts 1 and 2 refer to inlet

and outlet conditions, respectively. Two integration methods are
provided for the polytropic and positive displacement model
calculations using piecewise integration:
Direct method
Applying the gas law PV = ZRT and using the average point for
each interval, given the number of intervals between P1 and P2,
subpath i for head developed can be written as:
 Pi 
HEAD i = R( ZT ) av ln 2i 
 P1 

The total polytropic head is the sum of the subpath heads:
HEAD = ∑ H EAD i
i
n-Method
In a polytropic compression process, the relation of pressure P to

volume V is expressed by the following equation:
PV n = C = constant
where n is the polytropic exponent. The n-method is to integrate
head equation, between P1 and P2, over a small interval such that
a constant n is assumed. For subpath i, the head developed can be
written as:
 n −1

P1iV1i  P2i 
− 1
n
HEAD =
i
 
 n − 1   P1i 

   
 n 
Power Loss Power loss can be used to calculate the brake horsepower, in place
of the mechanical efficiency specification on the Setup
Specifications sheet.
For compression process:
BHP = (IHP) + PLOSS
and for expansion process:
BHP = (IHP) – PLOSS
Where:
PLOSS = Power loss
Compr formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• Suction nozzle parameters
• Multiple performance curves at different speeds

MCompr Reference
Use MCompr to model:
• A multi-stage polytropic compressor
• A multi-stage polytropic positive displacement compressor
• A multi-stage isentropic compressor
• A multi-stage isentropic turbine
For polytropic compressors, MCompr can handle a single,
compressible phase. For special cases you can specify two- or
three-phase calculations. These calculations determine the outlet
stream conditions and the properties used in the compressor
equations. The accuracy of results depends primarily on the
relative amounts of the phases present and the efficiency specified.
The rigorous polytropic compressor uses real fluid properties
calculated from the property method you specify. It does not
assume ideal gas behavior.
MCompr handles single-phase isentropic compressors and
turbines. MCompr can also handle two- and three-phase mixtures.
You can use MCompr to rate a multi-stage compressor, by using
either:
• Stage-by-stage dimensional performance curves, such as head
versus flow or power versus flow
• Wheel-by-wheel dimensionless performance curves, such as
head coefficient versus flow coefficient
MCompr can also calculate shaft speed.
MCompr cannot handle performance curves for a turbine.

MCompr:
Setup Identify multi-stage compressor specifications, stage
specifications, cooler specifications, convergence
parameters, and valid phases
Performance Specify parameters and enter data for the
Curves performance curves
User Subroutine Specify performance curve user subroutine
parameters and name
tabular results
Results View summary of operating results, material and
energy balance results, compressor and cooler
profiles, and performance profiles
Flowsheet Heat Feed to
(any number) Stage
Connectivity for K+1 To
Work (any number)
MCompr (any number) Stage
K+1
From Cooler
Stage Compressor Heat
K-1 Stage K (optional)
Stage K
Work
(optional)
Knockout
Stage K
Water
(optional)
Material Streams
inlet At least one material stream for the first compressor stage
One or more material streams for stages after the first
(optional). These streams enter the intercooler before the
stages you specify.
outlet One material stream leaving the last compressor stage
Either one optional knockout material stream for each
intercooler for the liquid formed, or one optional global
knockout for the liquid formed in all intercoolers
Either one optional water decant stream for each
intercooler, or one optional global water decant stream

If you use liquid knockout outlet streams from one stage, you must
use them for all stages. The last stage cannot have a liquid
knockout material stream or a water decant stream.
Heat Streams
inlet Any number of heat streams to each intercooler (optional)

outlet Either one optional heat stream for the net heat load of each
intercooler, or one global heat outlet stream for the net heat
duty for all intercoolers
If you do not specify cooler conditions on the Setup Cooler sheet,
MCompr adds the heat streams together and uses the total as a duty
specification for the cooler.
The net heat load equals the heat in the inlet heat streams minus
the actual (calculated) heat duty.
If you use a heat outlet from one stage, you must use one for all
stages.
Work Streams
inlet Any number of work streams to each compressor stage

(optional)
outlet Either one optional work stream for net work load, or one
global work stream for the net power for all compressor
stages
MCompr adds all work inlet streams together to provide the power
requirement. If you do not specify power or pressure on the Setup
Specs sheet, MCompr uses the total power as a power specification
for the stage.
The power in the outlet work stream equals the power in the inlet
work streams minus the actual (calculated) power required.
If you use a work outlet from one stage, you must use one for all
stages.
Specifying MCompr If you specify MCompr calculates
Power required (for a compressor) or Discharge pressure
produced (for a turbine)
Curves of head, power, discharge Power required and discharge
pressure, pressure ratio, pressure pressure
change, or head coefficient
Discharge pressure and curves of head Power required, and shaft speed
or power or head coefficient
When you use performance curves, you can specify either a scalar
value for efficiency or efficiency curves.

curves in MCompr. See Aspen Plus User Models for more
information.
MCompr can have an intercooler between each compression (or
expansion) stage, and an aftercooler after the last stage. You can
perform one-, two-, or three-phase flash calculations in the
intercoolers. Each cooler can have a liquid knockout stream,
except the cooler after the last stage.
You can model a polytropic compressor using either the GPSA or
ASME method. You can model an isentropic compressor/turbine
using either the GPSA, ASME, or Mollier-based methods.
The GPSA method can be based on either:
• Suction conditions
• Average of suction and discharge conditions
The ASME method is more rigorous than the GPSA method for
polytropic or isentropic compressor calculations. The Mollier
method is the most rigorous for isentropic calculations.
Polytropic Efficiency η
The polytropic efficiency p is used in the equation for the
polytropic compression ratio:
n −1  k −1
=  ηp
n  k 
The basic compressor relation is:
 n −1

PinVin  Pout 
− 1
n
∆h =  
 n − 1   Pin  
ηp   
 n 
Where:
n = Polytropic coefficient
k = Heat capacity ratio Cp/Cv
ηp = Polytropic efficiency

P = Pressure
V = Molar volume
There are two equations for the isentropic efficiency η s .

Isentropic Efficiency
For compression:

s
hout − hin
ηs =
hout − hin
For expansion:
hout − hin
ηs = s
hout − hin
Where :
h = Molar enthalpy
s = Outlet molar enthalpy assuming isentropic
hout
compression or expansion to the specified outlet
pressure
Mechanical efficiency η m is used to calculate the brake

Mechanical Efficiency
horsepower:
IHP = F∆h
BHP = IHP / η m
Where:
F = Mole flow rate
ηm = Mechanical efficiency
Parasitic Pressure Loss The parasitic pressure loss at the suction of a stage is calculated
using the equation:
V2
∆P = Kρ
2
Where:
∆P = Parasitic pressure loss
K = Velocity head multiplier
ρ = Density
V = Linear velocity of process gas at suction conditions
Specific Speed The specific speed is defined as:
ShSpd (VflIn) 0.5
SpSpd =
(Head) 0.75

Where:
ShSpd = Shaft speed
VflIn = Suction volumetric flow rate
Head = Head developed
Specific Diameter The specific diameter is defined as:
ImpDiam (Head) 0.25
SpDiam =
(VflIn) 0.5
Where:
ImpDiam = Impeller diameter of compressor wheel
VflIn = Volumetric flow rate at suction conditions
Head Coefficient The head coefficient is defined as:
Head
Hc =
( π ShSpd ImpDiam)2
Where:
π = 3.1416
ShSpd = Shaft speed
Flow Coefficient The flow coefficient is defined as:
VflIn
Fc =
ShSpd (ImpDiam) 3
Where:
VflIn = Volumetric flow rate at suction conditions
ShSpd = Shaft speed
References GPSA Engineering Data Book, 1979, Chapter 4, pp. 5-6 to 5-10.
ASME Power Test Code 10, 1965, pp. 31-32.

Valve Reference
Valve models control valves and pressure changers. Valve relates
the pressure drop across a valve to the valve flow coefficient.
Valve assumes the flow is adiabatic, and determines the thermal
and phase condition of the stream at the valve outlet. Valve can
perform one-, two-, or three-phase calculations.
Valve:
Input Specify valve operating conditions, flash
convergence parameters, valid phases, valve
parameters, sizes for pipe fittings, calculation
options, and Valve convergence parameters
energy balances
Flowsheet
Connectivity for
Valve Material Material
Material Streams
inlet One material stream

Specifying Valve Use the Input Operation sheet to select the calculation type.
If you select the Pressure changer option or the Design option for
the calculation type, you must specify, on the same sheet, one of
the following:
• Outlet pressure
• Pressure drop
If you select the Pressure changer option, the specification is
complete and Valve performs an adiabatic flash to calculate the
thermal and phase condition of the outlet stream.

If you select the Rating option for the calculation type, you must
specify, on the same sheet, one of the following:
• Flow coefficient at operating valve position
• Valve operating position (% Opening)
If you specify the valve operating position, you must also specify
one of the following on the Input ValveParameters sheet:
• Characteristic equation type and flow coefficient at maximum
valve opening
• Data for flow coefficient (Cv) versus valve opening in the
Valve Parameters Table
• A valve from the built-in library based on valve type,
manufacturer, series/style, and size
On the Input CalculationOptions sheet, you can specify that Valve:
• Check for choked flow
• Calculate cavitation index
For vapor-containing streams, you must specify the pressure drop
ratio factor (Xt) for the valve. For liquid-containing streams, if you
specify that Valve check for choked flow, you must also specify
the pressure recovery factor (Fl) for the valve. You can specify the
pressure drop ratio factor and the pressure recovery factor for the
valve in one of the following ways on the Input ValveParameters
sheet:
Specify
• Value at the operating valve position (Pres Drop Ratio Factor,
Pres Recovery Factor)
• Data for pressure drop ratio factor (Xt) and for pressure
recovery factor (Fl) versus valve opening (% Opening) in the
Valve Parameters Table
• A valve from the built-in library based on Valve Type,
Manufacturer, Series/Style, and Size
If you want to include the effect of head loss from pipe fittings on
the valve flow capacity, you must specify the diameters of the
valve and pipe fittings on the Input PipeFittings sheet. Valve uses
the valve and pipe diameters, and estimates the piping geometry
factor to account for the reduction in flow capacity.
Pressure Drop Ratio
The pressure drop ratio factor ( X t ) accounts for the effect of the
Factor
internal geometry of the valve on the change in fluid density as it
passes through the valve.
The pressure drop ratio factor is the limiting value (under choked
conditions) of the pressure drop ratio and is given by:

1  dPch 
Xt =  
Fk  Pin 
(1)
Where:
dPch = Pressure drop for choked vapor flow
Fk = Ratio of specific heats factor
You can specify the pressure drop ratio factor on the Input
ValveParameters sheet in one of the following ways:
• Choose a Library Valve
• Enter data for Xt and % Opening in the Valve Parameters
Table
• Specify the value at the operating valve position in Valve
Factors
(C )
If you know the ratio of the gas sizing coefficient g to the liquid
sizing coefficient (Cv ) , as defined in Fisher Controls Company
Control Valve Handbook, you can calculate the pressure drop ratio
factor (with the assumption Fk = 1) by either:
 dPch  Cg
 
 Pin 
• Using valve manufacturer’s data for versus Cv in
equation (1)
• Using the expression
2
6.31 × 10 − 4  C g 
Xt =  
Fk  Cv 
This relationship is based on equating the choked flow calculated
(in US units of measure) with:
Universal Gas Sizing Equation Wch = 106
. C g rPin
ISA Standard Valve Sizing Equation Wch = N 6 Cv Y Fk X t rPin
Where:
Wch = Mass flow rate (choked flow)
r = Mass density of inlet stream
Y = Expansion factor (= 0.667 for choked flow)
N6 = Numerical constant (= 63.3 for US units of measure)

If you specify the pressure drop ratio factor by choosing a valve
from the built-in library or by entering data in the Valve
Parameters Table on the Input ValveParameters sheet, Valve uses
cubic splines to interpolate the value of the pressure drop ratio
factor at the operating valve position.
Valve uses the pressure drop ratio factor only when both of the
following are true:
• Vapor is present in the inlet stream
• The Design or Rating option is selected for Calculation Type
on the Input Operation sheet
The pressure recovery factor ( Fl ) accounts for the effect of the

Pressure Recovery
Factor
internal geometry of the valve on its liquid flow capacity under
choked conditions.
The pressure recovery factor is defined as:
1/ 2
 dPch 
Fl =  
 Pin − Pvc 
Where:
dPch = Pressure drop for choked liquid flow
Pvc = Pressure at the vena contracta in the valve
and
Pvc = F f Pv
with
Pv = Vapor pressure of inlet liquid stream
Ff = Liquid critical pressure ratio factor
You can specify the pressure recovery factor on the Input
ValveParameters sheet in one of the following ways:
• Choose a Library Valve
• Enter data for Fl and % Opening in the Valve Parameters Table
• Specify the value at the operating valve position in Valve
Factors
The pressure recovery factor is equivalent to the valve recovery
coefficient K m , as defined in Fisher Controls Company Control
Valve Handbook.

You can use the valve recovery coefficient to calculate the pressure
recovery factor as:
Fl = Km
If you specify the pressure recovery factor by choosing a valve
from the built-in library or by entering tabular data in the Valve
Parameters Table on the Input ValveParameters sheet, Valve uses
cubic splines to interpolate the value of the pressure recovery
factor at the operating valve position.
The pressure recovery factor is used in the Valve model
calculations only when all of the following are true:
• Liquid is present in the inlet stream
• The Check for Choked Flow box is checked or the Set Equal to
Choked Outlet Pressure option is selected on the Input
CalculationOptions sheet
• The Design or Rating option is selected for Calculation Type
on the Input Operation sheet.
Valve Flow Coefficient
The valve flow coefficient (Cv ) measures the flow capacity of the
valve. The flow coefficient is defined as the number of US gallons
per minute of water (at 60°F) that will pass through the valve with
a pressure drop of 1 psi.
The valve flow coefficient relates the pressure drop across the
valve to the flow rate as (Instrument Society of America, 1985):
Liquid W = N 6 Fp Cv r ( Pin − Pout )
Gas/Vapor W = N 6 Fp Y r ( Pin − Pout )
with Pin − Pout
Y = 1−
3 Fk X t Pin
Where:
W = Mass flow rate
N6 = Numerical constant (based on the units of measure)
Fp = Piping geometry factor
Cv = Valve flow coefficient
Y = Expansion factor
Pout = Outlet pressure
r = Mass density of inlet stream

Xt = Pressure drop ratio factor
You can specify the flow coefficient in one of the following ways:
• Use Flow Coef on the Input Operation sheet to specify the
value at the operating valve position
• Choose a Library Valve on the Input ValveParameters sheet
• Enter data for Cv and % Opening in the Valve Parameters
Table on the Input ValveParameters sheet
• Specify Valve Characteristics in the Input ValveParameters
sheet
If you specify the flow coefficient by choosing a valve from the
built-in library or by entering data in the Valve Parameters Table,
Valve uses cubic splines to interpolate the value of the flow
coefficient at the operating valve position.
Characteristic Equation The characteristic equation for the valve relates the flow
Type coefficient to the valve opening. Use the Input ValveParameters
sheet to specify the characteristic equation type. The six built-in
characteristic equations are:
Type Equation
Linear V=P
Parabolic
V = 0.01P 2
Square Root
V = 10.0 P
Quick Opening 10.0 P
V =
(10. + 9.9 × 10 −3 P 2 )
Equal Percentage
0.01P 2
V =
. × 10 −8 P 4
2.0 − 10
Hyperbolic 01
. P
V =
(10. − 9.9 × 10 −5 P 2 )
Where:
P = Valve opening as a percentage of maximum opening
V = Flow coefficient as a percentage of flow coefficient at
maximum opening
Piping Geometry Factor The piping geometry factor is defined as:
Cυp
Fp =
Cυ

Where:
Cυp = Flow coefficient of the valve with attached fittings
Cυ = Flow coefficient of the valve installed in a straight
pipe of the same size
The piping geometry factor accounts for the reduction in the flow
capacity of a valve due to the head loss from the pipe fittings. The
piping geometry factor has a default value of 1.0 if the valve and
pipe fittings have the same diameter.
Aspen Plus calculates the piping geometry factor as (Instrument
Society of America, 1985):
−0.5
 ΣKC 2 
 υ 
Fp =  4 + 1
 N 2d 
 
with ΣK = K1 + K2 + K B1 − K B2
Where:
2 2 4
 d2   d2   d 
K1 = 0.5 1 − 2  . 1 − 2 
K 2 = 10 K B1 = 1−  
 D1   D2   D1 
, , ,
4
 d 
K B2 = 1 −  
 D2 
and:
Fp = Piping geometry factor
Cυ = Valve flow coefficient
N2 = Numerical constant (based on the units of
measure)
d = Valve diameter
K1, K 2 = Resistance coefficients of the inlet and outlet
fittings
K B1 , K B2 = Bernoulli coefficients for the inlet and outlet
fittings
D1 = Inlet pipe diameter
D2 = Outlet pipe diameter
If the valve and pipe fittings diameters are different and you wish
to include the effect of the additional head loss on the valve flow

capacity, you must specify the valve and pipe diameters on the
Input PipeFittings sheet.
Choked Flow Aspen Plus calculates the limiting pressure drop for choked flow
conditions using (Instrument Society of America, 1985):
Liquid
(
dPlc = F L Pin − F f Pυ
2
)
Vapor dPυc = Fk X T Pin
with  Pv 
0.5
F f = 0.96 − 0.28 
 Pc 
Where:
FL = Pressure recovery factor
Ff = Liquid critical pressure ratio factor
XT = Pressure drop ratio factor
Pυ = Vapor pressure at inlet
Pc = Critical pressure at inlet
dPlc = Limiting pressure drop, liquid phase
dPvc = Limiting pressure drop, vapor phase
For multi-phase streams, Valve takes the limiting pressure drop for
choked flow to be the smaller of dPlc and dPvc . Flow in the valve is
choked when the pressure drop exceeds this limiting pressure drop.
Valve displays the choking status of the valve if you check the
Check for Choking box on the Input CalculationOptions sheet.
Cavitation Index The likelihood of cavitation in a valve is measured by the
cavitation index. Aspen Plus calculates the cavitation index as
(Instrument Society of America, 1985):
 P − Pout 
K c =  in 
 Pin − Pv 
Where:
Kc = Cavitation index
Pout = Outlet pressure

Pv = Vapor pressure at inlet
The cavitation index definition is valid only for all-liquid streams.
Valve calculates the cavitation index if you check the Calculate
Cavitation Index box on the Input CalculationOptions sheet.
Reference Flow Equations for Sizing Control Valves, ISA-S75.01-1985,
Instrument Society of America, 1985.

Pipe Reference
Pipe calculates the pressure drop and heat transfer in a single
segment pipe. You can also use Pipe to model the pressure drop
due to fittings.
Pipe handles a single inlet and outlet material stream. Pipe assumes
the flow is one-dimensional, steady-state, and fully developed (that
is, no entrance effects are modeled). Pipe can perform one-, two-,
or three-phase calculations. Flow direction and elevation angle are
arbitrary.
To model multiple pipe segments of different diameters or
elevations, use Pipeline instead of Pipe.
If the inlet pressure is known, Pipe calculates the outlet pressure. If
the outlet pressure is known, Pipe calculates the inlet pressure and
updates the state variables of the inlet stream.
Use Pipe to:
• Calculate inlet or discharge conditions
• Calculate pressure drops for one-, two-, or three-phase vapor
and liquid flows
Pipe:
Setup Specify pipe parameters, thermal specifications,
fittings, flash convergence parameters and
property profiles to be reported
Advanced Specify calculation options, solution methods,
property grid, integration parameters and Beggs
and Brill coefficients
UserSubroutine Specify pressure drop and/or holdup and/or
diameter calculation user subroutine name and
parameters
Results View summary of Pipe results, inlet and outlet
stream results, material and energy balance
results, and profiles

Material
Flowsheet
Connectivity for Pipe
Material
Material Streams

Specifying Pipe You must specify the following for Pipe:
• Pipe length, diameter, roughness, and angle on the Setup
PipeParameters sheet
• Thermal specification type on the Setup ThermalSpecification
sheet to determine whether Pipe operates with a temperature
profile or temperature is calculated
• Whether to integrate, assume constant dP/dL, or use a closed
form equation on the Advanced Methods sheet
• Frictional and holdup correlation when a closed form equation
is not used on the Advanced Methods sheet
• Pressure and temperature grid for fluid property calculations on
the Advanced PropertyGrid sheet, if you request a pressure-
temperature grid on the AdvancedCalculation Options sheet
• Integration direction in which calculations proceed with respect
to flow on the Advanced CalculationOptions sheet
If the option selected Pipe needs the And the integration
is direction is
Calculate pipe outlet Inlet pressure Downstream
pressure(default)
Calculate pipe inlet Outlet pressure Upstream
pressure
Pipe uses the inlet or outlet stream pressure to start the
calculations. If the stream is an external feed to your flowsheet, or
the outlet of a block that will execute after Pipe, use the Stream
Specifications sheet to specify the stream pressure. If the
integration direction is upstream, you can also specify the initial
pressure for Pipe on the Advanced CalculationOptions sheet, by
entering the outlet pressure. This pressure value will override the
stream pressure entered on the Stream Specifications sheet.

Select the flow calculation option on the Advanced
CalculationOptions sheet to specify whether Pipe is to calculate the
outlet or inlet stream flow and composition.
If the option selected is Pipe needs the
Reference inlet stream (default) Inlet flow and composition
Use outlet stream flow Outlet flow and composition
Stream Specification You must initialize the inlet stream to Pipe whenever the option to
reference inlet stream is selected, even if the inlet pressure is being
calculated. Similarly, you must initialize the outlet stream
whenever the option to use the outlet stream flow is selected. The
initialized stream must be one of the following:
• Entered on a Stream Specifications sheet
• An outlet stream from part of the flowsheet executed (if option
to use outlet stream flow is selected)
• Transferred from another part of a flowsheet using a Transfer
block
Physical Property You can specify that a rigorous flash is to be performed each time
Calculations properties are calculated, by selecting the option to do Flash at
Each Integration Step on the Advanced CalculationOptions sheet.
If you select the option to Interpolate from Property Grid, Pipe will
determine properties by interpolating in a table of property values
at various temperatures and pressures. Specify one of the following
if you use the Property Grid:
• A range of temperatures and pressures on the Advanced
Property Grid sheet. Pipe will calculate properties at these
conditions and interpolate
• The block ID of a Pipe block for which the option to
interpolate from property grid was also selected, and which
will be executed before the current block in the flowsheet
Pressure Drop Pipe can calculate pressure drop for either one-, two-, or three-
Calculations phase vapor and liquid flows. If vapor-liquid flow exists, Pipe also
calculates liquid holdup and flow regime (pattern). You may
specify a flowing fluid temperature profile, or Pipe can determine
it from heat transfer calculations. Pipe treats multiple liquid phases
(for example, oil and water) as a single homogeneous liquid phase
for pressure-drop and holdup calculations. Pipe automatically
detects the special case of a single component fluid (for example,
steam) and treats it appropriately.
Downstream and For downstream and upstream integration, the combination of
Upstream Integration options selected for pressure and flow calculation on the Advanced
CalculationOptions sheet determine which stream Pipe will update.
The following table describes the available combinations. The next

figure, Downstream and Upstream Integration, defines the inlet
and outlet stream and pressure variables:
If the pressure And the flow Then Pipe updates the
calculation option is calculation option is
Calculate pipe outlet Calculate outlet Outlet stream only
pressure stream flow
Calculate pipe outlet Calculate inlet stream Outlet stream
pressure flow thermodynamic conditions
Inlet stream composition
and flow
Calculate pipe inlet Calculate inlet stream Inlet stream only
pressure flow
Calculate pipe inlet Calculate outlet Inlet stream thermodynamic
pressure stream flow conditions
Outlet stream composition
and flow
Inlet Stream Outlet Stream
Inlet Pressure Outlet Pressure

Downstream and Upstream Integration
Design-Spec Use caution when using Pipe inside a Design-Spec convergence

Convergence Loop loop. For example, you can manipulate the flow rate to a pipe to
achieve a desired pipe outlet pressure. During the design
specification convergence, the flow rate variables may become
unreasonable in an intermediate iteration, causing Pipe to predict a
negative pressure. Convergence difficulties occur as a result. You
can avoid this situation by doing one of the following:
• Keep the upper limit of the flow rate sufficiently low in
Design-Spec
• Perform an upstream integration from the known outlet
pressure. Select option to calculate pipe inlet pressure on the
Advanced CalculationOptions sheet for this purpose. Define a
Design-Spec to manipulate the flow rate to achieve the
specified inlet pressure.
Erosional Velocity Erosional velocity is the velocity of the fluid in the pipe, above
which the pipe material will start to break off. The fluid is
traveling so fast that it starts to strip material from the walls of the
pipe. In general use, the flow rate should be below this value.
You can specify the erosional velocity coefficient on the Setup
Pipe Parameters sheet.

The erosional velocity is related to the erosional velocity
coefficient by the following equation:
c
υc =
ρ
Where:
υc = Erosional velocity in ft/second
c = Erosional velocity coefficient
(default=100)
ρ = Density in lbs/cubic ft
Methane Gas Systems Gas systems consisting mostly of methane occur frequently in the
dense-phase region of wellbores and flowlines. In the dense-phase
region, definable vapor and liquid phases do not exist. Equation-
of-state methods classify the dense-phase material as either all
vapor or all liquid. Significant differences in the predicted fluid
transport properties may occur, depending on whether you choose
the vapor or liquid state.
Experience has shown that gas system flow in the dense-phase
region is best modeled by using vapor-phase properties. For
systems consisting of mostly methane, where the pipe conditions
lie above the cricondenbar of the phase envelope, specify vapor-
only valid phase on the Setup FlashOptions sheet.
Modeling Valves and Pipe assumes that the pressure drop due to valves and fittings is
Fittings distributed evenly along the specified length of the pipe. The total
length Pipe uses in calculations corresponds to the specified pipe
length, plus any equivalent pipe length due to valves, fittings, and
miscellaneous L/D.
If the pipe is not horizontal, Pipe adjusts the angle from the
horizontal to achieve the same vertical rise or fall for the total
length used in the calculations. This adjustment ensures the correct
pressure drop due to elevation.
If the order and position of the valves and fittings are important,
you need to model each valve and fitting separately with a Pipe
model, specifying zero length of pipe.
Two-Phase See Pipeline reference for information on Two-Phase Friction-
Correlations Factor and Liquid-Holdup Correlations and Closed Form Methods.

Pipeline Reference
Use Pipeline to calculate the pressure drop in a straight pipe or
annular space. Pipeline can:
• Simulate a piping network with successive blocks, including
wellbores and flowlines
• Contain any number of segments within each block to describe
pipe geometry
• Calculate inlet or discharge conditions
• Calculate pressure drops for one-, two-, or three-phase vapor
and liquid flows. Pipeline treats multiple liquid phases (for
example, oil and water) as a single homogeneous liquid phase
for pressure-drop and holdup calculations. If vapor-liquid flow
exists, Pipeline calculates liquid holdup and flow regime
(pattern).
You may specify a flowing fluid temperature profile, or Pipeline
can calculate it from heat transfer calculations. Flow is assumed to
be one-dimensional, steady-state, and fully developed (no entrance
effects are modeled). Flow direction and elevation angle are
arbitrary. To model a single pipe segment with constant diameter
and elevation, you can also use Pipe.
Pipeline:
Setup Specify pipeline configuration, segment connectivity
and characteristics, calculation methods, property
grid parameters, flash convergence parameters, valid
phases, and block-specific diagnostic message level
Convergence Override default values for integration parameters,
downhill flow options, correlation parameters and
Beggs and Brill coefficients (optional input)
UserSubroutines Specify name and parameters for pressure drop and
liquid holdup user subroutines
Results View summary of Pipeline results, inlet and outlet
stream results, profiles, and material and energy
balance results

For Pipeline you must specify:
• Integration direction in which calculations proceed with respect
to flow
• Thermal calculation option to specify whether pipeline node
temperatures are calculated or specified
• Specifications for at least one pipeline segment
• Pressure and Temperature grid for the fluid property
calculations, if you request a pressure-temperature grid
When using a Pipeline block inside a Design-Spec convergence
loop (for example, obtaining an outlet pressure by varying the inlet
flow rate) it is possible that the flow rate variable could cause
Pipeline to predict negative pressures or fail to converge, which
will result in convergence problems. Avoid this by keeping the
upper limit of the flow rate low in the Design-Spec block, or by
performing an upstream integration from the known outlet pressure
(Select Calculate Inlet Pressure for Calculation Direction on the
Setup Configuration sheet for this purpose. Your Design-Spec will
then need to manipulate the flow rate to achieve the specified inlet
pressure).
Pipeline handles a single inlet and outlet material stream. If the
inlet pressure is known, Pipeline calculates the outlet pressure. If
the outlet pressure is known, Pipeline calculates the inlet pressure
and updates the state variables of the inlet stream.
Flowsheet Material
Connectivity for
Pipeline
Material
Pipeline Streams
Material Streams


Specifying Pipeline Use the Calculation Direction option on the Setup Configuration
sheet to specify whether Pipeline is to calculate the outlet or inlet
pressure.
If Calculation Direction = Pipeline will need And the integration
the direction is
Calculate outlet pressure Inlet pressure Downstream
(default)
Calculate inlet pressure Outlet pressure Upstream
Pipeline uses the inlet or outlet stream pressure to start the
calculations. If the stream is an external feed to your flowsheet, or
the outlet of a block that will execute after Pipeline, use the
Streams Specifications sheet to specify the stream pressure. You
can also specify the initial pressure for Pipeline on the Setup
Configuration sheet by entering the pressure value at the inlet or
outlet. This pressure value overrides the stream pressure.
Use the Pipeline flow basis option on the Setup Configuration
sheet to specify whether Pipeline is to calculate the outlet or inlet
stream flow and composition.
If Pipeline flow basis= Pipeline will need the
Use inlet stream flow (default) Inlet flow and composition
Reference outlet stream flow Outlet flow and composition
Use Thermal Options on the Setup Configuration sheet to specify
whether or not the node temperatures are to be calculated by
Pipeline using an energy balance. When you select the Specify
Temperature Profile option, the temperature at each node can be
specified. When you choose the Constant Temperature option, the
temperature will be same at every node. You can define this
temperature by specifying the inlet temperature (for downstream
integrations) or the outlet temperature (for upstream integrations).
If neither the inlet nor the outlet temperatures are specified, the
temperature of the referenced stream will be used. When you
choose the linear temperature profile option, you can specify the
temperature at one or more nodes. Pipeline will do a linear
interpolation between the temperatures specified to calculate the
fluid temperature in each segment.

Stream Specification You must initialize the inlet stream to Pipeline whenever the Use
Inlet Flow option is selected for Pipeline Flow Basis, even if the
inlet pressure is being calculated. Similarly, you must initialize the
outlet stream whenever you select the Reference Outlet Stream
Flow option. The initialized stream must be one of the following:
• On a stream form
• An outlet stream from part of the flowsheet executed
previously
• Transferred from another part of a flowsheet using a Transfer
block
Nodes and Segments Create at least one segment using the New button on the Pipeline
Setup Connectivity sheet.
Enter specifications for each segment on the Setup Connectivity
Segment Data dialog box . For each segment, enter the inlet and
outlet node names (maximum 4 characters). The required data
depends on the options selected on the Setup Configuration sheet.
If you select Do Energy Balance with Surroundings, you must
specify a heat transfer coefficient (U-Value) and the ambient
temperature. If you select the Linear Temperature Profile option,
Pipeline uses the temperatures specified for the nodes to override
the stream values. If specifications are not made for the nodes, then
Pipeline uses the stream values.
If you select Enter Node Coordinate, you must enter node
coordinates (X, Y, and Elevation) for each segment node. You
must enter Length and Angle for each segment if you select Enter
Segment Length and Angle.
Physical Property You can specify a rigorous flash each time properties are
Calculations calculated by selecting Do Flash at Each Step on the Setup
Configuration sheet. If Interpolate from Property Grid is selected,
Pipeline will determine properties by interpolating in a table of
property values at various temperatures and pressures. Specify one
of the following if you use the Property Grid:
• A range of temperatures and pressures grid on the Setup
PropertyGrid sheet. Pipeline calculates properties under these
conditions and interpolates them.
• The block ID of a Pipeline block for which you selected
Interpolate from the Property Grid, and which will be executed
before the current block in the flowsheet.
Pressure Drop Pipeline can calculate pressure drop for either one-, two-, or three-
Calculations phase vapor and liquid flows. If vapor-liquid flow exists, Pipeline
also calculates liquid holdup and flow regime (pattern). You may
specify a flowing fluid temperature profile, or Pipeline can
calculate it from heat transfer calculations. Pipeline treats multiple

liquid phases (for example, oil and water) as a single homogeneous
liquid phase for pressure-drop and holdup calculations. Pipeline
automatically detects the special case of a single component fluid
(for example, steam) and treats it appropriately.
Downstream and For downstream and upstream integration, the combination of the
Upstream Integration selections made for Calculation Direction and Pipeline Flow Basis
on the Setup Configuration sheet determine which stream Pipeline
will update. The following table describes the available
combinations. The next figure, Downstream and Upstream
Integration, defines the inlet and outlet stream and pressure
variables.
If you specify And Pipeline Flow Then Pipeline updates the
Calculation Direction= Basis=
Calculate Outlet Reference inlet Outlet stream only
Pressure stream flow
Calculate Outlet Use outlet stream Outlet stream
Pressure flow thermodynamic conditions
Inlet stream composition
and flow
Calculate Inlet Pressure Reference outlet Inlet stream only
stream flow
Calculate Inlet Pressure Use inlet stream Inlet stream thermodynamic
flow conditions
Outlet stream composition
and flow
Inlet Stream Outlet Stream
Inlet Pressure Outlet Pressure

Downstream and Upstream Integration
Design Spec Use caution when using Pipeline inside a Design-Spec
Convergence Loop convergence loop. For example, suppose you achieve a desired
pipeline outlet pressure by varying the flow rate to the pipeline. In
this case, the flow rate variable might cause Pipeline to predict
negative pressures, resulting in convergence problems. You can
avoid this situation by doing one of the following:
• Keep the upper limit of the flow rate sufficiently low in the
Design-Spec
• Perform an upstream integration from the known outlet
pressure. Use Calculate Inlet Pressure on the Setup
Configuration sheet for this purpose. Your Design-Spec will
then need to manipulate the flow rate to achieve the specified
inlet pressure.

Erosional Velocity Erosional velocity is the velocity of the fluid in the pipe over
which the pipe material will start to break off. The fluid is
traveling so fast that it starts to strip material from the walls of the
pipe. In general usage, the flow rate should be below this value.
You can specify the erosional velocity coefficient in the C-Erosion
field on the Segment Data dialog box on the Setup Connectivity
sheet.
The erosional velocity is related to the erosional velocity
coefficient by the following equation:
c
υc =
ρ
Where:
υc = Erosional velocity in ft/sec
c = Erosional velocity coefficient (default=100)
ρ = Density in lb/cubic ft
Methane Gas Systems Gas systems consisting mostly of methane occur frequently in the
dense-phase region of wellbores and flowlines. In the dense-phase
region, definable vapor and liquid phases do not exist. Equation-
of-state methods classify the dense-phase material as either all
vapor or all liquid. Significant differences in the predicted fluid
transport properties may occur, depending on whether you choose
the vapor or liquid state.
Experience has shown that gas system flow in the dense-phase
region is best modeled by using vapor-phase properties. For
systems consisting of mostly methane, where the pipeline
conditions lie above the cricondenbar of the phase envelope,
specify Valid Phases = Vapor only on the Setup FlashOptions
sheet.

The following tables list the two-phase frictional pressure drop and
Two-Phase
holdup correlations available.
Correlations
Two-Phase Friction Factor Correlations
Pipe orientation Inclination Friction factor correlations
Horizontal -2 deg to +2 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Dukler (DUKLER)
Lockhart-Martinelli (LOCK-MART)
Darcy (DARCY)
User subroutine (USER-SUBR) †
Vertical +45 deg to +90 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Orkiszewski (ORKI)
Angel-Welchon-Ros (AWR)
Hagedorn-Brown (H-BROWN)
Darcy (DARCY)
User subroutine (USER-SUBR)
Downhill -2 deg to -90 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Slack (SLACK)
Darcy (DARCY)
Inclined +2 deg to +45 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Dukler (DUKLER)
Orkiszewski (ORKI)
Darcy (DARCY)
Two-Phase Liquid Holdup Correlations
Pipe orientation Inclination Liquid holdup correlations
Horizontal -2 deg to +2 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Eaton (EATON)
Lockhart-Martinelli (LOCK-MART)
Hoogendorn (HOOG)
Hughmark (HUGH)
User subroutine (USER-SUBR) †
Vertical +45 deg to +90 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Orkiszewski (ORKI)
Downhill -2 deg to -90 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Slack (SLACK)

Pipe orientation Inclination Liquid holdup correlations
Inclined +2 deg to +45 deg Beggs and Brill (BEGGS-BRILL)
Flanigan (FLANIGAN)
Orkiszewski (ORKI)
† See Aspen Plus User Models.
Note: Some of the related information for the two-phase friction

factor and liquid holdup correlations was taken from "Two-Phase
Flow in Pipes" by James P. Brill and H. Dale Beggs, Sixth Edition,
Third Printing, January, 1991.
Beggs and Brill Slip and flow regimes are considered with this method. Friction
Correlation factor and holdup correlations depend upon flow regime and pipe
inclination. It is suitable for all inclinations, including vertical flow
downward.
Dukler Correlation The Hughmark holdup method should be used with this pressure
drop method. The Dukler method was developed from field data
using air-water mixtures in 1-inch pipes. It tends to over-predict
frictional pressure drop. It is recommended in a design manual
published jointly by the AGA and API.
Hagedorn-Brown The Hagedorn-Brown correlation considers slip between phases,
Correlation but flow regime is not considered. It uses the same correlations for
liquid holdup and friction factor for all flow regimes. It is an old
method that works well for conventional oil wells. It is suitable for
vertical upward flow, but not downward. It is generally
recommended for gas wells, and is based on data obtained from
U.S. Gulf Coast oil wells with 2-3/8 inch and 2-7/8 inch tubing.
Lockhart-Martinelli The Lockhart-Martinelli correlation is one of the oldest pressure
Correlation drop correlations. It does not consider pressure drop due to
acceleration. The method treats the vapor and liquid phases
separately and uses a correction factor to find the 2-phase pressure
gradient. Our implementation assumes turbulent gas and liquid
phase flow.
Orkiszewski Correlation The Orkiszewski correlation considers slip and flow regimes. The
friction factor and holdup correlation depend on the flow regime. It
is suitable for vertical flow upward, but not downward. It is
generally reliable for oil wells. It may exhibit problems for oil
wells with high water cuts or high total gas to liquid ratios. It can
significantly underpredict pressure drop for higher rate and higher
pressure wells (Beggs and Brill/1984).

Angel-Welchon-Ros This Angel-Welchon-Ros method was developed for low gas-to-
Correlation liquid ratio water wells. It assumes no slip between the vapor and
liquid phases when calculating liquid holdup.
Slack Correlation This method assumes a stratified flow regime, and should be used
only for downhill flow.
Eaton Correlation The Eaton correlation holdup method was developed from data on
2- and 4-inch pipes with a gas-water-crude mixture, and a 17-inch
pipe with a gas-oil mixture. It is often used with the Dukler
frictional pressure drop correlation.
Flanigan Correlation The Flanigan correlation holdup method was developed from data
taken in a 16-inch pipe. It calculates liquid holdup as a function of
superficial gas velocity. It is suitable for inclined flow.
Beggs and Brill The following table lists the Beggs and Brill liquid holdup
Correlation Parameters correlation parameters.
Flow Regime Name Description
Segregated BB1 Leading coefficient, A (default = 0.98)
BB2 Liquid volume fraction exponent, alpha (default = 0.4846)
BB3 Froude no. exp., beta (default = 0.0868)
Intermittent BB4 Leading coefficient, A (default = 0.845)
Distributed BB7 Leading coefficient, A (default = 1.065)
In addition, you can change the Beggs and Brill two-phase Friction
Factor modifier, BB10 (default = 1.0).
Closed-Form The following are closed-form methods:
Methods • Smith
• Weymouth
• AGA
• Oliphant
• Panhandle A
• Panhandle B
• Hazen-Williams
Smith The Smith method may be used for vertical dry gas flow. It should
be considered for gas wells with condensate-gas ratios less than 50
bbls/mcf, water-gas ratios less than 3.5 bbls/mcf, and flow rates
above the Turner predicted critical rate. Smith does not model gas
well loadup, and will significantly underpredict wellbore pressure
drop if loadup is actually occurring. Smith results must be cross-
checked against the Turner predicted critical rates to verify that the

well is unloaded. Smith also does not model condensation of water
vapor in the wellbore.
Weymouth The Weymouth horizontal gas flow equation was first published in
1912. It is based on data taken on pipes with diameters from 0.8
inches to 11.8 inches. As a result, it is most accurate for smaller
pipes having a diameter less than 12 inches.
AGA The AGA method may be used for horizontal gas applications.
Oliphant The Oliphant method may be used for horizontal gas applications
with pressures between vacuum and 100 PSI.
Panhandle A The Panhandle A method was developed by Panhandle Eastern for
horizontal gas flow in large diameter cross country gas
transmission lines. As a result, it is best used on lines having
diameters larger than 12 inches. However, it does not account for
gas compressibility (Z-factor), and assumes completely turbulent
flow.
Panhandle B The Panhandle B method is a revised version of the Panhandle A
method for horizontal gas flow and was developed by Panhandle
Eastern. It is also called the "Panhandle Eastern Revised Equation".
It accounts for the gas compressibility factor, and has revised
exponents. This equation is not quite so Reynolds-Number
dependent as the Panhandle A equation, although it, too, is best for
pipe diameters of 12 inches or more.
Hazen-Williams The Hazen-Williams method was developed for the horizontal
flow of water. When this method is used, the Hazen-Williams
Coefficient must be specified in place of the Segment Efficiency
on the Connectivity Edit Dialog Box.
References Beggs, H.D., and Brill, J.P., "A Study of Two-Phase Flow in
Inclined Pipes," Journal of Petroleum Technology, May 1973, pp.
607-617.
Dukler, A.E., Wicks, M., and Cleveland, R.G, "Frictional Pressure
Drop in Two-Phase Flow: An Approach Through Similarity
Analysis," AIChE Journal, Vol. 10, No. 1, January 1964, pp. 44-
51.
Lockhart, R.W. and Martinelli, R.C. "Proposed Correlation of Data
for Isothermal Two-Phase, Two-Component Flow in Pipes,"
Chemical Engineering Progress, Vol. 45, 1949, pp. 39-48.
Orkiszewski, J., "Predicting Two-Phase Pressure Drops in Vertical
Pipe," Journal of Petroleum Technology, June 1967, pp. 829-838.
Beggs, H.D., and Brill, J.P., "Two-Phase Flow in Pipes,"
University of Tulsa Short Course Notes, Third Printing, February
1984.

Angel, R.R., and Welchon, J.K., "Low-Ratio Gas-Lift Correlation
for Casing-Tubing Annuli and Large Diameter Tubing," API
Drilling and Production Practice, 1964, pp. 100-114.
Ros, N.C.J., "Simultaneous Flow of Gas and Liquid as
Encountered in Well Tubing," Journal of Petroleum Technology,
October 1961, pp. 1037-1049.
Eaton, B.A. et al., "The Prediction of Flow Patterns, Liquid
Holdup, and Pressure Losses Occurring During Continuous Two-
Phase Flow in Horizontal Pipelines," "Trans. AIME, June 1967,
pp. 815-828.
Flanigan, Orin, "Effect of Uphill Flow on Pressure Drop in Design
of Two-Phase Gathering Systems," Oil and Gas Journal, March 10,
1958, pp. 132-141.
Smith, R.V., "Determining Friction Factors for Measuring
Productivity of Gas Wells," AIME Petroleum Transactions,
Volume 189, 1950, pp. 73-82.
Weymouth, T.R., Transactions of the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, Vol. 34, 1912.
"Steady Flow in Gas Pipes," American Gas Association, IGT
Technical Report 10, Chicago, 1965.
Oliphant, F.N., "Production of Natural Gas," Report of USGS,
1902.
Engineering Data Book, Volume II, Gas Processors Suppliers
Association, Tulsa, Oklahoma, Revised Tenth Edition, 1994.

CHAPTER 7
Manipulators
This chapter describes the models for stream manipulators. The

models are:
Mult Stream multiplier Multiplies component Scaling streams by a factor
and total flow rates by a
factor
Dupl Stream duplicator Copies inlet stream into Duplicating feed or internal streams
any number of duplicate
outlet streams
ClChng Stream class Changes stream class Adding or deleting empty solid substreams
changer between blocks and between flowsheet sections
flowsheet sections
Analyzer EO stream property Calculates values of Calculating stream properties in equation-
calculator material stream oriented (EO) simulations and
component fractions and optimizations.
stream properties.
Feedbl Feed stream Holds data for feed Feedbl is provided for compatibility with
streams. RT-OPT version 10 simulations. Do not use
it in new simulations. Aspen Plus creates
new feed blocks automatically as needed.
Selector Stream selector Copies one selected input Selecting one stream from any number of
stream to the outlet inlet streams.
stream.
Qtvec Load stream Creates and modifies Combining multiple heat streams into a
manipulator load streams. single load stream or adding an additional
temperature and duty point to an existing
load stream.
Measurement Plant measurement Incorporates measured Defining plant measurements for data
plant data into a reconciliation purposes.
simulation.
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Manipulators • 7-1

Mult Reference
Mult multiplies the component flow rates and the total flow rate of
a material stream by a factor you supply on the Mult Input
Specifications sheet. For heat or work streams, Mult multiplies the
heat or work flow. Select the Heat (Q) and Work (W) Mult icons
from the Model Library for heat and work streams respectively.
Mult is useful when other conditions during the simulation
determine the flow rate of the stream. Mult does not maintain heat
or material balances. For material streams, the outlet stream has the
same composition and intensive properties as the inlet stream.
Use the Mult form to specify the stream multiplication factor and
diagnostics message levels.
Flowsheet Material Material
Connectivity for Mult
or or
Heat Heat
or or
Work Work
Material Streams

Heat Streams
inlet One heat stream

Work Streams
inlet One work stream

The outlet stream must be the same type (material, heat, or work)
as the inlet stream.
Specifying Mult The stream multiplication factor, specified on the Input
Specifications sheet, is the only input required for Mult. This factor
has to be positive for material streams. You can specify either a
positive or negative factor for heat or work streams, thus allowing
a change in direction for the heat or work flow.
Use the Input Diagnostics sheet to override global values for the
stream and simulation message levels specified on the Setup
Specifications Diagnostics sheet.
7-2 • Manipulators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

This model has no dynamic features. For material stream
multipliers the pressure of each outlet stream is equal to the
pressure of the inlet stream. The flow rate of each outlet stream is
equal to the flow rate of the inlet stream multiplied by the factor as
specified in the steady-state simulation.
EO Usage Notes for All features of Mult are available in the EO formulation, except the
Mult features which are globally unsupported.

Dupl Reference
Dupl copies an inlet stream (material, heat, or work) to any number
of duplicate outlet streams. It is useful for simultaneously
processing a stream in different types of units. Select the Heat (Q)
and Work (W) Dupl icons from the Model Library for heat and
work streams respectively. Dupl does not maintain heat or material
balances.
Use the Dupl form to specify diagnostics message levels.
Flowsheet
Connectivity for Dupl
Material Material
(any number)
Flowsheet for Duplicating Material Streams

Material Streams

outlet At least one material stream, which is a copy of the inlet
stream
Heat Heat
(any number)
Flowsheet for Duplicating Heat Streams

Heat Streams
inlet One heat stream

outlet At least one heat stream, which is a copy of the inlet stream
Work Work
(any number)
Flowsheet for Duplicating Work Streams

Work Streams
inlet One work stream

outlet At least one work stream, which is a copy of the inlet
stream
Specifying Dupl Dupl requires no input parameters. Use the Input Diagnostics sheet
to override global values for the stream and simulation message
levels specified on the Setup Specifications Diagnostics sheet.
This model has no dynamic features. For material stream
duplicators the pressure of each outlet stream is equal to the
pressure of the inlet stream. The flow rate of each outlet stream is
equal to the flow rate of the inlet stream.
EO Usage Notes for All features of Dupl are available in the EO formulation, except the
Dupl features which are globally unsupported.

ClChng Reference
ClChng changes the stream class between blocks and flowsheet
sections. You can use ClChng to add or delete empty solid
substreams between flowsheet sections. ClChng does not represent
a real unit operation.
Use the ClChng Input Form to specify diagnostics message levels.
Flowsheet
Connectivity for
ClChng
Feed Product
Material Streams

outlet One material product stream
Specifying ClChng ClChng does not require input. It copies substreams from the inlet
stream to the corresponding substreams of the outlet stream.
If a substream is Then ClChng
In the outlet but not in the Initializes the substream to zero flow
inlet
In the inlet but not in the Drops the substream
outlet
ClChng does not maintain mass and energy balances if any
dropped substream contains material flow or heat/work
information.

Analyzer Reference
The Analyzer block is a mole flow based model that allows you to
calculate values of material stream component fractions and stream
properties for use in the equation-oriented (EO) simulation and
optimization phases of a flowsheet. You can specify one inlet and
one outlet material stream, or specify a stream to analyze on the
Input form.
Analyzer performs selected analyses on a connected or referenced
stream.You refer an existing stream in the flowsheet or specify the
connectivity by identifying an inlet and an outlet stream.
This model calculates requested stream properties at specified
conditions. The default conditions are the same as the inlet or
referenced stream conditions. You can also specify a temperature
or vapor fraction, in addition to a pressure. In cases where inlet and
outlet streams are given, the outlet stream is a copy of the inlet
stream.
When using sequential-modular (SM) strategy to solve the
problem, Analyzer has no effect on the stream.
Analyzer:
Input Specify the Analyzer conditions and referenced
stream specifications
Prop Set Specify the property specifications and
perturbation data
EO options, EO variable/vector, and report
Results View the Analyzer results
EO Variables Specify equation-oriented variable attribute
changes for this block, for the current run only
EO Input Specify the equation-oriented variables for this
block
Spec Groups Specify the specification groups for this block
Ports Specify the EO variables collected to form ports
for this block

Flowsheet
Material (optional) Material (optional)
Connectivity for
Analyzer
Material Streams
inlet One inlet material stream (optional)
outlet One outlet material stream (optional)
If Analyzer is not connected to streams, you must specify a stream
to analyze on the Input form.
Specifying Analyzer Specify a material stream for Analyzer to analyze by either
connecting inlet and outlet material streams to the analyzer block
on the flowsheet or specifying a stream on the Input Specifications
sheet. Also on the Input Specifications sheet, you can specify
conditions for the analysis.
Each property you want Analyzer to calculate must be specified in
a property set on the top-level Properties Prop-Sets form. Specify
properties for Analyzer to calculate by choosing these property sets
on the Analyzer Prop-Set form.
EO Usage Notes for All features of Analyzer are available in the EO formulation,
Analyzer except the features which are globally unsupported.

Feedbl Reference
Use Feedbl to maintain compatibility with Feedbl blocks in RT-
OPT version 10.0 projects. If you are creating a new simulation in
Aspen Plus, do not use Feedbl. Aspen Plus automatically creates
the necessary feed specifications.
Feedbl is a mole-flow model which is used to define material feed
streams for the RT-Opt flowsheet. Containing one inlet and one
outlet material stream, it calculates stream flows, composition, and
properties.
Feedbl includes an extra equation to compute the total molar flow
for the inlet stream. This ensures that the inlet stream component
and total molar flows are consistent. When using sequential-
modular (SM) strategy to solve the problem, Feedbl has no effect
on the stream, except for an optional pressure drop.
Feedbl:
Input Specify the Feedbl conditions and referenced
stream specifications
Prop Set Specify the property specifications and
perturbation data
EO options, EO variable/vector, and report
Results View the results for this block
changes for this block, for the current run only
block
Spec Groups Specify the specification groups for this block
for this block

Selector Reference
The Selector block is a switch between different inlet streams. Any
number of streams may enter the block, and one designated stream
from among these is copied to the outlet stream. The Selector
block can be used with material, heat, or work streams.
Use the Selector Input Form to specify which stream is copied to
the outlet stream.
Flowsheet
Connectivity for Material, Material,
Selector Heat, or Work Heat, or Work
(any number
of one type)
For Material Streams
inlet One or more material streams

For Heat Streams
inlet One or more heat streams

For Work Streams
inlet One or more work streams

Specifying Selector The only input needed for Selector is the ID of the inlet stream
which is to be copied to the outlet stream.
Selector may be used with material, heat, or work streams. When
you place the selector block on the flowsheet, click the arrow to
the right of the Selector icon in the model library to choose the
selector for heat streams (labeled with a Q), for work streams
(labeled with a W), or for material streams (unlabeled).

You can use Selector when modeling alternate simulation trains or
analyzing different feedstock options for a process. For example,
copy the feed streams into each alternate train with a Dupl block.
Connect the products of the alternate trains to a Selector block. On
the Selector Input Specifications sheet, select the product stream
from the desired simulation train.
Train 1
Dupl Selector
Train 2
Example of modeling alternate simulation trains with a Selector block
EO Usage Notes for All features of Selector are available in the EO formulation, except
Selector the features which are globally unsupported.

Qtvec Reference
Qtvec is a load stream manipulator which can be used to combine
multiple heat streams into a single load stream or to add an
additional temperature and duty point to an existing load stream.
Flowsheet
Connectivity for
Qtvec
Inlet Two or more heat streams or one load stream

Outlet One load stream
Specifying Qtvec To combine multiple heat streams into a single load stream:
For heat streams to be combined into a load stream, the following

conditions must be true:
• Each heat stream must have a corresponding ending
temperature. Heat streams produced by RadFrac, MultiFrac,
Heater, Flash2, and Flash3 have starting and ending
temperatures.
• The duty associated with each heat stream must have the same
sign.
Suppose there are 4 heat streams H1, H2, H3, and H4 with duties
Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and ending temperatures Tend1, Tend2,
Tend3, and Tend4. The combined load stream will then consist of:
Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q4 Tbegin
Q2 + Q3 + Q4 Tend1
}H1
Q3 + Q4 Tend2
}H2
Q4 Tend3
}H3
0 Tend4
}H4
Tbegin is either specified by the user or taken from the hottest or
coldest starting temperature, depending on the sign of the duty.

To add an additional temperature and duty point to a load stream:
Cumulative load streams coming from a Radfrac block do not

contain a 0 duty point. Consider a RadFrac block in which Q1, Q2,
Q3, and Q4 represent the duties of stages 1 through 4, and T1, T2,
T3, and T4 represent the duties of these stages. The cumulative
load stream leaving this block will have the following values:
Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q4 T4
Q2 + Q3 + Q4 T3
Q3 + Q4 T2
Q4 T1
To convert this to a load stream usable by MHeatX, it needs to be
manipulated by Qtvec to give it a 0 duty point and a Tbegin. This
will transform it into:
Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q4 Tbegin
Q2 + Q3 + Q4 T1
Q3 + Q4 T2
Q4 T3
0 T4
Tbegin must be specified on the Qtvec Input Specifications sheet.

Measurement Reference
The measurement model is used to define plant measurements for
data reconciliation purposes. It provides a:
• Way of relating plant measurements to model predictions
• Mechanism for entering values for plant measurements
It also provides a convenient method for supplying a data
reconciliation objective, by allowing you to specify the objective
function in terms of measurement offsets and standard deviations.
Measurement:
Input Specify the measurement and flowsheet
variables for this block.
Results View the Measurement results
changes related to this block for the current
run only
EO Input Specify the equation-oriented variables for
this block

CHAPTER 8
Solids
This chapter describes the unit operation models for solids

processing such as crystallizers, solid crushers and separators, gas-
solid separators, liquid-solid separators, and solids washers. The
models are:
Crystallizer Crystallizer Produces crystals from solution based on Mixed suspension, mixed product
solubility removal (MSMPR) crystallizer
Crusher Solids crusher Breaks solid particles to reduce particle Wet and dry crushers, primary and
size secondary crushers
Screen Solids Separates solid particles based on Upper and lower dry and wet
separator particle size screens
FabFl Fabric filter Separates solids from gas using fabric Rating and sizing baghouses
filter baghouses
Cyclone Cyclone Separates solids from gas using gas Rating and sizing cyclones
separator vortex in a cyclone
VScrub Venturi Separates solids from gas by direct Rating and sizing venturi scrubbers
scrubber contact with an atomized liquid
ESP Electrostatic Separates solids from gas using an Rating and sizing dry electrostatic
precipitator electric charge between two plates precipitators
HyCyc Hydrocyclone Separates solids from liquid using liquid Rating or sizing hydrocyclones
vortex in a hydrocyclone
CFuge Centrifuge Separates solids from liquid using a Rating or sizing centrifuges
filter rotating basket
Filter Rotary vacuum Separates solids from liquid using a Rating or sizing rotary vacuum
filter continuous rotary vacuum filter filters
SWash Single-stage Models recovery of dissolved Single -stage solids washer
solids washer components from an entrained liquid of a
solids stream using a washing liquid
CCD Counter- Models multi-stage recovery of dissolved Multi-stage solids washers
current components from an entrained liquid of a
decanter solids stream using a washing liquid
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Solids • 8-1

This chapter is organized into the following sections:
Section Models
Crystallizer Crystallizer
Crushers and Screens Crusher, Screen
Gas-Solid Separators FabFl, Cyclone, VScrub, ESP
Liquid-Solid Separators HyCyc, CFuge, Filter
Solids Washers SWash, CCD
8-2 • Solids Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Crystallizer Reference
Crystallizer models a mixed suspension, mixed product removal
(MSMPR) crystallizer. It performs mass and energy balance
calculations and optionally determines the crystal size distribution.
Crystallizer assumes that the product magma leaves the crystallizer
in equilibrium, so the mother liquor in the product magma is
saturated.
The feed to Crystallizer mixes with recirculated magma and passes
through a heat exchanger before it enters the crystallizer.
The product stream from Crystallizer contains liquids and solids.
You can pass this stream through a hydrocyclone, filter, or other
fluid-solid separator to separate the phases. Crystallizer can have
an outlet vapor stream.
Crystallizer:
Setup Specify operating parameters, crystal product and
solubility parameters, recirculation options, and flash
PSD Specify PSD and crystal growth calculation
parameters
Advanced Specify component attributes, convergence
parameters, and name and parameters for user
solubility subroutine
Results View summary of Crystallizer results, material and
energy balance results, and crystal size distribution
results
Flowsheet Vapor
(optional)
Connectivity for
Crystallizer Material Liquid
(any number) and Solid
Heat
(optional)
Heat
(optional)

Material Streams

outlet One material stream for liquid and solid
One optional vapor stream
The outlet material stream should normally have at least one solid
substream for the crystals formed. If you select Calculate PSD
from Growth Kinetics or User-Specified Values on the PSD PSD
sheet, each substream must have a particle size distribution (PSD)
attribute.
If electrolyte salts are formed based on electrolyte chemistry
calculations, a solid substream is not required when you select
Copy from Inlet Stream on the PSD PSD sheet.
If you do not use the vapor outlet stream, vapor products will be
placed in the liquid/solid product stream.
Heat Streams
inlet Any number of optional inlet heat streams

outlet One optional outlet heat stream
If you give only one specification on the Setup Specifications sheet
(temperature or pressure), Crystallizer uses the sum of the inlet
heat streams as a duty specification. Otherwise, Crystallizer uses
the inlet heat streams only to calculate the net heat duty. The net
heat duty is the sum of the inlet heat streams minus the actual
Specifying Crystallizer calculates crystal product flow rate and/or vapor flow,
Crystallizer based on solubility data you supply. Or you can specify the
chemistry for electrolyte systems instead of specifying solubility
data.
You must specify two of the following:
• Crystallizer temperature
• Pressure or pressure drop
• Heat duty for the heat exchanger
• Crystal product flow rate
• Vapor flow

If you specify Crystallizer calculates
Temperature and Pressure Heat duty, crystal product flow rate,
vapor flow rate
Pressure and Heat Duty Temperature, crystal product flow
rate, vapor flow rate
Temperature and Heat Duty Pressure, crystal product flow rate,
vapor flow rate
Pressure and Crystal Product Flow Temperature, heat duty, vapor flow
Rate rate
Temperature and Crystal Product Pressure, heat duty, vapor flow rate
Flow Rate
Pressure and Vapor Flow Rate Temperature, heat duty, crystal
product flow rate
Temperature and Vapor Flow Rate Pressure, heat duty, crystal product
flow rate
Recirculation You can model crystallizer with or without magma recirculation.
Specifications To activate recirculation, specify one of the following on the Setup
Recirculation sheet:
• Recirculation fraction
• Recirculation flow rate
• Temperature change across heat exchanger
If you want to model a different crystallization process flowsheet,
you can use Crystallizer without recirculation, and use other blocks
in the flowsheet to model the recirculation.
Solubility Crystallizer calculates the amount of crystal produced at its
saturation (class II crystallization). You can provide solubility data
in one of these ways:
• Enter solubility data on the Setup Solubility sheet
• Reference an electrolyte chemistry (defined in the Reactions
Chemistry forms) in which the crystallizing component has
been declared as a "salt"
• Supply a subroutine to provide the saturation concentration or
to calculate crystal product flow rate directly

Saturation Calculation Choose the saturation calculation method from these options:
Method • Solubility method: Identify the crystallizing component as
solid product on the Setup Crystallization sheet. Enter
solubility data on the Setup Solubility sheet. This data applies
to the reactant species in the mixed substream.
• Chemistry method: Create a new Chemistry on the Reactions
Chemistry object manager. Enter the crystallization as a salt
reaction on the Reactions Chemistry Stoichiometry sheet. On
the BlockOptions Properties sheet of the crystallizer, enter the
Chemistry ID and select True Species for Simulation
Approach. You must specify the crystallizing component as a
Salt Component ID on the Setup Specifications sheet.
• User Subroutine method: Identify the crystallizing component
on the Setup Crystallization sheet and the solubility data basis
and solvent ID on the Setup Solubility sheet. Specify a user
subroutine to calculate saturation concentration or crystallizer
yield on the Advanced UserSubroutine sheet.
In general, when using the Solubility method, you should blank out
the Chemistry ID field on the BlockOptions Properties sheet. If
you specify chemistry when using the Solubility method, the
chemistry must not contain the crystallizing component.
Supersaturation The degree of supersaturation is the driving force for
crystallization processes. Supersaturation is defined as:
S = C − Cs
Where:
S = Supersaturation (kg of solute/m3 of solution)
C = Solute concentration
Cs = Solute saturation concentration
Because the crystallizer model assumes that the product magma is
in phase equilibrium, this equation is not used. It is provided only
for reference.
Crystal Growth Rate The crystal growth rate can be expressed as a function of the
degree of supersaturation (S):
Go = kg S n
Where:
Go = Growth rate dependence on supersaturation (m/s)
kg = Growth rate expression coefficient
n = Exponent

This expression is provided as background information only.
o
In Aspen Plus, G is calculated implicitly from the third moment
of the population density.
For a size-dependent growth rate, the growth rate is a function of
crystal length (L):
G = G o (1 + γL )α For 0 ≤ α ≤ 1
Where:
γ = Constant
α = Exponent
If the growth rate is independent of crystal size, then the values for
γ and α are set to zero.
Crystal Nucleation Rate The overall nucleation rate can be expressed as the sum of specific
contributing factors (Bennett, 1984):
B o = kb G i MTj R k
Where:
B0 = Overall nucleation rate
i, j, k = Exponents
kb = Overall nucleation rate expression coefficient
MT = Magma density = P/q (kg/m3)
G = Crystal growth rate
R = Impeller rotation rate (revs/s)
P = Crystal mass flow rate (kg/s)
q = Volumetric flow rate of slurry in the discharge
(m3/s)
Population Balance If the feed stream contains no crystals, the population balance for a
well-mixed continuous crystallizer can be written as (Randolph
and Larson, 1988):
d (nG ) qn
+ =0
dL V
Where:
G = Crystal growth rate
n = Population density (no. /m3/m)
L = Crystal length (m)
V = Crystallizer volume (m3)

q = Volumetric flow rate of slurry in the discharge
(m3/s)
The boundary condition is n = n at L = 0, where n = B / G is

o o o
the population density of nuclei. For a constant crystal growth rate,

the population density is:
−L
n( L) = n o exp  
 Gτ 
where τ = V / q is the crystal residence time.

PSD Statistics Aspen Plus calculates the crystal size distribution statistics once
you select the Calculate PSD from Growth Kinetics option on the
PSD PSD sheet.
Properties of the distribution may be evaluated from the moment
equations. The j-th moment of the particle size distribution is
defined as:
∞
m j = ∫ Lj n( L) dL
0
The system reports several crystal size distribution statistics,

measured on a volume or mass basis, including:
• Mean size
• Standard deviation
• Skewness
• The coefficient of variation (expressed as a percentage)
The mean size is the mass-weighted average crystal size, as
determined by the ratio of the fourth moment to the third moment,
as follows:
m4
L=
m3
The skewness of a symmetric size distribution about the mean is
zero. Negative values of skewness indicate the distribution is
skewed toward the presence of small crystals. Positive values of
skewness indicate the crystal distribution contains an excess of
large crystals.
∑ f ( x − mean) 3
3
Skewness is defined as (standard deviation) .
The system uses the coefficient of variation to calculate variation
related to the cumulative volume (or mass) distribution.

pd @ (.84) − pd @ (.16)
Coeff − Var(%) = 100
2 pd @ (.50)
where pd@ (x) is the particle diameter corresponding to fraction x
of the cumulative volume (or mass) distribution. The fraction can
be entered as the Fractional Coefficient on the PSD CrystalGrowth
sheet; otherwise, it defaults to .16.
Calculating PSD The magma density, defined as total mass of crystals per unit
volume of slurry, can be obtained from the third moment:
∞
M T = ρ c k v ∫ L3 n( L) dL
0
Where:
ρc = Density of crystal (kg/m3)
kv = Volume shape factor of the crystal

Since:
−L
n( L) = n o exp  
 Gτ  ,
Bo
n = o
o
G ,
and B = kb G MT R
o i j k
these equations can be substituted into the third moment of

population density, yielding:
∞ Gi − L
M T = ρc k v ∫ L3 kb j k
o M T R exp 
 Gτ 
dL
0 G
α
where G = G (1 + γL ) .
o
Because L is made discrete by the increments of the particle size

o
distribution, the equations can be solved for G .
References Bennett, R.C. "Crystallization from Solution", in Perry’s Chemical
Engineers’ Handbook, 6th Ed., pp. 19.24-19.40, McGraw-Hill,
1984.
Randolph, A.D. and Larson, M.A., Theory of Particulate
Processes, 2nd Ed., Academic Press, 1988.

Crusher Reference
Use Crusher to simulate the breaking of solid particles.
Crusher can model the wet or dry continuous operation of:
• Gyratory/jaw crushers
• Single-roll crushers
• Multiple-roll crushers
• Cage mill impact breakers
Crusher assumes the feed is homogeneous. The breaking process
creates fragments with the same composition as the feed. Crusher
calculates the power required for crushing, and the particle size
distribution of the outlet solids stream.
Crusher does not account for the heat produced by the breaking
process.
Crusher:
Input Enter crusher operating parameters, the Bond
work index or the Hardgrove grindability index,
and user-specified selection and breakage
functions
Results View summary of Crusher results and material
and energy balances
Flowsheet Feed
Connectivity for
Crusher
Crushed Solids
Work (optional)
Material Streams
inlet One material stream with at least one solids substream


Each solids substream must have a particle size distribution (PSD)
attribute.
Work Streams
inlet No inlet work streams

outlet One work stream containing the calculated power
requirement
(optional)
Specifying Crusher Use the Input Specifications and Grindability sheets to specify
operating conditions. You must enter the type of crusher and
maximum particle diameter on the Input Specifications sheet. You
must also specify the Bond work index or the Hardgrove
grindability index for each solids substream on the Grindability
sheet.
The outlet flow rate of crushed product in the k-th size interval is:
Pk ( β ) = ∑ ∑ Fij S i ( β ) Bik ( β ) + ∑ [1 − S k ( β )]Fkj
j i j
Where:
Bik = Breakage function. Fraction of particles originally in
size interval i that end up in size interval k
Fij = Flow rate of feed in the size interval i and particle
size distribution j
Pk = Flow rate of solid in size interval k
Si = Selection function. Fraction of feed particles in size
interval i to be crushed at the outlet diameter β
β = Crusher outlet diameter (Maximum Particle
Diameter field)
i = Size interval counter within a PSD
j = PSD counter for multiple size distribution
If the inlet stream contains no liquid, then Crusher assumes dry
crushing, and power requirements increase by 34%.
You can enter tabular values for the breakage ( Bik ) function on the
Input BreakageFunction sheet and for the selection ( S i ) function
on the Input SelectionFunction sheet, or let Crusher use the built-in
tables (U.S. Bureau of Mines, 1977) (see the following two tables).

Breakage Function Correlations
B ik (β)
Ratio of product Feed size/solids outlet diameter >1.7 Feed size/solids outlet
size to feed size diameter <1.7
Multiple roll Gyratory/jaw Single roll Cage mill All crushers

crusher crusher crusher crusher
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.8308 0.95 0.95 0.96 0.84 0.8972
0.5882 0.85 0.85 0.79 0.50 0.7035
0.4176 0.65 0.70 0.45 0.32 0.54
0.2065 0.35 0.35 0.20 0.15 0.2952
0.1041 0.22 0.20 0.10 0.052 0.1564
0.0522 0.14 0.19 0.05 0.019 0.0805
0.0368 0.11 0.17 0.03 0.011 0.0572
0.026 0.09 0.12 0.02 0.0066 0.0406
0.0131 0.03 0.08 0.0 0.002 0.0206
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Selection Function Correlations,

Si (β)
Ratio of feed size to Primary crusher Secondary crusher
outlet diameter
0.95 0.5695 0.7693
0.9 0.3817 0.6962
0.8 0.1716 0.5695
0.7 0.0771 0.4667
0.6 0.0347 0.3817
0.5 0.0156 0.3128
0.4 0.007 0.256
0.3 0.00315 0.2096
0.2 0.00145 0.1716
0.1 0.0006 0.1405
0.05 0.00043 0.1271
0.001 0.00026 0.1153
0.0001 0.00026 0.1148
If the ratio of feed size to outlet diameter is greater than 1.0, then
Si (β) = 0.85 .
Primary and Secondary Crushing operations are usually performed in stages. The reduction
Crushers ratio is the ratio of the maximum diameter of feed particles to
product particles. The reduction ratio in crushers ranges from 3 to
6 per stage. Feed particles are fed to the primary crushers. Outlet
particles from the primary crushers are reduced further by the
secondary crushers.

Crusher uses different correlations for primary and secondary
crushers. Use the Operating Mode field on the Input Specifications
sheet to enter the type of crusher.
To improve the efficiency of multistage crushers, use screens
between stages.
Power Requirement The following equation determines the power requirement for
Crusher:
POWER =
( )
0.01 X F − X P × BWI × FLOWT
XF × XP
Where:
POWER = Required power (Watt)
XF = Diameter larger than 80% of feed particle mass
(m)
XP = Diameter larger than 80% of product particle
mass (m)
BWI = Bond work index
FLOWT = Total solids mass flow rate (kg/s)
For dry crushing, power requirement increases by 34%.
If X P is less than 70 micrometers, then the power required is

further adjusted by:
 10.6×10 −6 + X P 
POWER= POWER 
 1.145 X P 
Bond Work Index The Bond equation defines the work consumed in size reduction:
XF − XP 100
E = Ei
XF XP
Where:
E = Work required to reduce a unit weight of feed with
80% passing a diameter X F microns to a product
with 80% passing a diameter X P microns
Ei = Bond work index, that is, the work required to
reduce a unit weight from a theoretical infinite size
to 80% passing a diameter of 100 micrometers
The Bond work index is a semi-empirical parameter that depends
on the properties of the material processed. The Bond work indices
have been measured experimentally for a wide range of materials,

and are available in Perry’s Chemical Engineers’ Handbook. Use
experimental values with caution. The Bond work index is also a
function of the:
• Particle size for non-homogeneous materials
• Efficiency of the size-reduction equipment
Hardgrove Grindability The Hardgrove grindability index indicates the difficulty of
Index grinding coal based on physical properties such as hardness,
fracture, and tensile strength. The Hardgrove grindability index can
be approximated by:
435
BWI =
HGI 0.91
Where:
BWI = Bond work index
HGI = Hardgrove grindability index
The HGI for some United States coals are available in Perry’s
Chemical Engineers’ Handbook.
References Computer Simulation of Coal Preparation Plants, U.S. Bureau of
Mines, Grant No. GO-155030, Final Report August (1977).
Perry’s Chemical Engineers’ Handbook, 6th Ed., McGraw Hill,
1984.

Screen Reference
Screen simulates the separation by screens of a mixture containing
various sizes of solid particles into particles that have more
uniform sizes than the original mixture. You can use Screen to
model wet or dry operations and upper or lower level screens.
Screen calculates the separation efficiency of the screen from the
size of screen openings you specify.
Screen:
Input Specify screen parameters, operating conditions,
and user-specified screen separation strength and
selection functions
Results View summary of Screen results and material
and energy balances
Flowsheet
Overflow
Connectivity for
Screen
Feed
Underflow
Material Streams

outlet One material stream for particles that do not pass through
the screen (overflow)
One material stream for particles that pass through the
screen (underflow)
Each solids substream must have a particle size distribution
attribute.
Specifying Screen Use the Input Specifications sheet to enter:
• Screen size opening
• Operating level (Upper or Lower)
• Operating mode (Wet or Dry)
• Entrainments

You can also use the Input SelectionFunction sheet to enter the
following functions:
• Selection function ( Si ) (optional)
• Separation strength (optional)
Upper and Lower Level You can specify the operating level as Upper or Lower. The most
Screens efficient configuration is a multiple-deck screen with a series of
Screen blocks. The inlet stream is fed over the upper level screen.
The underflow from the upper level screens is fed over the lower
level screens. Screen uses different correlations for upper and
lower level screens.
Screen calculates the flow rate of the screen overflow stream as:
Fo = ∑ Si ∑ Fij
i j
Where:
Si = Selection function. The fraction of feed particles in
size range i that passes over the screen into the
overflow product
Fij = Flow rate of feed in size range i and particle size
distribution attribute j
Selection Function and Screen calculates the selection function for a certain size interval
Separation Strength as:
1
Si = for d p < S o
[(
exp A 1 − d p S o )]
Si = 1 for d p ≥ S o
Where:
dp = Particle diameter
So = Size of screen opening
A = Separation strength
The default value of the screen separation strength, A, is a function
of the size of the screen opening. Screen has four built-in functions
(U.S. Bureau of Mines, 1977) for all possible combinations of
screen types (see the table, Screen Separation Strength/Screen Size
Correlation):
• Upper level dry
• Lower level dry
• Upper level wet
• Lower level wet

You can enter your own separation strength value, separation
strength correlation or selection function correlation on the Input
SelectionFunction sheet. Screen then uses these selection function
values for its mass balance calculation.
Screen Separation Strength/Screen Size Correlation
Size of screen Dry, upper Dry, lower Wet, upper Wet, lower
opening (m) level level level level
0.457 60 60 60 60
0.152 20 20 20 20
0.038 8 8 9 9
0.0095 8 6 8.5 6.6
0.00635 5 4 5.5 4.5
0.00236 3 2 3.5 2.3
0.00059 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8
0.00042 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7
0.000295 0.5 0.5 0.55 0.55
Separation Efficiency The separation efficiency of the screen is calculated as the ratio of
the mass flow rate of the underflow to the fraction of the feed flow
rate containing particles smaller than the screen openings.
Reference Computer Simulation of Coal Preparation Plants, U.S. Bureau of
Mines, Grant No. GO-155030, Final Report August (1977).

FabFl Reference
FabFl is a gas-solids separator model used to separate an inlet gas
stream containing solids into a solids stream and a gas stream
carrying the residual solids. Use FabFl to simulate or design
baghouse units in which solid particles are separated from the inlet
gas stream. A baghouse consists of a number of cells in which
vertically-mounted cylindrical fabric filter bags operate in parallel.
You can use FabFl to rate or size baghouses.
FabFl:
Input Enter operating conditions, baghouse
characteristics, and separation efficiency
Results View summary of FabFl results and material and
energy balances
Flowsheet
Gas (overflow)
Connectivity for
FabFl
Feed
Solids (underflow)
Material Streams

outlet One overflow stream for the cleaned gas
One underflow stream for the solids particles
attribute. Solids may be entrained in the overflow, based on the
separation efficiency.
Specifying FabFl Use the Input Specifications sheet to specify operating conditions
and baghouse characteristics.
For these calculations Set Mode= And number of cells is
Rating Simulation Specified
Sizing Design Calculated

For sizing or rating calculations:
If you enter FabFl calculates
Maximum allowable pressure Filtration time
drop
Filtration time Pressure drop
Operating Ranges FabFl uses empirical models because no theoretical models exist.
Expect unreliable results when operating conditions exceed the
ranges of the experimental data on which the models are based.
Your data should fall within these ranges:
−7 −4
• Diameter of solid particles between 10 to 10 m (0.1 to 100
micrometers)
• Maximum gas velocity through the cloth between 0.1 and 0.2
m/s (20 to 40 ft/min)
The gas velocity is the ratio of gas volumetric flow rate to total
filtering area.
Filtering Time When rating fabric filters, FabFl calculates the filtering time t as:
∆Pf − ∆Pi
t=
CKVo2
Where:
∆Pf = Final pressure drop across collected dust and filter
cloth
∆Pi = Pressure drop of the clean bag
C = Dust concentration
K = Dust resistance coefficient
Vo = Air to cloth ratio (gas velocity through the cloth)
Vo
The air to cloth ratio is:
Q
Vo =
( N cell − N shake ) Abag N bag
Where:
Q = Volumetric flow rate of the gas
N cell = Number of cells
N shake = Number of cells being cleaned
Abag = Total filter surface of all bags
N bag = Number of bags per cell

Resistance Coefficient The resistance coefficient K depends on the particle size and nature
of solid particles. In an industrial-scale baghouse, the resistance
coefficient also varies with time and bag position. If specific
resistance coefficients are not available, the following values can
be used as rough estimates (Air Pollution Engineering Manual,
1967):
Dust particle diameter Resistance coefficients
−6 2
( 10 m) [Pa/(kg/m ) (m/s)]
Less than 20 300,000
20 to 90 60,000
Greater than 90 15,000
These coefficients were determined from a small fabric filter. The
3 2
filter has an air flow of 2 ft / min through 0.2 ft of cloth area (a
filtering gas velocity of 10 ft/min). The pressure drop across the
bag and dust was 8 inches of H 2 O .
An approximation for the resistance coefficient (Billings, C.E. and
Wilder, J.) is:
1000
K=
d p2
Where:
dp = The average particle size in microns
2
The units for K are (inches of water)/(lbs dust/ft of area)(ft/min
velocity).

Separation Efficiency The overall separation efficiency of the baghouse is:
∑∑Sη ij ij
flow rate of solids removed from the inlet
ηo = =
j i
Total inlet flow rate of solids total inlet flow rate of solids
Where:
Sij = Flow rate of solid j in size increment i
In FabFl, the separation efficiency is a function of the particle
diameter of the solids. For large particles (greater than 10
micrometers in diameter), fractional collection efficiency ( ηi ) is
1.0. For particles smaller than 10 micrometers, efficiency
decreases rapidly.
ηi When
1.0 ( d p ) av > 10 µm
(d ) 1µm < (d p ) av < 10 µm
0.0011 p av 0.989
(d ) ( d p ) av < 1µm
0.495 p av 0.495
You also can enter efficiency as a function of particle sizes on the
Input Efficiency sheet to override the built-in correlations.
References Air Pollution Engineering Manual, Public Health Service
Publication No. 999-AP-40, pp. 106-135, Washington D.C.,
DHEW (1967).
Billings, C.E. and Wilder, J., Handbook of Fabric Filter
Technology, Vol. I, NIIS PB 200648.

Cyclone Reference
Cyclone separates an inlet gas stream containing solids into a
solids stream and a gas stream carrying the residual solids.
Use Cyclone to simulate cyclone separators in which solid
particles are removed by the centrifugal force of a gas vortex. You
can use Cyclone to size or rate cyclone separators. In simulation
mode, Cyclone calculates the separation efficiency and pressure
drop from a user-specified cyclone diameter.
In design mode, the cyclone geometry is calculated to meet the
user-specified separation efficiencies and maximum pressure drop.
In both calculation modes, the particle size distributions of the
outlet solids streams are determined.
Cyclone:
Use this form To
Input Enter cyclone specifications, dimensions,
dimension ratios, separation efficiencies, and
solids loading
Results View summary of Cyclone results and material
and energy balances
Flowsheet Gas
Connectivity for
Cyclone Feed
Solids
Material Streams

outlet One stream for the cleaned gas
One stream for the solids
attribute.

Specifying Cyclone Use the Input Specifications sheet to specify the type of cyclone
and operating conditions.
Use the Input Dimensions sheet to enter cyclone dimensions, or
use the Input Ratios sheet to enter ratios of cyclone dimensions.
To perform
these calculations Specify Cyclone calculates
Rating Simulation mode Separation efficiency
Cyclone Diameter Pressure drop
Number of Cyclones
Sizing Design mode Cyclone diameter
Separation Efficiency Number of cyclones
Maximum Pressure
Drop (optional)
Maximum Number of
Cyclones (optional)
For rating calculations, if you specify Type=User-Specified or
User-Specified Ratios, you can specify cyclone dimensions on the
Input Dimensions or Input Ratios sheets.
For design calculations, you must also enter the Maximum Number
of Cyclones in parallel. If either of the following occurs, Cyclone
calculates the number of cyclones in parallel:
• The efficiency of a single cyclone is less than the required
separation efficiency.
• The calculated pressure drop exceeds the maximum pressure
drop specified.
Separation Efficiency The overall separation efficiency is:
flow rate of solids removed from the inlet
ηm =
total inlet flow rate of solids
Co − Ci Qo Co − E E
ηm = = = 1−
Co Qo Co Qo Co
Where:
Co = Concentration of solids in inlet gas
Ci = Concentration of solids in outlet cleaned gas
Qo = Inlet gas flow rate
E = Outlet emission rate of solids in the cleaned gas
Cyclone attains higher separation efficiencies with particles that
are 5 to 10 microns or greater in diameter. For particles smaller
than 5 microns, Cyclone efficiency decreases. Even with large
particles, it is difficult to obtain a collection efficiency greater than
95%.

If you enter a design efficiency higher than 95%, use either:
• Multi-stage cyclones
• Cyclone as a precleaner, followed by other collectors
You can specify the Efficiency Correlation field on the Input
Specifications sheet. If Efficiency Correlation=User-Specified, you
can enter efficiency as a function of particle sizes on the Input
Efficiency sheet.
Operating Ranges Cyclone uses correlations that are semi-empirical models. Do not
expect satisfactory accuracy when the specified conditions exceed
the ranges of experimental data from which the models were
developed. In general, the pressure drop should be less than
2
2500 N / m (10 inches of H 2 O ). The operating pressure should not
exceed atmospheric pressure. The inlet gas velocity should be in
the range of 15 to 27 m/s (50 to 90 ft/s).
The Leith and Licht efficiency correlation is accurate for inlet
velocities approximately 25 m/s (80 ft/s). The correlation
overestimates the separation efficiency at high velocities.
The Shepherd and Lapple correlation is accurate for particle sizes
of 5 to 200 microns. This correlation tends to overestimate the
efficiency of large particles (greater than 200 microns). The
Shepherd and Lapple correlation also underestimates the efficiency
of fine particles (smaller than 5 microns).
Pressure Drop Cyclone calculates the pressure drop (Shepherd and Lapple, 1939)
as:
∆P = 0.0030 ρ f U t2 N h
Where:
ρf = Density of the fluid
Ut = Inlet gas velocity
Nh = Inlet velocity speeds
Use the Input SolidsLoading sheet to enter values to correct for
solids loading.
The inlet velocity speed, N h , is:
ab
Nk = K
De2
Where:
K = Dimensionless ratio
a = Inlet height of the cyclone

b = Inlet width of the cyclone
De = Outlet diameter of the cyclone
The dimensionless ratio K is:
8(Vs + Vnl / 2)
K=
abDc
Where:
Vs = Annular shaped volume above the exit duct to
midlevel of the entrance duct
Vnl = Effective volume of the cyclone calculated by
natural length l
Dc = Body diameter of the cyclone
The annular shaped volume Vs above the exit duct to midlevel of the
entrance duct is:
π( s − a / 2 ) ( Dc2 − De2 )
Vs =
4
Cyclone Diameter Cyclone calculates the diameter of the body of the cyclone Dc as:
0 . 454
 Qρ2f (1 − b / Dc ) 
Dc = 0.0502  × 2.2 
 µ(ρ p − ρ f ) ( a / Dc ) (b / Dc ) 
Where:
Q = Overflow gas flow rate
ρf = Density of the fluid
µ = Viscosity of gas fluid
ρp = Density of the particles
In this empirical equation, units are:
Unit type Unit
Length Feet
Mass Pounds
Time Seconds
Dimension Ratios Use the Input Dimensions sheet to enter the dimensions of a
cyclone when Mode=Simulation and Type=User-Specified. If you
specify Type=User-Specified Ratios, you can use the Input Ratios
sheet to enter dimension ratios (dimension / cyclone diameter) for
a cyclone.

The dimension ratios and some default values of the two built-in
configurations are:
Dimension ratio (dimension/ Type = High Type = Medium
cyclone diameter) efficiency efficiency
Cyclone diameter 1.0 1.0
Inlet height 0.5 0.75
Inlet width 0.2 0.375
Length of overflow 0.5 0.875
Diameter of overflow 0.5 0.75
Length of cone section 1.5 1.50
Overall length 4.0 4.0
Diameter of underflow 0.375 0.375
Number of gas turn in cyclone 7.0 4.0
Maximum diameter (m) 1.5 5.0
Minimum diameter (m) 0.1 0.1
Cyclone calculates the dimensions of the built-in cyclones using
these ratios and the cyclone diameter you specify. The built-in
configurations (Type=High or Medium) may not be the best
designs. It is recommended that you enter dimensions or dimension
ratios, if available.
Vane Constant Use the Vane Constant field on the Input Specifications sheet to
specify the vane constant. The vane constant varies with the
configuration of the inlet duct. In the common configuration, the
inlet duct terminates at the wall of the cyclone. The vane constant
is 16. To reduce friction loss, extend the duct into the interior of
the cyclone. When the duct is in the middle of the cyclone
separator, the vane constant is 7.5.

Cyclone Dimensions The next figure shows the Cyclone geometry. The table following
the figure shows the Cyclone dimensions.
Dc
b De
s
a h
B
Cyclone Geometry
The Cyclone design configurations are:

Term Description High efficiency High throughput
Dc Body diameter 1.0 1.0
a Inlet height 0.5 0.75
b Inlet width 0.2 0.375
s Outlet length 0.5 0.875
De Outlet diameter 0.5 0.75
h Cylinder height 1.5 1.50
H Overall height 4.0 4.0
B Dust outlet diameter 0.375 0.375
Solids Loading Correction The feed concentration of solids affects the separation efficiency.
3
Concentration higher than 1.0 gm m usually leads to higher
efficiency. Smolik (1975) presented the following relationship
between the efficiency and solids concentration:
a
1 − ET*  c * 
= 
1 − ET  c 

Where:
c* = 1.0 gm / m 3
c = Solids concentration
E *T = Total efficiency
ET = "Low loading" total efficiency

α = Exponent
Smolik gives values of α = 0.182. This form can only serve as a
guide, because the effect of dust concentration depends on the
nature of the solids, the humidity of the gas, and many other
factors that do not figure in the existing correlations.
The actual pressure drops with dust-laden gases are normally lower
than those obtained with clean gas. Smolik gives an empirical
correlation for the effect of feed concentration on pressure in the
form:
∆p *
= 1 − βc γ
∆p
Where:
c = g / m3
∆p * = Pressure drop
∆p = Pressure drop with clean gas
β ,γ = Constants depending on the material
Smolik gives values of β = 0.02 and γ 0.6.

References Shepherd, G.B. and Lapple, C.E., "Flow Pattern and Pressure Drop
in Cyclone Dust Collectors," Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry, 31, pp. 972-984 (1939).
Smolik, J. et al., Air Pollution Abatement, Part I. Scriptum No.
401-2099 (in Czech). Technical University of Prague (1975).
Quoted by Svarovsky, L., "Solid-Gas Separation," Handbook of
Powder Technology, Williams, J.C. and Allen, T. (Eds.), Elsevier,
Amsterdam (1981).

VScrub Reference
Use VScrub to simulate venturi scrubbers.
Venturi scrubbers remove solid particles from a gas stream by
direct contact with an atomized liquid stream.
You can use VScrub to rate or size venturi scrubbers.
VScrub:
Input Specify operating parameters and throat
Results View summary of VScrub results and material
and energy balances
Flowsheet Liquid
Connectivity for
VScrub
Gas
Feed Gas
with Solids Liquid and
Solids
Material Streams
inlet One stream for solids with at least one solids substream
One stream for the atomized liquid
outlet One stream for the cleaned gas
One stream for the liquid with solid particles

Use the VScrub Input Specifications sheet to specify operating
Specifying VScrub
conditions and parameters for sizing or rating calculations.
To perform these Set Mode = Enter scrubber VScrub calculates
calculations
Rating Simulation Throat Diameter Separation efficiency
Throat Length Pressure drop
Sizing † Design Separation Liquid flow rate
efficiency Throat diameter
Throat length
Pressure drop
† Because the required liquid flow rate is varied to meet the
efficiency, the material balance is not satisfied if the calculated
liquid flow rate is different from the rate you enter.
In both modes, VScrub also calculates the particle size
distributions of the solids in the outlet streams.
VScrub assumes that the liquid stream is introduced before or at
the beginning of the scrubber throat. It also assumes the separation
of the solid particles from the gas stream occurs only at the
scrubber throat.
Pressure Drop VScrub calculates the pressure drop (Yung, S. et al., 1977) ∆ p
across the throat of the scrubber as:
( )
2ρl Vt 2  Ql 
∆p =   1 − x 2 + x 4 − x 2
gc  Qg 
Where:
ρl = Density of the liquid
Vt = Relative velocity of gas to liquid at the throat
gc = Conversion factor in Newton's law of motion
Ql = Liquid to gas volume flow rate
Qg
x = Dimensionless throat length defined by:

3lt C D ρ g
x= +1
16 Dd ρ l
Where:
lt = Throat length
CD = Drag coefficient, as a function of the Reynolds
number (Dickinson and Marshall, 1968) N Re .
24
C D = .22 + (1 + 015 0.6
. N Re )
N Re

ρg = Density of the gas
ρl = Density of the liquid
Dd = Drop diameter (Sauter mean), defined by
(Nukiyama, S., Tanasawa, Y. 1939):
0 . 45 1.5
 µl  1000Ql 
0 .5
585  σ l 
  + 597    
Vt  ρl   σ l ρl   Qg 
Where:
σl = Surface tension
µl = Viscosity of liquid
Separation Efficiency The separation efficiency (Yung, S., et al., 1978) ηo is defined as:
Mass flow rate of particles in outlet liquid stream
ηo =
Mass flow rate of particles in inlet gas stream
=
∑ Sη i i
Total inlet flow rate of solids

Where:
ηi = Efficiency for size increment i
Si = Mass flow rate of size increment i
References Yung, S. et al., Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association,
27, 348 (1977).
Dickinson, D.R. and Marshall, W.R., AIChE Journal, 14, 541,
(1968).
Nukiyama, S. and Tanasawa, Y., Transcripts of the Society of
Mechanical Engineers (Japan), 5, 63 (1939).
Yung, S. et al., Environmental Science and Technology, 12, 456
(1978).

ESP Reference
Use ESP to simulate dry electrostatic precipitators.
Dry electrostatic precipitators separate solids from a gaseous
stream. Electrostatic precipitators have vertically mounted
collecting plates with discharge wires. The wires are parallel and
positioned midway between the plates.
The corona discharge of the high-voltage wire electrodes first
charges the solid particles in the inlet gas stream. Then the
electrostatic field of the collecting plate electrodes removes the
solids from the gas stream.
You can use ESP to size or rate electrostatic precipitators.
ESP:
Input Specify operating parameters and dielectric
constants and precipitator dimensions
Results View summary of ESP results and material and
energy balances
Flowsheet Gas
Connectivity for ESP
Feed
Solids
Material Streams

outlet One material stream for the cleaned gas
One material stream for the solids
attribute.

Use the Input Specifications sheet to specify parameters for sizing
Specifying ESP
or rating calculations.
To perform
these Set Mode= Enter ESP calculates
calculations
Rating Simulation Number of plates Separation efficiency
Plate height Power required
Plate length Corona voltage
Pressure drop
Precipitator width
Sizing Design Separation Number of plates
efficiency Precipitator dimensions
Power required
Pressure drop
You can specify maximum dimensions for sizing calculations on
the Input Specifications sheet.
Operating Ranges The velocity of gas should be between 1 and 2.5 m/sec (for plate
spacing 200 and 300 mm). If the gas velocity is larger than 3 m/s
or less than 0.5 m/s, then the models for efficiency and pressure
drop are not valid. This is because the transport of fine particles by
turbulent diffusion may become more significant than transport by
electrostatic force.
ESP models wire-and-plate precipitators with relatively high dust
concentration (≥ 10 particles / m or 0.1 kg / m ). If the particle
11 3 3
concentration is too low, ESP may overestimate the results. ESP is

not suitable for a cylindrical electrostatic precipitator.
Separation Efficiency The separation efficiency is defined as (Crawford, M. 1976):
Mass outlet flow rate of solids
ηov =
Total mass flow rate of the inlet solids substream
Cnvs  ( X s − L)q ps E c C 
ηov = 1 − exp  
Cnvo  3πµdWV 
Where:
Cnvs = Particle concentration at X s
Cnvo = Particle concentration at inlet
Xs = Point at which all particles have acquired a
saturation charge
L = Plate length
q ps = Particle saturation charge
Ec = Collecting field strength ( = 0.25( Eo ))

C = Conningham correction factor
µ = Viscosity of the gas
d = Particle diameter
W = Distance between wires and plates
V = Actual gas velocity through the precipitator
The point at which all particles have acquired a saturation charge
X s , is defined as:
µdW 2 swV (Cnvo − Cnvs )
Xs =
0.332ε o E c C (0.8 E c Wsw − E 0 r0 )
Where:
sw = Distance between two wires
εo −12
= Electric permissivity constant = 8.85 x 10 c / vm
Eo = Corona field strength (White, H. J., 1963)

ro = Corona radius
The collecting field strength Ec , is defined as:

 T P To P  
E c = 0.25  − VB f  o + 0.03  
  TPo TPo ro  
Where:
VB = Breakdown voltage
f = Roughness factor of wire
To = Atmospheric temperature
Po = Atmospheric pressure
T = Temperature
P = Pressure
The particle concentration at the point where the particles first
have saturation charge, Cnvs is:
0.212( k + 2) 0.8 E c Ws w − E o ro
Cnvs =
kd 2 0.427 Ws w E c + 2 E o ro (0.533 Ws w − ro )
Where:
k = Dielectric constant ( = ε / ε o )

q ps
The particle saturation charge, is:
3kπε o d 2 2 2.5 Eo ro  2 1.25 ro  

q ps =  Ec +  −  
k+2  3 Wsw 3 Wsw  
Pressure Drop ESP calculates the pressure drop across the precipitator as:
∆p = 45.5 ρ g Vg2
Where:
ρg = Gas density
Vg = Gas velocity
Required Power The power required (White, H. J., 1963) Pw to meet a specified
separation efficiency is:
Pw = 52.75 ln(1 − ηov ) Q
Where:
Q = Volumetric gas flow rate
Gas Velocity The models used in ESP are valid for inlet gas velocities ranging
from 0.5 to 3 m/s. Outside this range, transport by turbulent
diffusion becomes more significant than by electrostatic force and
large errors should be expected.
Particle Diameter You can use ESP to model the separation of fine particles with
diameters ranging from 0.01 to 10 microns. ESP is accurate when
the inlet particle concentration is high
(≥ 1011 particles / m 3 or 0.1 kg / m 3 ). If the concentration is too
low, the model tends to overestimate the separation efficiency.
References Crawford, M., Air Pollution Control Theory, Chapter 8:
Electrostatic Precipitation, p. 298-358. McGraw-Hill, New York,
1976.
White, H.J., Industrial Electrostatic Precipitation, 204, pp. 91-92
(1963).

HyCyc Reference
Use HyCyc to simulate hydrocyclones. Hydrocyclones separate
solids from the inlet liquid stream by the centrifugal force of a
liquid vortex.
You can use HyCyc to rate or size hydrocyclones. In simulation
mode (rating), HyCyc calculates the particle diameter with 50%
separation efficiency from the user-specified hydrocyclone
diameter. In design mode (sizing), HyCyc determines the
hydrocyclone diameter required to achieve the user-specified
separation efficiency of the solids with the desired particle size.
In both calculation modes, pressure drop and the particle size
distribution of the outlet solids streams are determined.
HyCyc:
Input Specify simulation parameters, dimensions,
tangential velocity correlation parameters, and
separation efficiency
Results View summary of HyCyc results and material and
energy balances
Flowsheet Liquid
Connectivity for
HyCyc Feed
Solids
Material Streams
inlet One liquid stream with at least one solids substream

outlet One stream for the cleaned liquid with residual solids
One stream for solids
Each inlet solids substream must have a particle size distribution
(PSD) attribute.

Specifying HyCyc Use the Input Specifications sheet to specify hydrocyclone
operating conditions.
To perform
these Enter HyCyc calculates
calculations
Rating Simulation Separation efficiency
Mode Particle diameter with 50% separation
Hydrocyclone efficiency
diameter Pressure drop, particle size distribution
of outlet solids stream
Sizing Design Mode Hydrocyclone diameter
Separation Pressure drop, particle size distribution
efficiency of outlet solids stream
To obtain practical dimensions when sizing hydrocyclones, enter
the:
• Maximum diameter of the hydrocyclone
• Maximum pressure drop allowed across the hydrocyclone
HyCyc designs multiple hydrocyclones in parallel if one of the
following conditions exists:
• The calculated diameter is greater than the maximum specified
diameter.
• The calculated pressure drop is greater than the maximum
specified pressure drop.
Operating Ranges HyCyc uses empirical and semi-empirical correlations. Expect
unreliable results when operating conditions (Bradley, D., 1965)
are outside the ranges of experimental data on which the models
are based. In general, your data should fall within these ranges:
• Particle diameter between and (5 to 200 micrometers)
• Hydrocyclone diameter between 0.01 and 0.6 m
• Pressure drop between 35 and 345 kPa
• Separation efficiency between 2% and 98%
The solids concentration should be less than 11% of the volume
fraction, or less than 25% of the weight fraction.
Separation Efficiency Separation efficiency E is defined as:
mass underflow rate of solids
E=
mass feedflow rate of solids
Reduced efficiency E’ is defined as the fraction of feed solids that
go to the underflow minus the fraction of the feed liquid that also
goes to the underflow.

E − Rf
E′ =
1 − Rf
R
Where f is the volumetric ratio of underflow to feed flow (see
Material Split).
The reduced efficiency is obtained from the following equation:
   d   
3

E ′ = 100 1 − exp  − − 0.115  
   d50  
 
Where:
d = Diameter of the solid particles to be separated
d 50 = Particle diameter for which 50% of feed passes
through underflow
In turn, d 50 is obtained from the following equation which includes

operational and geometric parameters (Bradley, D., 1965):
d 50 Dc 3(0.38) n  µ Dc (1 − R f ) θ
0.5
=  tan 
Di2 α  Q(σ − ρ ) 2
Where:
Q = Volumetric flow rate at inlet
Dc = Chamber diameter
Di = Inlet diameter
n = Power of R in the tangential velocity distribution
function
α = Inlet velocity loss coefficient
σ = Density of solid
Rf = Underflow rate/feed rate
θ = Cone angle
ρ = Density of liquid
µ = Viscosity of liquid
Material Split HyCyc splits the feed according to the following empirical
correlation (Moder, J.M. and Dahlstrom, D.A., 1952):
Du 4.4 −.44
S =β ( ) Q
Do
Where:

S = Volume split = underflow rate/overflow rate
β = A constant, 6.13
Du = Diameter for underflow
Do = Diameter for overflow
Q = Inlet volumetric flow rate (gal/min)
Rf
The flow ratio (underflow rate/feed rate) is then obtained by:
1
1 − Rf =
1+ S
Tangential Velocity The following empirical correlation gives the tangential velocity V
(Dahlstrom, D.A., 1954) in a hydrocyclone at a radius R:
n
D 
VR =constant =αVi  c 
n
 2 
Where:
α = Inlet velocity loss coefficient
Vi = Inlet velocity
Dc = Diameter of the hydrocyclone
n = Exponent of radial dependence
R = Radius
For most cases, α and n are determined experimentally to be 0.45
and 0.8. These two variables are then used to determine d 50 .
Dimension Ratios Common hydrocyclones have the following ranges of dimension
ratios (dimension/chamber diameter):
Inlet diameter: 1/7 to 1/3
Length: 4 to 12
Overflow 1/8 to 1/2.3
diameter:
Underflow 1/10 to 1/5
diameter:
Cone angle: 9 deg. to 20 deg.
Pressure Drop For the pressure drop correlation to be valid (overflow
diameter/underflow diameter) should be 0.6 to 2.0. HyCyc uses the
empirical pressure drop correlation (Dahlstrom, D.A., 1954):
Q
0 .5
= 6.38 ( Do × Di ) 0.9
H
Where:

Q = Volumetric flow rate (US gallons/minute) at the inlet
H = Height of fluid (feet) or length of vortex finder
Do = Overflow diameter
Di = Inlet diameter
Hydrocyclone The next figure shows the HyCyc geometry.
Dimensions Dc
Inlet Di
Do
Du
Hydrocyclone Dimensions
The following table describes the HyCyc dimensions.

Term Description
Dc Chamber diameter
Di Inlet diameter
Do Overflow diameter
Du Underflow diameter
L Length of hydrocyclone
θ Cone angle
References Bradley, D., The Hydrocyclone, 1st edition, Pergamon Press,
London (1965).
Yoshioka, H. and Hatta, Y., Kagaku Kagolar, Chemical
Engineering, Japan, 19, 633 (1955).

Dahlstrom, D.A., "Mineral Engineering Techniques," Chemical
Engineering Progress Symposium Series 50, No. 15, 41 (1954).
Moder, J.M. and Dahlstrom, D.A., Chemical Engineering
Progress, 48,75 (1952).

CFuge Reference
Use CFuge to simulate centrifuge filters. The centrifuge filters
separate liquids and solids by the centrifugal force of a rotating
basket.
Use CFuge to rate or size centrifuge filters.
CFuge assumes that the separation efficiency of the solids equals
1, so that the outlet filtrate stream contains no residual solids.
CFuge:
Input Specify centrifuge and filter cake parameters and
centrifuge dimensions
Results View summary of CFuge results and material
and energy balances
Flowsheet
Connectivity for Liquid
CFuge Feed
Solids
Material Streams

outlet One material stream for the liquid
If you specify the particle size distribution (PSD), CFuge
calculates the average particle size.

Specifying CFuge Use the Input Specifications sheet to specify operating conditions
and the Input FilterCake sheet to specify filter cake properties.
To perform Enter CFuge calculates
these
calculations
Rating Diameter Filtrate flow rate
Rate of revolution Filter cake moisture content
Filter cake properties Height of centrifuge basket
Sizing List of centrifuge diameters Filtrate flow rate
and rates of revolution Filter cake moisture content
Filter cake moisture content Height of centrifuge basket
(CFuge estimates if not
entered)
For sizing calculations, CFuge also calculates the liquid-handling
capacities of all of the centrifuges you specify. CFuge selects the
centrifuge with a liquid-handling capacity greater than or equal to
the required filtrate flow rate. If more than one centrifuge satisfies
this criterion, CFuge selects the one with the smallest capacity. If
none of the centrifuges satisfies this criterion, CFuge selects the
one with the highest filtrate flow rate.
In both rating and sizing calculations, CFuge calculates the content
and height of the centrifuge basket.
Filter Cake Use the Input FilterCake sheet to specify:
Characteristics
• Cake resistance
• Moisture Content
• Sphericity
• Medium resistance
• Porosity
• The average diameter of the solid particles in the cake
The filter cake moisture content is the ratio of the mass flow rate of
liquid to that of the solid in the outlet solids stream. The filter cake
moisture content is an important design parameter. You should
provide it if possible. If you do not enter it, CFuge calculates an
estimate from the average particle diameter and cake parameters
(Dombrowski, H.S., and Brownell, L.E., 1954).
If you enter the particle size distribution (PSD) of the inlet solid
stream, CFuge calculates the average particle diameter, so you do
not need to enter average diameter on the Input FilterCake sheet.

Filtrate Flow Rate CFuge calculates the filtrate volumetric flow rate from:
1
Q= ( F − WM )
ρl
Where:
F = Feed liquid volumetric flow rate
M = Moisture content, mass of liquid/mass of dried solid
(specified as Moisture Content on the FilterCake
sheet or calculated by the model)
W = Dry solids feed rate
ρl = Liquid density
Pressure Drop CFuge calculates the pressure drop (Grace, H.P., 1953) across the
filter cake as:
ρ l ω 2 (r22 − r12 )
∆p =
2
Where:
ω = Rotational speed
r1 = Radius of liquid surface
r2 = Radius of inner wall of bowl
ρl = Liquid density
Separation Efficiency Separation efficiency, E, is defined as:
underflow rate of solids
E=
feedflow rate of solids
CFuge assumes that the separation efficiency of the solids equals
1, so that the outlet filtrate stream contains no residual solids.
References Dombrowski, H.S., and Brownell, L.E., Industrial and
Engineering Chemistry, 46, 6, 1207 (1954).
Grace, H.P., Chemical Engineering Progress, 49, 8, 427 (1953).

Filter Reference
Use Filter to simulate continuous rotary vacuum filters. You can
use Filter to rate or size rotary vacuum filters.
Filter assumes the separation efficiency of the solids equals 1, so
that the outlet filtrate stream contains no residual solids.
Filter:
Input Specify filter and filter cake parameters
Results View summary of Filter results and material and
energy balances
Flowsheet
Connectivity for Filter
Filtrate
Feed
Solids
Material Streams

outlet One material stream for the liquid filtrate
Specifying Filter Use the Input Specifications sheet to specify operating conditions
and parameters.
To perform these Enter Filter
calculations calculates
Rating Simulation Pressure drop
Diameter across filter
Width
Rate of revolution
Filter cake characteristics (optional)
Sizing Design Diameter
Maximum allowable pressure drop Width
across the filter cake and medium
Rate of revolution
Filter cake characteristics (optional)
Width to diameter ratio (optional)

In both calculation modes, Aspen Plus determines the following:
• Filtrate volumetric flow rate
• Cake thickness
• Mass fraction of solids in the solids filter cake
Filter Cake Filter assumes:
Characteristics
• The cake thickness is greater than 0.00635 m.
• The capillary number is greater than 1.
• The filter cake is incompressible or compacted uniformly
throughout its thickness (Dombrowski, H. S., and Brownell,
L.E., 1954).
When the specific cake resistance α at the required pressure drop
∆P is not available, Filter can estimate it using the following
empirical correlation:
α = α O ( ∆P) k
Where:
αO = Specific cake resistance at unit pressure drop
k = Cake compressibility
You can use this equation for interpolation and short-range
extrapolation when some experimental data of α O and ∆P are
available. α O is the intercept of the log-log plot of α versus ∆P. α
and α O both have the units determined by the specified units set,
and ∆P is always in Pascals.
Use the Average Diameter field on the FilterCake sheet to specify
the average diameter of solid particles in the filter cake. If you
enter the particle size distribution (PSD) of the inlet solid stream,
Filter calculates the average particle size.
Pressure Drop Filter calculates the pressure drop (Brownell, L.E., and Katz, D.I.,
1947) across the filter cake with:
1/ 2
 2 ∆ pωθ V 
Q = ω RHV = RH  
 µα W 
Where:
Q = Filtrate volume flow rate
ω = Angular velocity
R = Radius
H = Width

V = Filtrate volume per unit area
∆p = Pressure drop
θ = Wetting angle
µ = Viscosity
α = Filtration resistance
W = Solid mass per unit area
Separation Efficiency Separation efficiency, E, is defined as:
underflow rate of solids
E=
feedflow rate of solids
Filter assumes the separation efficiency of the solids equals 1, so

that the outlet filtrate stream contains no residual solids.
References Brownell, L.E. and Katz, D. I., Chemical Engineering Progress,
43, 11, 601 (1947).
Dombrowski, H.S. and Brownell, L.E., Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry, 46, 6, 1207 (1954).

SWash Reference
Use SWash to simulate solids washers in which dissolved
components in the entrained liquid of a solids stream are recovered
by a washing liquid. SWash simulates a single-stage solids washer;
it does not consider the presence of a vapor phase.
SWash calculates the flow rates and compositions of the outlet
solids and liquid streams from a user-specified liquid-to-solid mass
ratio of the outlet solids stream and the mixing efficiency of the
washer. For non-adiabatic operations, SWash determines the outlet
temperature when outlet pressure and heat duty are given.
Alternatively, SWash calculates the required heat duty when outlet
temperature and pressure are specified.
SWash:
Input Specify operating parameters, flash
specifications, and convergence parameters
Results View summary of SWash results and material
and energy balances
Flowsheet
Liquid Liquid
Connectivity for
SWash
Solids Solids
Heat (optional) Heat (optional)
Material Streams
inlet One stream for the solids particles with an entrained liquid
One stream for the washing liquid
outlet One stream for the washed solids particles
One stream for the washing liquid and entrained liquid
from the inlet solids stream
Heat Streams
inlet One stream for heat duty (optional)

outlet One stream for net heat duty (optional)

If you specify only pressure on the Input OutletFlash sheet, SWash
uses the inlet heat stream as a duty specification. Otherwise,
SWash only uses the inlet heat stream to calculate the net heat
duty. The net heat duty is the inlet heat stream minus the actual
Specifying SWash You must specify the mixing efficiency of the washer and the
liquid-to-solid mass ratio of the outlet solids stream. For non-
adiabatic operations, you must specify the pressure of the washer
and one of the following:
• The temperature of the washer
• Heat duty (or an inlet heat stream without an outlet heat
stream)
Alternatively, SWash calculates the required heat duty when outlet
temperature and pressure are specified.
SWash assumes adiabatic operations if neither temperature nor
heat duty is specified.
Mixing Efficiency The mixing efficiency of the washer, E, is defined as:
S
x IN − xOUT
S
E= S
x IN − xOUT
L
Where:
S
x IN = Mass fraction of dissolved components in the
entrained liquid of the inlet solids stream
S
xOUT = Mass fraction of dissolved components in the
entrained liquid of the outlet solids stream
L
x OUT = Mass fraction of dissolved components in the outlet
liquid stream
Bypass Fraction The bypass fraction is the fraction of liquid in the feed that
bypasses the mixing, when mixing efficiency is less than 1. It is
calculated as:
liquid − to − solid ratio specified for SWash
Bypass fraction = (1 − mixing efficiency) ×
liquid − to − solid ratio in inlet solids stream

CCD Reference
CCD simulates a counter-current decanter or a multistage washer.
CCD calculates the outlet flow rates and compositions from:
• Mixing efficiency
• Liquid-to-solid mass ratio of each stage
CCD can calculate:
• The heat duty profile from a specified temperature profile
• The temperature profile from a specified heat duty profile
CCD does not consider a vapor phase.
CCD:
Input Specify operating parameters, temperature
profile parameters, pseudostream information,
and convergence parameters
Results View summary of CCD results, material and
energy balances, and stage profiles
Flowsheet Solids Overflow
(Top feed)
Connectivity for CCD
1
Feed To Product From
Underflow Overflow
Product From Feed To

Underflow Overflow
Nstage
Washing
Underflow Liquid
(Bottom feed)
Material Streams
inlet One solids inlet material stream (top feed)

One liquid inlet material stream (bottom feed)
Any number of optional inlet material side streams per
stage

outlet One top product stream (overflow)
One bottom product stream (underflow)
One optional stream per stage for the solids (underflow)
One optional stream per stage for the liquid (overflow)
Any number of pseudoproduct streams can represent internal
underflows or overflows. A pseudoproduct stream does not affect
the results of the simulation.
Specifying CCD Use the CCD Input Specifications sheet to enter the number of
stages, pressure, mixing efficiency, and liquid-to-solid mass ratio.
Use the CCD Input Streams to enter feed, product, and optional
heat stream locations.
On the CCD Input Temp-DutyProfiles sheet, note the following:
If you enter CCD calculates
Stage temperature Stage heat duty.
Stage heat duty Stage temperature.
Stage overall heat transfer coefficient Stage temperature.
You cannot enter both temperature profiles and heat duties or
overall heat transfer coefficients. If you enter stage heat duty
and/or an overall heat transfer coefficient, and you do not enter
values for all stages, the system assumes unspecified values to be
zero. Enter the medium temperature of each stage when you enter
overall heat transfer coefficients. Use the Estimated Temperature
field to enter estimated stage temperatures.
Note: CCD interpolates unspecified values and, by default,

assumes them to be the same as the ambient temperature.
Use the CCD Input PseudoStream sheet to transfer the internal

overflow or underflow of a stage to a pseudostream.
Component Attributes CCD does not consider the mixing of component attributes and
PSDs. CCD assumes all outlet solids streams have the same
attributes and PSD as the solids feed stream to stage one. CCD also
assumes all outlet liquid streams have the same attributes and PSD
as the liquid feed stream throughout the final stages.
Multistage Washer For any CCD profile, such as mixing efficiency, liquid-to-solid-
Profiles ratio, temperature, duty, enter a value for every stage, as
information becomes available. If you enter only some of the
values for some stages, CCD generates the complete profile by
linear interpolation of the given values. If you enter only one
value, CCD assumes a constant profile of that value throughout the
washer.

Mixing Efficiency The mixing efficiency of stage n is defined as:
S
x IN − xOUT
S
E= S
x IN − xOUT
L
Where:
S
x IN = Mass fraction of dissolved components in the
entrained liquid of the total inlet solids stream to
stage n.
S
x OUT = Mass fraction of dissolved components in the
entrained liquid of the total outlet solids stream from
stage n.
L
x OUT = Mass fraction of dissolved components in the outlet
liquid stream from stage n.
Medium Temperature The duty for each stage is calculated according to the following
equations:
Qi = UAi (Tcalci − Tmed i )
Where:
Qi = Heat duty for stage i
UAi = Product of heat transfer coefficient and area for
stage i
Tcalci = Calculated outlet temperature of stage i
Tmed i = Temperature of the heat transfer medium at stage i

CHAPTER 9
User Models
This chapter describes the models that allow you to add custom
extensions to Aspen Plus.
User and User2 allow you to write your own unit operation models
as Fortran subroutines. These subroutines must follow the
guidelines described in the Aspen Plus User Models reference
manual. User2 can also be used with a unit operation model written
as an Excel spreadsheet. User3 allows you to use custom or
external models with equation-oriented formulations. The models
are:
User User-defined unit Model a unit operation using a Unit operations with four (or fewer)
operation model user-supplied Fortran subroutine inlet and outlet streams
User2 User-defined unit Model a unit operation using a Unit operations with no limit on
operation model user-supplied Fortran subroutine. number of streams
User3 User-defined or Run built-in models from RT- Unit operations with equation-
external unit-operation Opt, Aspen EO models from the oriented formulations
model PML model library, or models
written by a user that may contain
proprietary models
ACMUser3 Aspen Custom Models a unit operation using Unit operation models created with
Modeler models Aspen Custom Modeler Aspen Custom Modeler
Hierarchy blocks allow you to organize complex flowsheets in a
hierarchical manner. When a user model template containing
multiple blocks is placed on a flowsheet, it automatically appears
inside a Hierarchy block. See the Aspen Plus User Guide, chapter
16, for more information on creating these templates. You may
also use Hierarchy blocks directly, without using a template.
Hierarchy Hierarchical structure Create a hierarchical structure to Container for other blocks
organize complex flowsheets.
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models User Models • 9-1

User Reference
User can model any unit operation model. You must write a
Fortran subroutine to calculate the values of the outlet streams
based on the inlet streams and parameters you specify.
User and User2 differ only in the number of inlet and outlet
streams allowed and the argument lists to the model subroutine.
User is limited to a maximum of four material and one heat or
work inlet stream and a maximum of four material and one heat or
work outlet stream. User2 has no limits on the number of inlet and
outlet streams.
User:
Input Specify name and parameters for user subroutine,
calculation options, and outlet stream conditions
and flash convergence parameters
Results View summary of User results and material and
energy balances
Flowsheet Material
Connectivity for User Heat (optional) Heat (optional)
Work (optional) Work (optional)
Material Streams
inlet One to four inlet material streams

outlet One to four outlet material streams
Heat Streams
inlet One heat stream (optional)

Work Streams
inlet One work stream (optional)

outlet One work stream (optional)
9-2 • User Models Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

You must specify the name of the subroutine model on the Input
Specifying User
Specifications sheet. You have the option of specifying:
• A report subroutine name
• Size of the integer and real arrays (INT and REAL) passed to
the user model subroutine
• Values of the integer and real arrays passed to the user model
subroutine
• Length of integer and real workspace vectors
• Thermodynamic conditions of each outlet stream
• Type of flash calculations (vapor, liquid, two-phase, three-
phase)
For information on writing Fortran subroutines for user models,
see Aspen Plus User Models reference manual.

User2 Reference
User2 can model any unit operation model. You must write a
Fortran subroutine to calculate the values of the outlet streams
based on the inlet streams and parameters you specify.
User and User2 differ only in the number of inlet and outlet
streams allowed and the argument lists to the model subroutine.
User2 has no limits on the number of inlet and outlet streams. User
is limited to a maximum of four material and one heat or work
inlet stream, and a maximum of four material and one heat or work
outlet stream.
User2:
Setup Specify name and parameters for the user
subroutine, excel file name, values of
configured variables, calculation options,
outlet stream conditions, and flash
BlockOptions Override global values for physical
properties, simulation options, diagnostic
message levels, and report options for this
block
Results View summary of User2 results, material
and energy balances, and the values of the
configured variables.
Flowsheet Material
Connectivity for Heat (optional) Heat (optional)
User2 Work (optional) Work (optional)
Material Streams

outlet At least one outlet material stream
Heat Streams

outlet Any number of heat streams (optional)
Work Streams

outlet Any number of work streams (optional)

You must specify the name of the subroutine model on the User2
Specifying User2
Input Specifications sheet. You have the option of specifying:
subroutine
phase)
For information on writing Fortran subroutines for user models,
see Aspen Plus User Models reference manual.

User3 Reference
User3 models are used to simulate features that are not in the
standard Aspen Plus models. They can be one of three types: old
built-in models from RT-Opt (like R3HTUA), Aspen EO models
from the PML model library (like EOTRAYDP) or models written
by a user that may contain proprietary models (like a reactor).
the User3 model:
Setup Specify name and parameters for the user
subroutine or Aspen EO model, values of
configured variables, calculation options, outlet
stream conditions, and flash convergence
parameters.
Parameters Specify Jacobian calculation options and run
options for the Aspen EO model.
Attributes Specify attributes of variables and equations of the
model.
report options for this block.
Results View summary of User3 results, material and
energy balances, and the values of the configured
variables.
changes for this block, for the current run only.
block.
Spec Groups Specify the specification groups for this block.
for this block.
Flowsheet Material (optional) Material (optional)
Connectivity for Heat (optional) Heat (optional)
User3 Work (optional) Work (optional)
inlet Any number of inlet material, heat, and/or work streams

outlet Any number of outlet material, heat, and/or work streams
The number and types of streams connected to a User3 model
depends on the type and configuration of that specific model.

Specifying User3 You must specify the name of the model subroutine or Aspen EO
model on the User3 Input Specifications sheet. You have the
option of specifying:
subroutine
phase)
• Name and location of the configuration file, if using an Aspen
EO model
• Values of variables on the Attributes form, as needed to make
the problem square
To import a User3 model written for RT-Opt version 3 or 10 with
Aspen Plus 11:
1 Export an .inp file from the prior version of RT_OPT.
2 Replace the word STRVAR with ANALYZER.
3 Delete any EBS setup scripts.
4 Use the version 11 engine to generate a .bkp file from the .inp
file with the command
ASPEN filename /mmbackup /itonly
You can retain your graphics by copying the graphic section
from the previous version’s .bkp file to this newly created .bkp
file.
5 Load the new .bkp file. The User3 forms should be populated.
6 On the top-level EO Configuration EO Options form, select
the Model Types sheet.
7 From the list of models select USER3. Click Additional
Options.
8 In the EO Formulation field, choose mole flows.
User3 formulation. However, the capabilities are still available for the EO
• Flash specifications

ACMUser3 Reference
ACMUser3 allows models created with Aspen Custom Modeler
(ACM) to be used as unit operation models in Aspen Plus.
ACMUser3:
Setup Specify ports for inlet and outlet streams, values of
ACM variables, calculation options, and outlet
stream flash options
Results View material and energy balances and values of the
ACM variables.
Flowsheet
Connectivity for
ACMUser3
Feed Product
Material Streams
inlet A number of material streams defined by the ACM model

outlet A number of material streams defined by the ACM model
ACMUser3 does not allow heat or work streams.
Specifying ACMUser3 ACMUser3 requires one stream to be attached to each inlet and
outlet port defined in the Aspen Custom Modeler model.
Adding ACM Models to To use an ACM model with Aspen Plus, first build an Aspen Plus
the Aspen Plus Model model library file (.apm file) within ACM (see the ACM
Library documentation for more information). To use this model in Aspen
Plus:
1 From the Library menu, select References...
2 Click the Browse button and select the file containing the
library.
3 Select the check box next to the name of the new model.
4 Click OK. A new tab containing the ACM model will be added
to the Model Library in Aspen Plus.

To save this setting, so that this model will always appear in the
Model Library in Aspen Plus, from the Library menu, select Save
Default.
Now, you may use this model in Aspen Plus in the same way as
any other model.

Hierarchy Reference
Use Hierarchy blocks to provide hierarchical structure to complex
simulations. Also, Hierarchy blocks may be added automatically
when importing templates into a simulation. Hierarchy blocks may
contain streams and other blocks (even other Hierarchy blocks) as
well other features like design specifications and sensitivity
problems.
Hierarchy blocks contain Setup and Properties forms with some of
the same information as the top-level Setup and Properties forms.
The settings on these forms override the settings on the
corresponding forms at higher-level Hierarchy blocks or the top
level of the simulation for blocks within the Hierarchy block.
Hierarchy blocks also contain forms for Streams, Blocks,
Convergence, Flowsheeting Options, Model Analysis Tools, and
Results Summary. These forms are used for working with such
objects within the Hierarchy block, and they will not affect higher-
level Hierarchy blocks or the top level of the simulation except
through the outlet streams of the Hierarchy block.
Hierarchy:
Input Specify components for use within the Hierarchy
block, and view connections to streams outside
the Hierarchy block.
Setup Override settings from the top-level Setup forms.
Properties Override settings from the top-level Properties
forms.
Streams View or enter information about streams within
Blocks View or enter information about blocks within
Convergence Define convergence and sequence information
within the Hierarchy block.
Flowsheeting Define design-specs, calculator, transfer, balance,
Options and pressure relief blocks within the Hierarchy
block.
Model Analysis Define sensitivity, optimization, constraint, and
Tools data-fit blocks within the Hierarchy block.
Results Summary View a summary of stream results within the
Hierarchy block.

A Hierarchy block may have any number of inlet and outlet
Flowsheet
streams of any types (material, heat, and work). Each external
Connectivity for
stream connected to the Hierarchy block is attached to a stream
Hierarchy
within the Hierarchy block. Each stream within the Hierarchy
block with an unconnected source or destination creates a port to
which an external stream may be connected.
Specifying Hierarchy Hierarchy normally does not need any specifications.
You may specify the group of components to be shown within the
Hierarchy block on the Input Specifications Sheet.
To access the flowsheet within a Hierarchy block, double-click on
the block. A new flowsheet window will open, containing the
flowsheet inside the Hierarchy block.

C H A P T E R 10
Pressure Relief
This section contains detailed reference information on the

Aspen Plus Pres-Relief model for pressure relief calculations. For
information on using Pres-Relief, see the Aspen Plus User Guide,
Chapter 33.
This section describes the following topics:
• Relief scenarios
• Code compliance checks
• Stream and vessel compositions and conditions
• Rules to size the relief valve piping
• Reactions
• Relief system
• Data tables for pipes and relief devices
• Valve cycling
• Vessel types
• Disengagement models
• Stop criteria
• Solution procedure for dynamic scenarios
• Flow equations
• Calculation and convergence methods
• Vessel insulation credit factor
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Pressure Relief • 10-1

Pres-Relief Reference
Use Pres-Relief to do either of the following:
• Determine the steady-state flow rating of pressure relief
systems
• Dynamically model vessels undergoing pressure relief due to a
fire or heat input specified by the user. You may specify that
reactions occur in the vessel.
Pres-Relief.
Setup Specify pressure relief scenario, general specifications,
stream or initial vessel conditions, design rules, and
any reactions that occur
Relief Device Specify the type of relief device and configuration,
and the characteristics of the device
Inlet Pipes Specify piping, fittings, and valves immediately
upstream of the relief device
Tail Pipes Specify piping, fittings, and valves immediately
downstream of the relief device
Dynamic Input Specify parameters describing the dynamic event
Operations Specify criteria that will terminate the dynamic
simulation
Convergence Override default methods and convergence parameters
for the algorithms involved in the pressure relief
simulation
Block Options Override default methods and options for property
calculation, simulation, diagnostics, and reporting
Steady State Review calculated results and profiles for the steady-
Results state scenarios
Dynamic Results Review calculated results and profiles for the dynamic
scenarios
Specifying Pres- Use Pres-Relief to do either of the following:
Relief • Determine the steady-state flow rating of pressure relief
systems
• Dynamically model vessels undergoing pressure relief due to a
fire or heat input specified by the user. You may specify that
reactions occur in the vessel
Use the Setup form to specify the pressure relief scenario, general
specifications such as the discharge pressure and the estimated
10-2 • Pressure Relief Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

flow rate, inlet stream conditions, initial vessel conditions, design
rules, and any reactions (dynamic scenarios only) that occur.
Use the Relief Device form to specify the relief system. You must
select a relief device and specify its characteristics. You must also
specify the vessel neck and the number of inlet and tail pipe
sections to be used.
Use the Dynamic Input form to specify the required parameters for
dynamic scenarios. These include vessel specifications,
disengagement models and details specific to the chosen scenario.
For the fire scenario, you must specify the fire standard and the
credits to be used. When the scenario is Dynamic run with
specified heat flux, you must specify the heat input parameters.
When the number of inlet and tail pipe sections exceeds 0, you
must specify the details for each section in the Inlet Pipes and Tail
Pipes forms.
For dynamic scenarios, use the Operations form to specify one or
more variables to be used as stop criteria. The simulation will stop
when the value of any of these variables exceeds the user-specified
limit.
Scenarios Scenarios are situations that cause venting through the pressure
relief system to occur. Pres-Relief supports the following
scenarios:
• Dynamic run with vessel engulfed by fire
• Dynamic run with specified heat flux into vessel
• Steady state flow rating of relief system
• Steady state flow rating of relief valve
Dynamic Run with Vessel Use this scenario to model a vessel engulfed by fire. You must
Engulfed by Fire specify the vessel geometry and initial composition. Aspen Plus
can compute the energy input for this scenario according to the
following standards:
• NFPA-30
• API-520
• API-2000
Aspen Plus assumes the calculated energy input is constant during
the entire venting transient. Aspen Plus uses credit factors for
drainage, water-spray, fire-fighting equipment, and insulation to
reduce energy input, if appropriate for the chosen standard. You
may specify a total credit factor instead of individual credit factors.
You must specify the fire duration time. This is a dynamic
scenario. The vessel contents and relief rate change as a function of
time.

Aspen Plus calculates wetted area, energy input, and credit factors
differently for each of the three standards.
Calculation of Wetted
Area
Vessel NFPA-30 API-2000 API-520

type
Horizontal 75% of total exposed 75 % of total area or area to a Wetted area up to 25 ft. above grade
area height of 30 ft. above grade, (based on specified liquid level)
whichever is greater
Vertical Area up to 30 ft. above Area up to 30 ft. above grade. If Wetted area up to 25 ft above grade
grade. Bottom plate is on ground, bottom plate is not (based on specified liquid level).
included if exposed included. Bottom plate is included if exposed.
Sphere 55 % of total exposed 55% of surface area, or surface Up to a maximum horizontal
area area to a height 30 ft. above diameter or up to height of 25 ft.
grade, whichever is greater above grade, whichever is greater
Calculation of Q (Btu/hr), NFPA-30 and API-2000
Based on Area (sq ft) Area range Heat input
20 < Area < 200 Q = (credit factor )20,000 Area
200 < Area < 1000 Q = (credit factor )199,300 Area 0.566
1000 < Area < 2800 Q = (credit factor )963,400 Area 0.338
2800 < Area Q = (credit factor )21,000 Area 0.82
For NFPA-30 , QMAX=14,090,000 at 2800 square feet if
operating pressure < 1 PSIG
API-520
Heat input
Q = (credit factor )34,500 Area 0.82 , the default credit factor being 1

Calculation of Credit
Factors
Type NFPA-30 API-2000 API-520
Insulation only .3 F=K(1660-TF)/21,000t Same as API-2000
You must specify F
Drainage only .5 1. Not defined
(Area > 200 sq. ft.)
Water and drainage .3 1. Not defined
Water, insulation, and .15 NSUL Not defined
drainage (Area > 200 sq. ft.)
Insulation and drainage .15 Not defined Not defined
(Area > 200 sq. ft.)
Drainage and prompt No credit Not defined 0.6*INSUL
fire fighting effort
Portable No credit factors Not defined Not defined
allowed
Dynamic Run with This scenario is similar to the fire exposure scenario, except it can
Specified Heat Flux into model any energy input. Aspen Plus can compute the energy input
Vessel for this scenario in three ways depending on whether you specify:
• A constant duty
• A duty profile
• An area for heat transfer, a heat transfer coefficient, and a
source fluid temperature
This scenario is a dynamic scenario and is typically used for
electrical heaters and other energy sources.
Steady State Flow Rating Use this scenario to find the flow rate through a specified relief
of Relief System system at the specified composition. For this scenario, you must
enter your own :
• Relief rate
• Piping description
• Feed stream composition
• Feed stream condition
Steady State Flow Rating Use this scenario to find the flow rate through a valve, given the
of Relief Valve composition and condition at the entrance to the valve. This is the
simplest scenario. It is similar to the steady state flow rating of
relief system scenario, except no piping is allowed.

Compliance with Pres-Relief allows two types of runs:
Codes • Code capacity
• Actual capacity
The primary purpose of the code capacity run is to ensure that the
capacity of the relief system, rated as required by code, exceeds the
maximum capacity dictated by the scenario. The maximum
pressure reached during the relief event must be less than the code
allowable accumulation. The Code Capacity run includes the:
• ASME valve rating factor of .90
• Valve flow coefficient
• A combination coefficient
The combination coefficient is only included if a rupture disk/relief
valve combination is being designed. Typical combination
coefficients for NBBI certified combinations are close to 1.00. If
the combination is not certified, the ASME code requires a
combination coefficient of .90. The primary purpose of the actual
capacity run is to provide the best estimate of the actual flow
through the system. Design of downstream equipment (other than
the tail pipe) is one example why you might need this information.
The actual capacity run contains the valve flow coefficient, but not
the ASME valve rating factor of .90 or the combination coefficient.
Stream and Vessel For the steady-state scenarios, you must specify the composition
Compositions and and conditions (two of temperature, pressure, and vapor fraction)
Conditions of the feed stream. You can do this on the Setup Streams sheet in
two ways:
• Reference an Aspen Plus stream
• Give the composition and conditions of the stream as input to
Pres-Relief
For the dynamic scenarios, you must specify the composition and
the conditions in the vessel at the beginning of the pressure relief
calculations. Do this by referencing an Aspen Plus stream, or by
specifying the composition and two of temperature, pressure, and
vapor fraction on the Setup Vessel Contents sheet. As with the
steady-state scenarios, you may reference an Aspen Plus stream or
give the composition and conditions as input to Pres-Relief. When
vapor fraction is not specified, you may also specify:
• Initial liquid fill fraction (fillage) of the vessel
• Pad-gas pressure and Component ID
Only two of temperature, pressure, and vapor fraction can be
specified or referenced from a stream.

Aspen Plus uses several rules (3% rule, X% rule, and 97% rule) to
Rules to Size the
size the inlet and outlet piping with PSVs. The rules use the
Relief Valve Piping
following terminology:
DSP = Differential set pressure
CBP = Constant back pressure
Psta = Static pressure
Ptot = Static pressure + velocity pressure
IDP = Inlet pressure drop
= Ptot (vessel) - Ptot (valve in)
BBP = Built-up back pressure
= Psta (valve out) - CBP
These rules are applied for both actual and code capacity runs and
are applied at the converged solution for the steady-state scenarios.
For dynamic scenarios, the 3% Rule and X% Rule are applied
once, at 10% overpressure. If all pressures are above 10%
overpressure, the test is not performed and a warning is issued. If
all pressures are below 10% overpressure, the highest pressure
value is scaled up to 10% overpressure, and the scaled values are
used in applying the rule. The 97% rule is applied when the
pressure at the valve inlet is at or above 10% overpressure.
None of the required standards mentions any of these rules except
for the X% rule with X=10. The X% rule is mentioned in the non-
mandatory appendix of the ASME code.
3% Rule According to the 3% rule, the total pressure loss in the inlet must
be less than 3% of the differential set pressure when the flow rate
is equal to the code capacity of the valve at 10% overpressure.
IDP ≤ 0.03DSP
For cases where the overpressure does not reach 10%, adjust the
pressure drop rule by multiplying by the ratio of the maximum
flowing pressure to 10% overpressure (psig).
RP
IDP ≤ 0.03
11
. SP
X% Rule According to the X% rule, the built-up back pressure must be less
than X% of the differential set pressure when the flow rate is equal
to the code capacity of the valve at 10% overpressure.
X
BBP ≤ DSP
100

For cases where the overpressure does not reach 10% adjust the
pressure drop rule by multiplying by the square of the ratio of the
maximum flowing pressure to 10% overpressure (psig).
2
X  RP 
BBP ≤  
100  11
. PS 
97% Rule According to the 97% rule, 97% of the differential set pressure
must be available across the valve anytime the over pressure is
equal to or above 10% with a flow through the valve based on code
capacity.
RP − CBP − IDP − BBP ≥ 0.97 DSP
For cases where the overpressure does not reach 10%, apply the
rule at peak overpressure.
Recommendations for For standard spring loaded valves or pop action pilot valves with
Specific Valve Types unbalanced pilots vented to the discharge:
The differential set pressure is the set pressure minus the constant
back pressure.
DSP = SP − CBP
Size the inlet piping using the 3% rule.
Size the outlet piping using the 97% rule.
-Or-
Size the outlet piping with the X% rule using X = 10.
For balanced bellows spring loaded valves:
The differential set pressure is the set pressure.
DSP = SP
Size the inlet piping using the 3% rule.
For modulating pilot operated valves with balanced pilots or
pilots vented to atmosphere:
The differential set pressure is the set pressure.
DSP = SP
You can use the scenario required flow rather than the valve
capacity for pressure drop calculations as an option. This can
easily be simulated by changing the input orifice area until the
overpressure reaches 10%.
There is no inlet pressure drop rule.

Reactions If the protected vessel is a vertical, horizontal, API, spherical , or
user-specified tank, you may model it with or without reactions.
Specify the reactions by giving the Reactions ID on the Setup
Reactions sheet.
Relief System The venting system consists of:
• A vessel neck
• One or two sections of inlet pipe
• The relief device itself
• One or two sections of tail pipe
In a simulation, the system being modeled may consist of an inlet
pipe without a relief device, or a relief device connected to the
vessel without an inlet pipe. The tail pipe is optional.
Relief Devices Pres-Relief can model the following types of relief devices:
• Safety relief valves (PSVs; both liquid and gas/2-phase)
• Rupture disks (PSDs)
• Emergency relief valves (ERVs)
• SRV/rupture disk combinations
• Open vent pipes
Internal tables (accessed from the ReliefDevice SafetyValve sheet)
contain several standard commercially available valves, along with
all the mechanical specifications and certified coefficients needed
in the relief calculations. You may choose one valve from the
tables, or enter your own valve specifications and coefficients.
For liquid service valves, you must also specify the full-lift
overpressure. This allows Aspen Plus to simulate some of the older
style valves which do not achieve full lift until 25% overpressure is
reached.
For gas/2-phase service valves, you must also specify the average
opening and closing factors. The valve does not open until the
pressure drop across the valve reaches (opening factor * Dif-Setp).
The valve closes when the pressure drop across it reaches (closing
factor * Dif-Setp).
In an actual capacity run, the rupture disk is modeled as a bit of
resistance using the pipe model. The default value of L/D is 8 for a
rupture disk with a diameter of 2 inches or less and 15 if the
diameter is greater than 2 inches. You can override the default by
specifying a value on the Relief Device Rupture Disk sheet.
In the code capacity run, the rupture disk is modeled as an ideal
nozzle with a certified discharge coefficient. If no certified
discharge coefficient is available, a value of 0.62 is suggested.

In a code capacity run in combination with a safety relief valve, the
resistance of the rupture disk is modeled by the combination
coefficient in the valve model.
The emergency relief vent is modeled as a nozzle. A de-rating
factor of 0.9 is used in a code capacity run.
Piping System The inlet piping system can be made of one of the following:
• One pipe section
• Two sections of pipe plus a vessel neck, all with different
diameters
The tail pipe can be made of one section of pipe or of two sections
of pipe with different diameters.
For each pipe section, specify:
• Pipe diameter
• Length
• Elevation
• Whether the pipes are screwed together or held together with
flanges or welds
If pipes of different diameters are used, reducer and expander
resistance coefficients ("K" factors) can be specified. Aspen Plus
uses the equation K =4*fr*(L/D) to convert from resistance
coefficients to equivalent L/D, where the term "fr" is the friction
factor. Optional information for each section consists of the
number of 90 degree elbows, straight tees, branched tees, gate
valves, butterfly valves, transflo valves, and control valves. You
can add other fittings not listed by specifying the L/D value.
Aspen Plus calculates a total equivalent L/D before modeling the
pipe section.
You may also specify:
• Ambient temperature at the inlet and outlet of the pipe
• A heat transfer coefficient to exchange heat with the pipe
contents
While modeling the pipe section, Aspen Plus detects the choked
condition in the pipe by keeping track of the Mach Number as
integration down the pipe proceeds. If the Mach Number goes
above 1.0, integration is stopped and a flag is returned to indicate
that the pipe choked.
Pipeline pressure drop modeling can work in two ways. You may
specify one of the following:
• Rigorous flashes are to be done at each step in the integration
• A flash table is used during pipe integration

If you request a table, specify the number of temperature and
pressure points in the table. At each temperature-pressure pair,
Aspen Plus performs a flash and calculates all necessary properties
(density, viscosity, surface tension, and so on). As integration
proceeds, Aspen Plus interpolates in this table to get the necessary
properties. If properties outside the table are needed, a rigorous
flash is performed at that point. In general, the pipe integration
proceeds faster if the flash table is used. Several correlations are
available, depending on the pipe inclination. The default method
for all inclinations (holdup and frictional pressure loss) is Beggs
and Brill. Other available options are:
• Darcy
• Lockhart-Martinelli
• Dukler for frictional loss
• Lockhart-Martinelli, Slack, and Flanigan for holdup

Data Tables for Pipes Pres-Relief includes several customizable tables that list the
and Relief Devices available options for pipes, general purpose valves, safety relief
valves, emergency relief vents, and rupture disks. You can modify
the tables by changing data files. Then process the files through
ModelManager Table Building System (MMTBS).
Pipes Pres-Relief includes a table of actual diameters for several steel
pipe schedules. Use this table when choosing the piping for the
inlet and tail pipes. You can modify this table by including more
pipe materials and/or schedules. The table is organized as follows:
first material of construction
number of types
first type
number of diameters
nominal diameter actual diameter
.
.
second type
number of diameters
.
.
second material of construction
number of types
first type
number of diameters
.
.
second type
number of diameters
.
.

General-Purpose Valves For general-purpose valves in the inlet or tail pipes, Pres-Relief
includes a table of various manufacturers’ valves from 1 inch to 10
inches. The valves include:
• Durco Plug
• Tufline Plug
• Jamesbury Ball
• AGCO Selector
• KTM Ball (L-Port and T-Port)
For each manufacturer, the table contains:
• Valve type (for example., L-Port or T-Port)
• Nominal diameter
• Port area
• Flow coefficient
The table is organized as follows:
first manufacturer
number of types
first type
number of diameters
nominal diameter port area flow coeff
.
.
second type
number of diameters
.
.

Safety Relief Valves Pres-Relief includes a table of manufacturers’ safety relief valves.
It contains valves for liquid and gas/2-phase service. For each
valve, the table contains:
• Service
• Type
• Manufacturer
• Series, size (for example, 3L4)
• Throat diameter
• Inlet diameter
• Outlet diameter
• Discharge coefficient
• Overpressure factor (for liquid service valves)
Service (Liquid, Gas, or 2-phase)
number of types
first type
number of manufacturers
first manufacturer
number of series
first series
number of sizes
first size
number of throat diameters
throat diam inlet diam outlet diam dischg coeff over pr factor
.
.

Emergency Relief Vents This table contains:
• Effective diameter
• Allowed setpoint for several Protectoseal and Groth emergency
relief vents
You must specify an over-pressure factor. The table is organized as
follows:
first manufacturer
# of types
first type
# of nominal diameters
nominal diameter effective diameter allowed setpoint
nominal diameter effective diameter allowed setpoint
.
.
Rupture Disks This table contains manufacturers’ information on rupture disks.
Each entry contains:
• A manufacturer
• Type
• Actual diameter
• Discharge coefficient
first manufacturer
number of types
first type
number of nominal diameters
first nominal diam actual diam discharge coeff
second nominal diam actual diam discharge coeff
.
.
Valve Cycling If a relief valve is too large for a given application, valve cycling
may occur. In this situation, the pressure in the vessel builds up to
a point where the valve opens, but then closes almost immediately
because enough material is released to lower the vessel pressure
below the closing pressure. In some simulations, the valve may
open and close several times per second. The simulation may run
for a long time, just opening and closing the valve over and over.
To stop such a simulation, you can specify whether or not to stop
cycling, and how many openings and closings of the valve are
allowed in a specified amount of time.

Vessel Types You must enter vessel geometry for the dynamic scenarios. You
can choose one of the following vessel types:
• Vertical Vessel
• Horizontal Vessel
• API Tank
• Sphere
• Heat exchanger shell
• Vessel jacket
• User-specified
If you choose user-specified, you must specify surface area and
volume. Surface area is also required for vessel jacket. Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) with corresponding
temperature is required for all vessel types. Some vessel types
require diameter, length, and volume of internals.
Vertical Vessel, If you choose vertical vessel, horizontal vessel, or API tank,
Horizontal Vessel, and choose one of these head types:
API Tank
• Flanged and dished
• Ellipsoidal
• User-specified
If you choose user-specified head type, you must specify the area
and volume of a head.
Sphere If the protected vessel is a sphere, you must specify:
• Diameter
• MAWP with corresponding temperature
• Volume of internals
Heat Exchanger Shell If the protected vessel is a heat exchanger shell, in addition to the
items specified for a vertical vessel you must also specify whether
the vessel is mounted vertically or horizontally.
Vessel Jacket If the protected vessel is a vessel jacket, you must specify:
• Jacket volume
User-Specified If the protected vessel is user-specified, you must specify:
• Volume
• Area

Disengagement The following disengagement options are available:
Models Option Description
Homogeneous Vapor fraction leaving vessel is the same as vapor
fraction in vessel
All-vapor All vapor leaving vessel
All-liquid All liquid leaving vessel
Bubbly DIERS bubbly model
Churn-turbulent DIERS churn-turbulent model
User-specified Homogeneous venting until vessel vapor fraction
reaches the user-specified value, then all vapor venting
For the bubbly and churn-turbulent methods, Aspen Plus uses the
DIERS "switch-point" calculations to compute the point at which
total vapor-liquid disengagement occurs. Use the bubbly and
churn-turbulent models only for vertical or API tanks.
Stop Criteria For dynamic scenarios, stop criteria need to be specified which
will terminate the simulation. You must:
• Select a specification type
• Enter a value for the specification at which the simulation will
stop
• Select a component and substream for component-related
specification types
• Specify which approach direction (above or below) to use in
stopping the simulation
You may select from the following specification types:
• Simulation time
• Vapor fraction in the vessel
• Mole fraction of a specified component
• Mass fraction of a specified component
• Conversion of a specified component
• Total moles or moles of a specified component
• Total mass or mass of a specified component
• Vessel temperature
• Vessel pressure
• Vent mole flow rate or mole flow rate of a component
• Vent mass flow rate or mass flow rate of a component

You must also select the location of the stop criteria specification.
You may select from the following locations:
• Vessel
• Relief vent system
• Accumulator
Certain restrictions apply depending on the location selected.
When location = vessel, mole and mass flow rate are not allowed.
When location = vent accumulator, only the following
specifications are allowed:
• Total moles of a specified component
• Total mass of a specified component
When location = vent, only the flowing specifications are allowed
• Vent molar flow rate
• Vent mass flow rate
Solution Procedure The problem to be solved is:
for Dynamic
Given the initial conditions in the vessel, a description of the
Scenarios
pressure relief system, and the heat flow into the vessel, calculate
the flow rate through the pressure relief system and determine if
the pressure relief system meets code requirements.
The problem is solved as outlined below. This algorithm is for the
Heat-Input and Fire Scenarios.
1 Given the heat input to the vessel, solve the energy balance and
flash equations along with the reaction equations for the vessel
at the present time step. If any of the termination criteria are
met, go to Step 6. The options for specifying termination
criteria include:
• Time for scenario exceeded
• Specified vapor fraction reached
• Vessel contents have reached specified value
• Pressure in the vessel is greater than the maximum allowed
2 If the pressure in the vessel is less than the device opening
pressure, increment time and go to Step 1.
3 Calculate the maximum flow rate possible through the pressure
relief system. This value is calculated by finding the smallest

diameter of any pipe or valve in the system, and calculating the
sonic velocity through that diameter.
4 Calculate the pressure at the end of the vessel neck, after each
section of the inlet pipe, after the pressure relief device, and
after each section of the tail pipe based on the current flow
estimate. If the pressure at the end of any section is less than
the user-specified discharge pressure, it is not necessary to do
the calculations for the next section.
5 If the pressure at the end of the pressure relief system is within
tolerance of the user-specified discharge pressure, increment
time and go to Step 1.
Otherwise, calculate a new guess for the flow through the relief
system and go to Step 4.
6 Given the flow at any time, check where the choke point is. If
the choke point is not at the pressure relief valve, the system is
unacceptable. Check if any applicable codes are violated. If so,
the system is unacceptable.
Flow Equations The next sections describe pipe flow and nozzle flow equations.
Pipe Flow This is the general differential equation for flow through a constant
diameter pipe:
  υ2   (1)
υ dp + G υ dυ +  4 f
2
 dL  + g sin ΦdL = 0
  2D 
Where:
υ = Specific volume of stream
p = Static (flowing) pressure of stream
G = Mass flow rate per unit area
f = Friction factor
D = Inside diameter of pipe
L = Equivalent pipe length
g = Acceleration due to gravity
sin Φ = Vertical rise/equivalent pipe length
Φ represents the physical angle of the pipe with respect to the
horizontal only if the equivalent pipe length is the same as the
physical flow path length (that is, only pipe, no fittings or other
resistances). The potential energy term in the equation assumes
that the vertical elevation is distributed evenly along the entire
equivalent length.

For example, you have only a single 20 meter length of pipe that
rises a total of six meters, then
6
sin Φ = = 0.3
20
If the same system also includes a fitting resistance of 5 equivalent
meters, then:
6
sin Φ = = 0.24
20 + 5
Equation (1) applies to any flow system (all vapor, non-flashing
liquid, flashing two-phase, non-flashing two-phase, etc.). All that
is needed to solve the equation is the proper relationship between
the pressure (p) and the stream specific volume ( υ ). This
relationship is determined by the type of constraint chosen.
For adiabatic flow, the defining equation is:
H + KE + PE = CONSTANT
Where:
H = Stream enthalpy
KE = Kinetic energy of stream
PE = Potential energy of stream
Between points 1 and 2:
H1 + KE1 + PE1 = H 2 + KE 2 + PE 2
Thus:
H 2 = H1 − ∆KE − ∆PE
Aspen Plus flash routines can be used to calculate enthalpy at point
2.
Nozzle Flow Aspen Plus calculates nozzle flow by treating the flow as adiabatic
through a perfect nozzle which has no friction losses and is short
enough so that any potential energy effects can be neglected. The
actual flow is then calculated by applying a correction factor (the
flow coefficient, Cd) to the flow calculated as if the nozzle
behaved as perfect. Frictionless flow is described by:
udu +υ dp = 0 (2)
Where:
u = Stream linear velocity
υ = Specify volume of stream

For adiabatic flow:
 u2 
d  U + PV + + PE  = 0
 2 
Where:
U = Internal energy
PV = Pressure-volume product
Neglecting PE, and combining the definition of enthalpy (H = U +
PV) into this equation gives:
dH + udu = 0 (3)
Combining (2) and (3) gives:
dH =υ dp (4)
By definition:
dH = Tds + υ dp (5)
(4) and (5) yield:
Tds = 0
or
ds = 0
Thus, adiabatic frictionless flow is isentropic.
The flow equation (2) can be integrated to describe the flow
through a perfect nozzle as follows:
Let p0 = The upstream stagnation pressure where the velocity is
zero (u0 = 0).
Let p1 = The pressure in the nozzle throat at which the flow is
accelerated to velocity u.
Thus, the integrated form of (2) becomes:
1 p
1 2
u = − ∫ υ dp
2 p01
which can be re-written (noting that u = Gυ ):

p1 (6)
G v = −2 ∫ υ dp
2 2
1
p0
Equation (6) provides the means to calculate the flow rate through
a perfect nozzle given the upstream stagnation pressure and the
proper p-v relationship (which is isentropic). As one integrates (6)

from p0 to p1, a maximum G indicates that the flow has become
choked at the current value of p. (6) also serves as a method for
converting between stagnation and static pressures at any point in
the flow system (pipe or nozzle).
Calculation and Aspen Plus uses the same equations used to model the safety relief
Convergence valve as to model the conversion from stagnation to flowing
Methods pressure and back again. To be completely accurate, the valve
should be modeled as in equation (6) in the Nozzle Flow section.
This model requires that constant entropy flashes be performed at
each point in the integration of equation (6). This is a very time
consuming calculation, so several options are provided to speed up
the calculations. First, you can choose to do constant enthalpy
flashes rather than constant entropy flashes through the nozzle.
This speeds up the calculations by an order of magnitude, since the
constant entropy flash is modeled by a series of constant enthalpy
flashes converging on entropy.
Aspen Plus also provides a shortcut method to calculate molar
volume as a function of pressure during the nozzle integration.
This method was developed by L. L. Simpson and gives very good
results. Instead of doing a flash calculation to calculate the molar
volume at each point in the integration, two flashes are done at the
start and parameters are calculated which allow you to calculate
the molar volume at other pressures without doing flashes.
Reference
Simpson, L.L., "Estimate Two-Phase Flow in Safety Devices",

Chemical Engineering, August, 1991, pp. 98-102.
Vessel Insulation When Fire Standard API-520 or API-2000 is used, you may claim
Credit Factor an insulation credit factor calculated from the formula:
k (1660 − Tf )
F=
21000 t
Where:
k = Thermal conductivity of insulation, in British thermal
units per hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit
per inch at mean temperature.
= Temperature of vessel contents at relieving conditions,
in degrees Fahrenheit.
T = Thickness of insulation, in inches.
T
Assuming a k value of 4.0, and f of 0.0, the following table,
which was taken from API-2000, gives values of F for various
values of insulation thickness:

Insulation thickness (t) F Factor
6 inches (152 millimeters) 0.05
12 inches (305 millimeters) or more 0.025
Additional Reading "Sizing, Selection, and Installation Of Pressure-Relieving Devices
in Refineries" Part I - Sizing and Selection, API Recommended
Practice 520, American Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street
Northwest, Washington, D.C. 20005.
"Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage Tanks", (Non-
refrigerated and Refrigerated), API Standard 2000, American
Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street Northwest, Washington, D.C.
20005.

APPENDIX A
Advanced Distillation Features
This appendix contains information applicable to several of the

distillation column models in Aspen Plus. The topics are:
• Sizing and Rating for Trays and Packing
• Column Targeting
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Advanced Distillation Features • A-1
Sizing and Rating for Trays and
Packings: Overview
Aspen Plus has extensive capabilities to size, rate, and perform
pressure drop calculations for trayed and packed columns. Use the
following Tray/Packing forms to enter specifications:
• TraySizing
• TrayRating
• PackSizing
• PackRating
These capabilities are available in the following column unit
operation models:
• RadFrac
• MultiFrac
• PetroFrac
You can choose from the following five commonly-used tray
types:
• Bubble caps
• Sieve
• Glitsch Ballast®
• Koch Flexitray®
• Nutter Float Valve
Aspen Plus can model a variety of random packings. You can also
use any of the following types of structured packings:
• Goodloe®
• Glitsch Grid®
• Norton Intalox Structured Packing
• Sulzer BX, CY, Mellapak, and Kerapak
• Koch Flexipac, Flexeramic, Flexigrid
• Raschig Super-Pak and Ralu-Pak
For sizing and rating calculations, Aspen Plus divides a column
into sections. Each section can have a different tray type, packing
type, and diameter. The tray details can vary from section to
section. A column can have an unlimited number of sections. In
addition, you can size and rate the same section with different
types of trays and packings.
A-2 • Advanced Distillation Features Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models
The calculations are based on vendor-recommended procedures
whenever these are available. When vendor procedures are not
available, well-established literature methods are used.
Aspen Plus calculates sizing and performance parameters such as:
• Column diameter
• Flooding approach or approach to maximum capacity
• Downcomer backup
• Pressure drop
These parameters are based on:
• Column loadings
• Transport properties
• Tray geometry
• Packing characteristics
You can use the computed pressure drop to update the column
pressure profile.
Single-Pass and You can use the column models in Aspen Plus to:
Multi-Pass Trays • Size one- and two-pass trays
• Rate trays with up to four passes
Schematics of one-, two-, three-, and four-pass trays are shown in
the next four figures. Aspen Plus performs and reports rating
calculations for all panels.
When specifying Weir heights, cap positioning, and number of
valves:
For Specify
One-pass tray A single value
Two-pass tray Up to two values, one for each panels A and B
Three-pass tray Up to three values, one for each panel (A, B and C)
Four-pass tray Up to four values, one for each panel (A, B, C and D)
The values for the number of caps and number of valves applies
for each panel. For example, two-pass trays have two A panels for
tray AA, and two B panels for tray BB. Therefore, the number of
caps per panel is the number of caps per tray divided by two.
Similar consideration is necessary for three- and four-pass trays.
If you specify only one value for multi-pass trays, that value
applies to all panels.
When specifying downcomer clearance and width:
For Specify
One-pass tray A single value for the side downcomer
Two-pass tray Up to two values, one for the side downcomer, one for
the center downcomer
Three-pass tray Up to two values, one for the side downcomer, one for
the off-center downcomer
Four-pass tray Up to three values: one for the side downcomer, one
for the center downcomer, and one for the off-center
downcomer
Column Diameter
Outlet Weir Length
DC-WTOP
WEIR-HT
DC- DC-HT
WBOT
DC-CLEAR
A One-Pass Tray
Column Diameter
Outlet Weir Length
CTR. DC
CTR. DC
DC-WTOP
Below
~ ~
WEIR-HT Panel A Tray AA
DC- Side
WBOT DC-HT
Downcomer
DC-
DC-CLEAR WTOP Panel B Tray BB
DC-HT Center
DC- Downcomer
WBOT
DC-CLEAR
~ ~ ~~
A Two-Pass Tray
Column Diameter
OFF-CTR.DC
Outlet Weir Length
OFF-CTR.DC
DC-WTOP DC-WTOP
WEIR-HT
Panel A. B. C.
DC-HT DCOF
DC-WBOT
DC-WTOP
DC-
CLEAR B A Panel C. B. A.
Panel A. B. C.
A B C
A Three-Pass Tray
Column Diameter
OFF-CTR.DC OFF-CTR.DC
Outlet Weir Length

SIDE DC
CTR.DC
DC-WTOP DC-WTOP
WEIR-HT
Panel A. B.
DC-HT
DC-WBOT DC-WBOT
DC-
CLEAR D D C Panel C. D.
DCOF
A B B A Panel A. B.
A Four-Pass Tray
Modes of Operation Aspen Plus provides two modes of operation for trays:
for Trays • Sizing
• Rating
In either mode, you can divide a column into any number of
sections. Each section can have a different column diameter, tray
type, and tray geometry. You can re-rate or re-design the same
section with different tray types and/or packings.
Aspen Plus performs the calculations one section at a time. In
sizing mode, the column model determines tray diameter to satisfy
the flooding approach you specified for each stage. The largest
diameter is selected.
In rating mode, you specify the column section diameter and other
tray details. For each stage, the column model calculates tray
performance and hydraulic information such as flooding approach,
downcomer backup, and pressure drop.
Flooding Calculations For bubble caps and sieve trays, Aspen Plus provides two
for Trays procedures for calculating the approach to flooding. The first
procedure is based on the Fair method. The second uses the Glitsch
procedure for ballast trays. This procedure de-rates the calculated
flooding approach by 15% for bubble caps and by 5% for sieve
trays. All other hydraulic calculations are based on the Fair and
Bolles methods. You can also supply your own calculation
procedure:
= Specify On form
Flooding calculation method = USER TraySizing or TrayRating
Subroutine name UserSubroutines
For valve trays (Glitsch Ballast, Koch Flexitray, and Nutter Float
Valve trays), Aspen Plus uses procedures from vendor design
bulletins.
Two versions of vendor design bulletins are available for Koch
Flexitray:
• Bulletin 960
• Bulletin 960-1
You can use the Convergence form to specify which bulletin to use
for all TraySizing and TrayRating sections for a block. You can
specify which bulletin to use for each section. This specification
overrides the block-wise specification. For valve type S, AO, and
TO in the TrayRating sections, Aspen Plus always uses Bulletin
960-1 internally, regardless of the block-wise specification. For all
other cases, the default is Bulletin 960.
For Nutter Float Valve trays, two versions of curve fitting are
provided for curves in the vendor design bulletin:
• Aspen90
• Aspen96
Aspen96 is recommended. Use the Convergence form to specify
which version to use.
RadFrac uses cap diameter only for tray type CAPS. Valid entries
Bubble Cap Tray
are:
Layout
Cap Diameter Default Weir Height
Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters

3 76.2 2.75 69.85
4 101.6 3.00 76.20
6 152.4 3.25 82.55
Use the cap diameter to retrieve cap characteristics based on
standard cap designs.
For columns with diameter The default is
Up to 48 in (1219.2 mm). 3 in (76.2 mm)
Greater than 48 in (1219.2 mm) 4 in (101.6 mm)
The following table lists standard cap designs:
Material Stainless Steel
Nominal Size, in 3 4 6
Cap
U.S. Standard gauge 16 16 16
OD, in 2.999 3.999 5.999
ID, in 2.875 3.875 5.875
Height overall, in 2.500 3.000 3.750
Number of slots 20 26 39
Type of slots Trapezoidal Trapezoidal Trapezoidal
Slot width, in
Bottom 0.333 0.333 0.333
Top 0.167 0.167 0.167
Slot height, in 1.000 1.250 1.500
Height shroud ring, in 0.250 0.250 0.250
Riser
U.S. Standard gauge 16 16 16
OD, in 1.999 2.624 3.999
ID, in 1.875 2.500 3.875
Material Stainless Steel
Nominal size, in 3 4 6
Standard heights, in
0.5-in skirt height 2.250 2.500 2.750
1.0-in skirt height 2.750 3.000 3.250
1.5-in skirt height 3.250 3.500 3.750
Riser-slot seal, in 0.500 0.500 0.500
Cap areas, in
Riser 2.65 4.80 11.68
Reversal 4.18 7.55 17.80
Annular 3.35 6.38 14.55
Slot 5.00 8.12 14.64
Cap 7.07 12.60 28.30
Area ratios
Reversal/riser 1.58 1.57 1.52
Annular/riser 1.26 1.33 1.25
Slot/riser 1.89 1.69 1.25
Slot/cap 0.71 0.65 0.52
Pressure Drop Normally, RadFrac, MultiFrac, and PetroFrac treat the stages you
Calculations for enter as equilibrium stages. You must enter overall efficiency to:
Trays • Convert the calculated pressure drop per tray to pressure drop
per equilibrium stage
• Compute the column pressure drop
If you do not enter overall efficiency, these models assume 100%
efficiency. If you specify Murphree or vaporization efficiency, you
should not enter overall efficiency. RadFrac, MultiFrac, and
PetroFrac will treat the stages as actual trays.
Foaming Calculations Suggested values for Ballast trays are:
for Trays Service System Foaming Factor
Non-foaming systems 1.00
Fluorine systems 0.90
Moderate foamers, such as oil 0.85
absorbers, amine, and glycol
regenerators
Heavy foamers, such as amine and 0.73
glycol absorbers
Severe foamers, such as MEK units 0.60
Foam stable systems, such as caustic 0.30
regenerators
Suggested values for Flexitrays are:
Service System Foaming Factor
Depropanizers 0.85-0.95
Absorbers 0.85
Vacuum towers 0.85
Amine regenerators 0.85
Amine contactors 0.70-0.80
High pressure deethanizers 0.75-0.80
Glycol contactors 0.70-0.75
Suggested values for Float valve trays are:
Service System Foaming Factor
Non foaming 1.00
Low foaming 0.90
Moderate foaming 0.75
High foaming 0.60
Packed Columns The calculations for packings are based on the height equivalent of
a theoretical plate (HETP). HETP=packed height/number of
stages. The HETP is required. You can provide it using one of the
following methods:
• Enter it directly on the PackSizing or PackRating forms
• Enter the packing height on the same form
Packing Types and Aspen Plus can handle a wide variety of packing types, including
Packing Factors different sizes and materials from various vendors.
For random packings, the calculations require packing factors.
Aspen Plus stores packing factors for the various sizes, materials,
and vendors allowed in a databank. If you provide the following
information, Aspen Plus retrieves these packing factors
automatically for calculations:
• Packing type
• Size
• Material
You may specify the vendor on the PackSizing or PackRating
form.
Is the vendor
specified? Aspen Plus uses
Yes The packing factor published by the vendor
No A value compiled from various literature sources
You can enter the packing factor directly to override the built-in
values. Aspen Plus uses the packing type to select the proper
calculation procedure.
Literature Sources
Fair, J.R., et al., "Liquid-Gas Systems," Perry’s Chemical

Engineers’ Handbook, R.H. Perry and D. Green, ed., 6th ed. (New
York: McGraw Hill, 1984).
Tower Packings, Bulletin No. 15 (Tokyo: Tokyo Special Wire
Netting Company).
The column models have two modes of operation for packing:
Modes of Operation
for Packing • Sizing
• Rating
In either mode, you can divide a column into any number of
sections. Each section can have different packings. You can re-rate
or re-design the same section with different packings and/or tray
types. Aspen Plus performs the calculations one section at a time.
In sizing mode, Aspen Plus determines the column section
diameter from:
• The approach to the maximum capacity
• A design capacity factor you specify
You can impose a maximum pressure drop per unit height (of
packing or per section) as an additional constraint. Once
Aspen Plus has determined the column section diameter, it re-rates
the stages in the section with the calculated diameter.
In rating mode, you specify the column diameter. Aspen Plus
calculates the approach to maximum capacity and pressure drop.
Maximum Capacity Aspen Plus provides several methods for maximum capacity
Calculations for calculations. For random packings you can use:
Packing Method For this type of packings
Mass Transfer, Ltd. (MTL) 1 MTL
Norton 2 Norton IMTP
Koch 3 Koch
Raschig 4 Raschig
Eckert All other random packings
For structured packings, Aspen Plus provides vendor procedures
for each type. If you specify the maximum capacity factor,
Aspen Plus bypasses the maximum capacity calculations.
The definition of approach to maximum capacity depends on the
type of packings.
For Norton IMTP and Intalox structured packings, approach to
maximum capacity refers to the fractional approach to the
maximum efficient capacity. Efficient capacity is the operating
point at which efficiency of the packing deteriorates due to liquid
entrainment. The efficient capacity is approximately 10 to 20%
below the flood point.
For Sulzer structured packings (BX, CY, Kerapak, and Mellapak),
approach to maximum capacity refers to the fractional approach to
maximum capacity. Maximum capacity is the operating point at
which a pressure drop of 12 mbar/m (1.47 in-water/ft) of packing
is obtained. At this condition, stable operation is possible, but the
gas load is higher than that at which maximum separation
efficiency is achieved.
The gas load corresponding to the maximum capacity is 5 to 10%
below the flood point. Sulzer recommends a usual design range
between 0.5 and 0.8 for approach to flooding.
For Raschig random and structured packings, approach to
maximum capacity refers to the fractional approach to maximum
capacity. Maximum capacity is at the loading point.
For all other packings, approach to maximum capacity refers to the
fractional approach to the flood point.
Because there are different definitions for approach to maximum
capacity, sizing results are not on the same basis for packings from
different vendors, even when you use the same value for approach
to maximum capacity. Direct performance comparison of packings
from different vendors is not recommended.
The capacity factor is:
ρV
CS = VS
ρ L − ρV
Where:
CS = Capacity factor
VS = Superficial velocity of vapor to packing
ρV = Density of vapor to packing
ρL = Density of liquid from packing
References
1 Cascade Mini-Ring Design Manual (Tokyo: Dodwell &
Company, Ltd., 1984).
2 Intalox High-Performance Separation Systems, Bulletin IHP-1
(Akron: Norton Company, 1987).
3 McNulty, K.J., "Hydraulic Model for Packed Tower Design."
Paper presented at the American Institute of Chemical
Engineers Spring Meeting in Houston, 1993.
4 Billet, R., and Schultes, M., "Modeling of Packed Tower
Performance for Rectification, Absorption and Desorption in
the Total Capacity Range." Paper presented at the 3rd Korea-
Japan Symposium On Sep. Tech., October 25-27, 1993 in
Seoul, Korea.
Pressure Drop For random packings, Aspen Plus provides several built-in
Calculations for methods to compute the pressure drop.
Packing Vendor Pressure drop method
MTL Vendor 1
Norton Vendor procedure 2,3,4
Koch Vendor procedure 5
Raschig Vendor procedure 6
Not specified Eckert GPDC 7, Norton GPDC 2,3,4, Prahl GPDC 8, Tsai
GPDC 9
If you specify the vendor, Aspen Plus uses the vendor procedure. If
you do not specify the vendor, you can choose one of four different
pressure drop methods. If you do not specify a method, Aspen Plus
uses the Eckert generalized pressure drop correlation (GPDC).
For structured packings, vendor pressure drop correlations are
available for all packings:
Packing type Pressure drop method
Goodloe Vendor procedure 10
Glitsch Grid Vendor procedure 11
Norton Intalox Structured Packings Vendor procedure 12
Sulzer BX, CY, Mellapak, and Kerapak Vendor procedure 13
Super-Pak and Ralu-Pak Vendor procedure 6
Koch Flexipac, Flexeramic, and Flexigrid Vendor procedure 14
References
1 Cascade Mini-Ring Design Manual (Tokyo: Dodwell &
Company, Ltd., 1984).
2 Dolan, M.J. and Strigle, R.F., "Advances in Distillation
Column Design," CEP, Vol.76, No.11 (November 1980), pp.
78-83.
3 Intalox High-Performance Separation Systems, Bulletin IHP-1
(Akron: Norton Company, 1987).
4 Intalox Metal Tower Packing, Bulletin IM82 (Akron: Norton
Company, 1979).
6 Billet, R., and Schultes, M., "Modeling of Packed Tower
Performance for Rectification, Absorption and Desorption in
the Total Capacity Range" Paper presented as the 3rd Korea-
Japan Symposium On Sep. Tech., October 25-27, 1993 in
Seoul, Korea.
7 Fair, J.R. et al., "Liquid-Gas Systems," Perry’s Chemical
Engineers’ Handbook, R.H. Perry and D. Green, ed., 6th ed.
(New York: McGraw Hill, 1984), pp. 18-22.
8 McNulty, K.J. and Hsieh, C.L., "Hydraulic Performance and
Efficiency of Koch Flexipac Structured Packings." Paper
presented at American Institute of Chemical Engineers Annual
Meeting in Los Angeles, 1982.
9 Tsai, T.C., "Packed Tower Program Has Special Features," Oil
and Gas Journal, Vol. 83 No. 35 (September, 1985), p. 77.
10 Goodloe, Bulletin 520A (Dallas: Glitsch, Inc., 1981).
11 Glitsch Grid-Grid/Ring Combination Bed, Bulletin No. 7070
(Dallas: Glitsch, Inc., 1978).
12 Norton Company, private communication, 1992.
13 Spiegel, L. and Meier, W., "Correlations of the Performance
Characteristics of the Various Mellapak Types." Paper
presented at the 4th International Symposium of Distillation
and Absorption, Brighton, England, 1987.
Liquid Holdup Aspen Plus performs liquid holdup calculations for both random
Calculations for and structured packings. For Raschig packings, Aspen Plus uses
Packing the vendor procedure is used. The required parameters are void
fraction and surface area. If you do not provide these parameters,
Aspen Plus will retrieve them from the built-in databank.
For other packings, Aspen Plus uses the Stichlmair correlation.
The Stichlmair correlation requires these parameters:
• Packing void fraction and surface area
• Three Stichlmair correlation constants
When Stichlmair correlation is used, Aspen Plus provides these
parameters for a variety of packings in the built-in packing
databank. If these parameters are missing for a particular packing,
Aspen Plus will not perform liquid holdup calculations for that
packing.
You can also enter these parameters to provide missing values, or
to override the databank values.
Pressure Profile You can update the pressure profile using:
Update • Computed pressure drops for the rating mode of both trays and
packings
• The sizing mode of packings
If you choose to update the pressure profile, the column models
solve the tray or packing calculation procedures simultaneously
with the column-describing equations. For updating the pressure
profile during calculations check Update Section Pressure Profile
on the following forms:
• TrayRating
• PackSizing
• PackRating
Also, you can fix the pressure at the top or bottom of the column
and you can specify this option on the above forms. The stage
pressures become additional variables. Aspen Plus uses the
pressure specifications given on the Pres-Profile form to:
• Initialize the column pressure profile
• Fix the pressure drop of stages for which the pressure profile is
not updated
Physical Property Several physical properties that are not normally used for heat and
Data Requirements material balance calculations are required for column sizing and
rating. These properties are:
• Liquid and vapor densities
• Liquid surface tension
• Liquid and vapor viscosities
The physical property method that you specify for a unit operation
model must be able to provide the required properties. In addition,
the physical property parameters needed to calculate the required
properties must be available for all components in the column. See
the descriptions of properties in the Aspen Plus User Guide,
Chapter 8, for details on specifying physical property methods and
determining property parameter requirements.
References Fair, J.R., et al., "Liquid-Gas Systems," Perry’s Chemical
Engineers’ Handbook, R.H. Perry and D. Green, ed. 6th ed., New
York: McGraw Hill, 1984.
Ballast Tray Design Manual, Glitsch, Inc. Bulletin No. 4900, 3rd
ed. Dallas, 1980.
Smith, B.D., "Tray Hydraulics: Bubble Cap Trays" and "Tray
Hydraulics: Perforated Trays," Design of Equilibrium Stage
Processes, New York: McGraw Hill, 1963, pp. 474-569.
Koch Flexitray Design Manual, Koch Engineering Co., Inc.
Bulletin No. 90, Wichita.
Ballast Tray Design Manual, Glitsch, Inc. Bulletin No. 4900, 3rd
ed. Dallas, 1980.
Koch Flexitray Design Manual, Koch Engineering Co., Inc.
Bulletin No. 90, Wichita.
Nutter Float Valve Design Manual, Tulsa: Nutter Engineering Co.,
1976.
Stichlmair, J., et al., "General Model for Prediction of Pressure
Drop and Capacity of Countercurrent Gas/Liquid Packed
Columns," Gas Separation and Purification, Vol. 3 (1989), p. 22.
Column Targeting
The Aspen Plus Column Targeting tool offers capabilities for
thermal and hydraulic analysis of distillation columns. During
design or retrofit analysis of a process, these capabilities can be
exploited to identify the targets for appropriate column
modifications in order to:
• Reduce utilities cost
• Improve energy efficiency
• Reduce capital investment (by improved driving forces)
• Facilitate column debottlenecking
These capabilities are available for the following distillation
column models:
• RadFrac
• MultiFrac
• PetroFrac
Column Targeting The thermal analysis capability is useful in identifying design
Thermal Analysis targets for improvements in energy consumption and efficiency.
This capability is based on the concept of minimum
thermodynamic condition for a distillation column. The minimum
thermodynamic condition pertains to thermodynamically reversible
column operation. In this condition, a distillation column would
operate at minimum reflux, with an infinite number of stages, and
with heaters and coolers placed at each stage with appropriate heat
loads for the operating and equilibrium lines to coincide. In other
words, the reboiling and condensing loads are distributed over the
temperature range of operation of the column. The stage-enthalpy
(Stage-H) or temperature-enthalpy (T-H) profiles for such a
column therefore represent the theoretical minimum heating and
cooling requirements in the temperature range of separation. These
profiles are called the Column Grand Composite Curves (CGCCs).
The Aspen Plus Column Targeting tool generates the CGCCs
based on the Practical Near-Minimum Thermodynamic Condition
(PNMTC) approximation (Dhole and Linnhoff). The enthalpies
used in plotting the CGCCs are calculated at a given stage of the
column by assuming that the equilibrium and operating lines
coincide at this stage. This approximation takes into account the
losses or inefficiencies introduced through practicalities of column
design (such as pressure drops, multiple side-products, side
strippers, etc.), while preserving the meaning of the CGCC. The
equations for equilibrium and operating lines are solved
simultaneously at each stage for designated light key and heavy
key components. The Aspen Plus Column Targeting tool has a
built-in capability to select light key and heavy key components for
each stage of the column.
The CGCCs are helpful in identifying the targets for potential
column modifications. These modifications include:
• Feed location
• Reflux ratio modifications
• Feed conditioning (heating or cooling)
• Side condensing or reboiling
An additional capability is provided through exergy analysis. The
exergy profiles are plotted by calculating the exergy loss at each
stage of the column, taking into account all entering and leaving
material and heat streams. In general, the exergy loss profiles can
be used as a tool to examine the degradation of potential work
availability (irreversibility) in a distillation column due to:
• Momentum loss (pressure driving force)
• Thermal loss (temperature driving force)
• Chemical potential loss (mass transfer driving force)
Column Targeting The hydraulic analysis capability is useful in understanding how
Hydraulic Analysis the vapor and liquid flow rates in a distillation column compare
with the minimum (corresponding to the PNMTC) and maximum
(corresponding to flooding) limits. For packed and tray columns,
jet flooding controls the calculation of vapor flooding limits. For
tray columns, parameters such as downcomer backup control the
liquid flooding limits. Hydraulic analysis can be used to identify
and eliminate column bottlenecks.
Specifications for For RadFrac, MultiFrac, and PetroFrac, the column targeting
Column Targeting thermal and hydraulic analysis capabilities can be activated by
and Hydraulic using the corresponding option buttons on the Report Property
Analysis Options forms.
Method for selecting light and heavy key components for the
PNMTC calculations has to be specified. The component K-values
based method is used as default.
To calculate the maximum vapor and liquid flow rates due to
flooding, you must specify tray or packing rating information for
the entire column. In addition, you can specify allowable flooding
factors (as fraction of total flooding) for flooding limit
calculations. The allowable limit for vapor flooding can be
specified on the TrayRating | Design/Pdrop or PackRating |
Design/Pdrop sheets. The allowable limit for liquid flooding (due
to downcomer backup) can be specified on the TrayRating |
Downcomers sheet. The default values are 85% for the vapor
flooding limit and 50% for the liquid flooding limit. The liquid
flooding limit specification is available only if the downcomer
geometry is specified.
Selection of Key Results of the column targeting analysis depend strongly on the
Components selection of light key and heavy key components. The Aspen Plus
Column Targeting tool provides the following four methods for
judicious selection of these key components:
Method Use When
User defined Allows you to specify the light key and heavy key
components.
Based on Selects the light key and heavy key components
component split- on the basis of component split-fractions in
fractions column product streams. This method is best
suited for sharp or near-sharp splits.
Based on Selects the light key and heavy key components
component K- on the basis of component K-values. This method
values is best suited for sloppy splits.
Based on column Selects the light and heavy key components on the
composition basis of composition profiles. In principle, this
profiles method is similar to the K-value based method. It
is best suited for sloppy splits and it is, in general,
inferior to the K-value based method.
These methods can be chosen for the distillation models on the
following sheets:
Model Form
RadFrac Report Targeting Options
MultiFrac Columns Report Targeting Options
PetroFrac Report Targeting Options
Strippers Report Targeting Options
The associated parameters for each method can be chosen on the
following sheets:
Model Form
RadFrac Report Targeting Specifications
MultiFrac Columns Report Targeting Specifications
PetroFrac Report Targeting Specifications
Strippers Report Targeting Specifications
Selection of Key This method allows the user to define column sections and light
Components: User key and heavy key components for each section. If the sections
Defined defined do not cover the entire column, extrapolations are used. If
the selection of key components is inconsistent with the separation
in the column, the column targeting calculations are skipped. In
both cases, appropriate warning messages are written to the control
panel and to the history file.
We highly recommend that you run the simulation and inspect the
column split-fractions, composition profiles, and component K-
values before using this method to designate key components.
Selection of Key In this method the column is divided into sections bounded by its
Components Based on product streams. For each section, the key components are selected
Component Split- based on the component split-fractions in its bounding product
Fractions streams as:
Component Mole- Component Split - Designation
Fraction Fraction
In the section bottom- In the section top-product Light key
product > Composition > Minimum split-fraction
tolerance
In the section top- In the section bottom- Heavy key
product > Composition product > Minimum split-
tolerance fraction
If there is more than one light key component for a column section,
the heaviest of these components is selected as the light key.
Similarly, in case of multiple heavy keys for a column section, the
lightest is selected as the heavy key. These selections are made
based on the component K-values.
If light key and/or heavy key components cannot be selected for a
column section, appropriate extrapolations are used. If these
extrapolations do not produce a meaningful selection, column
targeting calculations are skipped. In both cases, appropriate
warnings are written to the control panel and to the history file.
The default values for the parameters used in this method are:
Parameter Default Value
Minimum split-fraction 0.9
Composition tolerance 1e-6
K-value tolerance 1e-5
These parameters can be manipulated to adjust the key selection.
This method also allows for components to be excluded from key
selection throughout the entire column.
This method should be used for columns with sharp or near-sharp
splits. Therefore, we highly recommend that you run the
simulation and inspect the column split-fractions and composition
profiles before choosing this method and adjusting its parameters.
Selection of Key In this method key components are selected based on their K-
Components Based on values on each stage as:
Component K-Values Component Mole- Component K-value Designation
Fraction
> Composition > 1+K-value Light key
tolerance tolerance
> Composition < 1-K-value tolerance Heavy key
tolerance
stage, the components selected for the stage above are used. If
these extrapolations do not represent a meaningful selection,
column targeting calculations are skipped. In both cases,
appropriate warnings are written to the control panel and to the
history file.
The default values for the parameters used in this method are:
K-value tolerance 1e-5
These parameters can be manipulated to adjust the key selection.
Note that to represent the separation on each column stage, this
method selects a group of components as light key and another
group of components as heavy key. It is therefore, most suited for
columns with sloppy splits. It is also the default key selection
method.
Selection of Key This method is similar to the K-value based method except that the
Components Based on component composition profiles in the column are used instead of
Column Composition their K-values. You can specify the composition tolerance and the
Profiles stage span (the number of stages above and below the current stage
that are used to evaluate the composition profile). The default
values of these parameters are:
Stage span 2
These parameters can be manipulated to adjust the key-selection.
stage, the components selected for the stage above are used. If
these extrapolations do not represent a meaningful selection,
column targeting calculations are skipped. In both cases,
appropriate warnings are written to the control panel and to the
history file.
This method is also suited for sloppy splits and may be used
instead of the K-value based method.
Using Column The column targeting results can be viewed on the following sheets
Targeting Results for the three distillation column models:
Model Form
RadFrac Profiles Key Components
Profiles Thermal Analysis
Profiles Hydraulic Analysis
MultiFrac Columns Profiles Key Components
Columns Profiles Thermal Analysis
Columns Profiles Hydraulic Analysis
PetroFrac Profiles Key Components
Profiles Thermal Analysis
Profiles Hydraulic Analysis
Strippers Profiles Key Components
Strippers Profiles Thermal Analysis
Strippers Profiles Hydraulic Analysis
The CGCCs, the exergy loss profile, and the hydraulic analysis
profiles can be plotted using the PlotWizard.
The thermal analysis results provide a practical approach to
identifying and implementing potential modifications to the
column design. The following order of review for column
modifications, based on inspection of the CGCCs, is
recommended:
1 Feed location (appropriate placement)
2 Reflux ratio modification (reflux ratio vs. number of stages)
3 Feed conditioning (heating or cooling)
4 Side condensing or reboiling
Let us briefly discuss each modification with the help of a
distillation column that separates a mixture of n-heptane and n-
octane from heavier hydrocarbons (n-nonane, n-decane, and n-
pentadecane).
Parameter Design 1
No. of stages 15
Reflux ratio 7.668
Feed location 3
Feed temperature 100 C
Condenser duty -28.30 MW
Condenser 141.03 C
temperature
Reboiler duty 41.00 MW
Reboiler temperature 205.61 C
Side condenser duty –
Side condenser –
temperature
Side reboiler duty –
Side reboiler –
temperature
The design parameters of importance for the base case design
(Design 1) of this column are summarized below:
• Feed Location
• Reflux Ratio Modification
• Feed Conditioning
• Side Condensing or Reboiling
Feed Location Inspection of the CGCC can identify any anomalies or distortions
due to inappropriate feed placement. Normally, such distortions
will be apparent as significant projections at the feed location
(pinch point) on the Stage-H CGCC. This is due to a need for extra
local reflux to compensate for the inappropriate feed placement.
A feed introduced too high up in the column will show a sharp
enthalpy change on the condenser side on the Stage-H CGCC and
should be moved down. Similarly, a feed introduced too low in the
column will show a sharp enthalpy change on the reboiler side on
the Stage-H CGCC and should be moved up the column.
A correctly placed feed not only removes the distortions in the
Stage-H CGCC but also results in reduced condenser and reboiler
duties.
The Stage-H CGCC for Design 1 of our distillation column is
shown in the following figure. It clearly shows a distortion on the
condenser side at the pinch point (stages 2 and 3). Therefore, the
feed must be moved down the column. The figure also shows the
CGCC for Design 2, where the feed is moved down to stage 7.
Comparison of the design parameters also reveals a slight
reduction in the condenser and reboiler duties.
Parameter Design 1 Design 2
No. of stages 15 15
Reflux ratio 7.668 7.668
Feed location 3 7
Feed temperature 100 C 100 C
Condenser duty -28.30 MW -28.02 MW
Condenser 141.03 C 140.58 C
temperature
Reboiler duty 41.00 MW 40.74 MW
Reboiler temperature 205.61 C 205.91 C
Side condenser duty – –
Side condenser – –
temperature
Side reboiler duty – –
Side reboiler – –
temperature
Reflux Ratio Modification The horizontal gap between the T-H CGCC pinch point and the
ordinate represents the scope for reduction in heat duties through
reduction in reflux ratio. As the reflux ratio is reduced (while
increasing the number of stages to preserve the separation), the
CGCC will move towards the ordinate, thus reducing both the
condenser and reboiler loads.
The T-H CGCC for Design 2 of our distillation column is shown in
the following figure. This figure also identifies the scope for
reduction in condenser and reboiler duties by reducing the reflux
ratio.
It must be noted that, as the reflux ratio is reduced, the number of

stages required to achieve the desired separation increases. In order
to make a judicious choice for the reflux ratio, the increase in the
capital cost due to the increase in the number of stages should be
traded-off against the savings in the operating costs due to reduced
condenser and reboiler loads.
For our distillation column, if we reduce the reflux ratio to 1.227
(Design 3), we have to use 30 stages to preserve the separation.
The T-H CGCC for Design 3 is shown in the following figure:
Comparison of the design parameters for Design 2 and Design 3
reveals the energy savings achieved by reducing the reflux:
No. of stages 15 30
Feed location 7 14
Feed temperature 100 C 100 C
Condenser duty -28.02 MW -4.48MW
temperature
temperature
temperature
Feed Conditioning Scope for adjustment of feed quality can be identified from sharp
enthalpy changes on the Stage-H or T-H CGCC.
A feed that is excessively sub-cooled will show a sharp enthalpy
change on the reboiler side of the CGCC. The extent of this change
determines the approximate feed heating duty required. Similar
arguments also apply for feed cooling. Changes in the heat duty of
feed pre-heaters or pre-coolers will lead to similar duty changes in
the column reboiler or condeser loads, respectively.
The Stage-H CGCC for Design 3 of our distillation column is
shown in the following figure. The enthalpy change on the reboiler
side is noticeably sharper. Therefore, our design can benefit from
addition of a feed pre-heater.
Design 4 adds a feed pre-heater with a duty of 2.34 MW. The
comparison of the design parameters for Design 3 and Design 4 is
shown in the following table:
No. of stages 30 30
Feed location 14 14
Feed temperature 100 C 123.19 C
temperature
temperature
temperature
Note that feed preheating not only reduces the reboiler duty but
also reduces the temperature levels at which the hot utility (for the
reboiler and for the pre-heating the feed) needs to be supplied.
Side Condensing or Feed conditioning is normally preferred to side condensing or side
Reboiling reboiling, as such modifications are external to the column and
potentially at a more convenient temperature level.
The scope for side condensing or side reboiling can be identified
from the area beneath or above the CGCC pinch point (area
between the ideal and actual enthalpy profiles). If a significant area
exists, say below the pinch, a side-condenser can be placed at an
appropriate temperature level. This allows heat removal from the
column using a cheaper cold utility. A similar converse argument
applies to scope for placing a side reboiler.
The T-H CGCC for Design 4 is as shown below:
As shown by the red lines, we can reduce the area on the reboiler
side of the CGCC by using a side reboiler at stage 22 with a duty
of about 6.5 MW (Design 5). The T-H CGCC for Design 5 is
shown in the following figure:
The following table shows the comparison of design parameters
for Design 4 and Design 5:
No. of stages 30 30
Feed location 14 14
Feed temperature 123.19 C 123.19 C
temperature
temperature
Side reboiler duty – 6.5 MW
Side reboiler – 184.49 C
temperature
Note that, the addition of the side reboiler, not only reduces the
main reboiler duty but also reduces the temperature levels at which
the hot utility (for the main reboiler and for the side reboiler) needs
to be supplied.
Exergy analysis provides a supplementary tool in identifying the
above design modification targets. For example, the exergy loss
profiles for Design 3 and Design 4 of our distillation column are
shown below:
Note that the high exergy loss at the feed stage for Design 3 (due to
the sub-cooled feed) has been reduced substantially in Design 4 by
pre-heating the feed.
The hydraulic analysis results show how the vapor and liquid flows
in the column compare with the minimum and maximum limits.
This comparison can be used separately or in conjunction with the
thermal analysis results for removing possible bottlenecks in
distillation columns.
For example, let us consider that Design 2 of our distillation
column contains single pass sieve trays of 4.25 m diameter. The
hydraulic analysis results for vapor flow through the column are as
shown:
For stages 22 to 29, the vapor flow through the column exceeds the
flooding limit. This is a bottleneck, which can possibly be removed
by increasing the column diameter for this bottom section of the
column. Note that the sharp increase in the vapor flow at the feed
stage (stage 14) is due to the liquid part of the feed at this stage.
Therefore, another option to remove the bottleneck is to decrease
the amount of liquid fraction of the feed to the column by pre-
heating it. This is exactly what we did in Design 3.
The hydraulic analysis results for vapor flow through the column
for Design 3 are as shown below:
Notice that feed pre-heating introduced in Design 2 not only

improved the thermal efficiency of Design 2 but also eliminated
the vapor flow bottleneck in Design 2.
Reference
Dhole, V. R., and B. Linnhoff, “Distillation Column Targets,

Computers Chem. Engng., 17, 549-560 (1993).
Index
sum-rates: 4-20, 4-24, 4-39, 4-40
A Algorithms: 4-20, 4-24, 4-25, 4-26, 4-39, 4-
40, 4-53, 10-18
Absorbers 4-57
analysis
MultiFrac: 4-28
hydraulic A-18
RadFrac: 4-9
thermal A-18
RateFrac 4-57, 4-58
ASME method
Absorbers: 4-9, 4-28
Compr: 6-9
ACM
MCompr: 6-15
Using with Aspen Plus: 9-8
ASME method: 6-9, 6-15
ACM: 9-8
Aspen Custom Modeler
ACMUser3
Using with Aspen Plus: 9-8
flowsheet connectivity: 9-8
Aspen Custom Modeler: 9-8
Overview: 9-8
Azeotropic distillation
specifying: 9-8
RadFrac: 4-20
ACMUser3: 9-8
Azeotropic distillation: 4-20
Aerotran
flash specifications: 3-26
B
overview: 3-25 Baffle geometry
physical properties: 3-26 HeatX: 3-12
solids: 3-26 Baffle geometry: 3-12
specifying: 3-26 Baghouses
Aerotran: 3-25, 3-26 FabFl: 8-18
Air separation resistance coefficients: 8-20
MultiFrac: 4-28 separation efficiency: 8-21
RadFrac: 4-21 Baghouses: 8-18, 8-20, 8-21
Air separation: 4-21, 4-28 Ballast trays
Air-cooled heat exchangers values: A-10
Aerotran: 3-25 Ballast trays: A-10
Air-cooled heat exchangers: 3-25 Batch distillation
Algorithms BatchFrac: 4-78
convergence: 4-20, 4-24, 4-25, 4-26, 4-39, Batch distillation: 4-78
4-40, 4-53 Batch fractionation
dynamic scenario: 10-18 BatchFrac: 4-78
inside-out: 4-24, 4-40 Batch fractionation: 4-78
Newton: 4-20, 4-24, 4-39, 4-40 Batch reactors
nonideal: 4-20, 4-24 RBatch: 5-24
standard: 4-24, 4-39, 4-40 Batch reactors: 5-24
Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Index • 1

BatchFrac filter cake: 8-43
columns: 4-80, 4-81 filtrate flow rate: 8-44
flowsheet connectivity: 4-80 flowsheet connectivity: 8-42
free-water calculations: 4-81 overview: 8-42
physical properties: 4-82 pressure drop: 8-44
reactive distillation: 4-82 rating: 8-43
specifying: 4-80 separation efficiency: 8-44
three-phase calculations: 4-81 sizing: 8-43
working with: 4-78 specifying: 8-43
BatchFrac: 4-78, 4-80, 4-81, 4-82 CFuge: 8-42, 8-43, 8-44
B-JAC Chilton-Colburn analogy
Aerotran interface: 3-25 RateFrac: 4-69, 4-76
Hetran interface: 3-23 Chilton-Colburn analogy: 4-69, 4-76
B-JAC: 3-23, 3-25 ClChng
Bolles method flowsheet connectivity: 7-6
tray flooding calculations: A-8 overview: 7-6
Bolles method: A-8 specifying: 7-6
Bond work index (BWI) stream class change: 7-6
Crusher: 8-11, 8-13 ClChng: 7-6
Bond work index (BWI): 8-11, 8-13 Coal
Brake horsepower grinding: 8-14
Compr: 6-11 Coal: 8-14
MCompr: 6-17 Column configuration
Brake horsepower: 6-11, 6-17 RateFrac: 4-63
Bubble cap trays Column configuration: 4-63
cap diameter: A-9 Column Targeting A-18
Bubble cap trays: A-9 Columns 4-57, 4-58
BatchFrac: 4-80, 4-81
C Distl: 4-5
DSTWU: 4-3
Cavitation index
Extract: 4-84
Valve model: 6-26
MultiFrac: 4-28
Cavitation index: 6-26
operation: 4-81
CCD
packings: A-11
component attributes: 8-51
PetroFrac: 4-44
physical property requirements: A-16
medium temperature: 8-52
pressure drop calculations: A-2
mixing efficiency: 8-52
RadFrac: 4-9, 4-13
overview: 8-50
RateFrac 4-57
profiles: 8-51
rating: A-2
pseudostreams: 8-51
SCFrac: 4-7
specifying: 8-51
setup: 4-80
CCD: 8-50, 8-51, 8-52
sizing: A-2
Centrifuge filters
Columns: 4-3, 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-13, 4-28, 4-
CFuge: 8-42
44, 4-80, 4-81, 4-84, A-2, A-11, A-16
Centrifuge filters: 8-42
Component ratio
CFuge
2 • Index Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

RateFrac: 4-68 Crude units: 4-7
Component ratio: 4-68 Crusher
Component separators Bond work index (BWI): 8-11, 8-13
Sep: 2-10 breakage functions: 8-11
Sep2: 2-12 flowsheet connectivity: 8-10
Component separators: 2-10, 2-12 Hardgrove grindability index (HGI): 8-11,
Compr 8-14
ASME method: 6-9 overview: 8-10
flowsheet connectivity: 6-9 power requirement: 8-13
GPSA method: 6-9 primary crusher: 8-12
isentropic efficiency: 6-10 reduction ratios: 8-12
mechanical efficiency: 6-11 secondary crusher: 8-12
Mollier method: 6-9 selection functions: 8-11
net work load: 6-9 specifying: 8-11
overview: 6-8 Crusher: 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 8-13, 8-14
performance curves: 6-9 Cryogenic applications
polytropic efficiency: 6-10 RadFrac: 4-21
specifying: 6-9 Cryogenic applications: 4-21
steam pressure: 6-8 Crystallizer
Compr: 6-8, 6-9, 6-10, 6-11 crystal growth rate: 8-6
Compressors crystal nucleation rate: 8-7
Compr: 6-8 flowsheet connectivity: 8-3
Heater model: 3-2 magma recirculation: 8-5
MCompr: 6-13 overview: 8-3
Compressors: 3-2, 6-8, 6-13 particle size distribution (PSD): 8-8, 8-9
Condensers population balance: 8-7
PetroFrac: 4-48 recirculation: 8-5
RateFrac: 4-64 saturation calculation: 8-6
Condensers: 4-48, 4-64 solubility: 8-5
Continuous stirred tank reactor specifying: 8-4
RCSTR: 5-16 supersaturation: 8-6
Continuous stirred tank reactor: 5-16 Crystallizer: 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, 8-6, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9
Convergence Cyclone
algorithms: 4-24, 4-39, 4-40 design calculations: 8-23
RateFrac: 4-69 diameter calculation: 8-25
Convergence algorithms dimension ratios: 8-25
PetroFrac: 4-53 dimensions: 8-23, 8-27
Convergence algorithms: 4-53 efficiency correlations: 8-24
Convergence: 4-24, 4-39, 4-40, 4-69 flowsheet connectivity: 8-22
Coolers geometry: 8-27
Heater model: 3-2 Leith and Licht correlation: 8-24
RadFrac: 4-15 operating ranges: 8-24
RateFrac: 4-67 overview: 8-22
Coolers: 3-2, 4-15, 4-67 pressure drop: 8-24
Crude units rating calculations: 8-23
SCFrac: 4-7 separation efficiency: 8-23

Shepherd and Lapple correlation: 8-24 SCFrac: 4-7
solids loading correction: 8-27 Distillation: 4-3, 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-23, 4-28, 4-
specifying: 8-23 44, 4-78
vane constant: 8-26 Distl
Cyclone: 8-22, 8-23, 8-24, 8-25, 8-26, 8-27 Edmister approach: 4-5
D overview: 4-5
specifying: 4-6
Darcy correlation
Distl: 4-5, 4-6
Pres-Relief: 10-10
DSTWU
Darcy correlation: 10-10
Decanter model
Gilliland's method: 4-3
overview: 4-3
Gibbs free energy: 2-8
reflux ratio: 4-3
KLL coefficients: 2-8
specifying: 4-4
liquid phases: 2-7
Underwood's method: 4-3
liquid-liquid distribution coefficients: 2-8
Winn's method: 4-3
overview: 2-6
DSTWU: 4-3, 4-4
phase-splitting methods: 2-8
Dukler correlation
separation efficiencies: 2-8
Pres-Relief: 10-10
solids entrainment: 2-9
Dukler correlation: 10-10
specifying: 2-6, 2-7
Dupl 7-4
Decanter model: 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9
Decanters
overview 7-4
CCD: 8-50
specifying: 7-5
Decanter model: 2-6
Dupl: 7-4, 7-5
Flash3: 2-4
Dynamic scenario algorithm
RadFrac: 4-15, 4-26
Pres-Relief: 10-18
Decanters: 2-4, 2-6, 4-15, 4-26, 8-50
Dynamic scenario algorithm: 10-18
Design mode
RadFrac: 4-25
E
RateFrac: 4-68
Design mode: 4-25, 4-68 Edmister approach
Design specification convergence Distl: 4-5
MultiFrac: 4-41 Edmister approach: 4-5
Design specification convergence: 4-41 Efficiencies
DIERS calculations Compr: 6-10, 6-11
Pres-Relief: 10-17 MCompr: 6-16, 6-17
DIERS calculations: 10-17 RadFrac: 4-19
Distillation 4-57 Efficiencies: 4-19, 6-10, 6-11, 6-16, 6-17
batch: 4-78 Electrostatic precipitators
Distl: 4-5 ESP: 8-32
DSTWU: 4-3 Electrostatic precipitators: 8-32
MultiFrac: 4-28 Emergency relief vents (ERV)
PetroFrac: 4-44 Pres-Relief: 10-15
RadFrac: 4-9, 4-23 Emergency relief vents (ERV): 10-15
RateFrac 4-57 EO Usage Notes for User3: 9-7

Equilibrium constants overview: 8-18
REquil: 5-10 resistance coefficients: 8-20
RGibbs: 5-14 separation efficiency: 8-21
Equilibrium constants: 5-10, 5-14 specifying: 8-18
Equilibrium reactors FabFl: 8-18, 8-19, 8-20, 8-21
REquil: 5-9 Fabric filters
RGibbs: 5-11 FabFl: 8-18
Equilibrium reactors: 5-9, 5-11 Fabric filters: 8-18
ESP Fair method
flowsheet connectivity: 8-32 tray flooding calculations: A-8
gas velocity: 8-33, 8-35 Fair method: A-8
operating range: 8-33 Feed furnaces
overview: 8-32 PetroFrac: 4-48, 4-49
particle separation: 8-33, 8-35 Feed furnaces: 4-48, 4-49
power requirement: 8-35 Feed stream conventions
pressure drop: 8-35 RateFrac: 4-62
separation efficiency: 8-33 Feed stream conventions: 4-62
specifying: 8-33 Feed streams
ESP: 8-32, 8-33, 8-35 PetroFrac: 4-48
Ethylene plant primary fractionators Feed streams: 4-48
MultiFrac: 4-28 Film coefficients
PetroFrac: 4-44 HeatX: 3-9, 3-14
Ethylene plant primary fractionators: 4-28, Film coefficients: 3-9, 3-14
4-44 Filter model
Evaporators filter cake characteristics: 8-46
Flash2: 2-2 flowsheet connectivity: 8-45
Flash3: 2-4 overview: 8-45
Evaporators: 2-2, 2-4 pressure drop: 8-46
Exchanger configuration separation efficiency: 8-47
HeatX: 3-10 specifying: 8-45
Exchanger configuration: 3-10 Filter model: 8-45, 8-46, 8-47
Exchanger geometry Filters
HeatX: 3-4 CFuge: 8-42
Exchanger geometry: 3-4 FabFl: 8-18
Extract Filter model: 8-45
flowsheet connectivity: 4-85 Filters: 8-18, 8-42, 8-45
overview: 4-84 Flanigan correlation
specifying: 4-85 Pres-Relief: 10-10
Extract: 4-84, 4-85 Flanigan correlation: 10-10
Flash tables
F zone analysis: 3-21
Flash tables: 3-21
FabFl
Flash2
calculation options: 8-18
electrolytes: 2-3
filtering time: 8-19
overview: 2-2
operating ranges: 8-19

solids: 2-3 General purpose valves
specifying: 2-3 Pres-Relief: 10-13
Flash2: 2-2, 2-3 General purpose valves: 10-13
Flash3 Gibbs free energy
electrolytes: 2-5 Decanter model: 2-8
flowsheet connectivity: 2-4 REquil: 5-10
overview: 2-4 RGibbs: 5-11
solids: 2-5 Gibbs free energy: 2-8, 5-10, 5-11
specifying: 2-5 Gilliland's correlation
streams: 2-4 DSTWU: 4-3
Flash3: 2-4, 2-5 Gilliland's correlation: 4-3
Flashes Glitsch Ballast method
Flash2: 2-2 tray flooding calculations: A-8
Flash3: 2-4 Glitsch Ballast method: A-8
Flashes: 2-2, 2-4 GPSA method
Flexitrays Compr: 6-9
values: A-10 MCompr: 6-15
Flexitrays: A-10 GPSA method: 6-9, 6-15
Float valve trays
values: A-10 H
Float valve trays: A-10
Hardgrove grindability index (HGI)
Flowsheet Connectivity for User3: 9-6
Crusher: 8-11, 8-14
Fractionators
Hardgrove grindability index (HGI): 8-11,
PetroFrac: 4-44
8-14
Fractionators: 4-44
Heat exchangers
Free-water calculations
Aerotran: 3-25
BatchFrac: 4-81
computational structure: 3-21
MultiFrac: 4-43
Heater model: 3-2
PetroFrac: 4-55
HeatX: 3-4
RadFrac: 4-18
Hetran: 3-23
RateFrac: 4-67
log-mean temperature difference: 3-7, 3-
Free-water calculations: 4-18, 4-43, 4-55, 4-
20
67, 4-81
MHeatX: 3-19
FSplit
multistream: 3-19
zone analysis: 3-21
overview: 1-5
Heat exchangers: 3-2, 3-4, 3-7, 3-19, 3-20,
specifying: 1-6
3-21, 3-23, 3-25
FSplit: 1-5, 1-6
Heat transfer coefficient
HeatX: 3-8
G
Heat transfer coefficient: 3-8
Gas-solid separators Heater model
Cyclone: 8-22 electrolytes: 3-3
ESP: 8-32 flowsheet connectivity: 3-2
FabFl: 8-18 overview: 3-2
VScrub: 8-29 solids: 3-3
Gas-solid separators: 8-18, 8-22, 8-29, 8-32 specifying: 3-2, 3-3

Heater model: 3-2, 3-3 physical properties: 3-24
Heaters solids: 3-24
Heater model: 3-2 specifying: 3-24
MultiFrac: 4-36 Hetran: 3-23, 3-24
RadFrac: 4-15 HyCyc
RateFrac: 4-67 dimension ratios: 8-39
Heaters: 3-2, 4-15, 4-36, 4-67 dimensions: 8-40
Heat-interstaged columns feed splitting: 8-38
MultiFrac: 4-28 flowsheet connectivity: 8-36
Heat-interstaged columns: 4-28 geometry: 8-40
HeatX operating ranges: 8-37
baffle geometry: 3-12 overview: 8-36
electrolytes: 3-16 particle velocity: 8-39
exchanger configuration: 3-10 pressure drop correlation: 8-39
exchanger geometry: 3-4 rating: 8-37
film coefficients: 3-9, 3-14 separation efficiency: 8-37
flash specifications: 3-16 sizing: 8-37
flowsheet connectivity: 3-5 solids separation: 8-36
heat transfer coefficient: 3-8 specifying: 8-37
log-mean temperature difference: 3-7 velocity correlation: 8-39
model correlations: 3-14 HyCyc: 8-36, 8-37, 8-38, 8-39, 8-40
nozzle geometry: 3-14 hydraulic analysis A-18
option sets: 3-16 Hydraulic turbines
overview: 3-4 Pump model: 6-2
physical properties: 3-16 Hydraulic turbines: 6-2
pressure drop calculations: 3-9, 3-14 Hydrocyclones
pressure drop: 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 HyCyc: 8-36
rating calculations: 3-4, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8 Hydrocyclones: 8-36
shell-side film coefficient: 3-12
solids: 3-16 I
specifying: 3-6
Inside-out algorithms
streams: 3-5
MultiFrac: 4-40
TEMA shells: 3-10
RadFrac: 4-24
tube geometry: 3-13
Inside-out algorithms: 4-24, 4-40
tube-side film coefficient: 3-13
Isentropic compressors
zone analysis: 3-4
Compr: 6-8, 6-10
HeatX: 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-
MCompr: 6-13
12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-16
Isentropic compressors: 6-8, 6-10, 6-13
HETP
Isentropic turbines
packings calculations: A-11
Compr: 6-8
RateFrac: 4-60, 4-68
MCompr: 6-13
HETP: 4-60, 4-68, A-11
Isentropic turbines: 6-8, 6-13
Hetran
flash specifications: 3-24
K
overview: 3-23 Knock-out drums
Decanter model: 2-6

Flash2: 2-2 specific diameter: 6-18
Flash3: 2-4 specific speed: 6-17
Knock-out drums: 2-2, 2-4, 2-6 specifying: 6-14, 6-15
MCompr: 6-13, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-18
L MHeatX
computational structure: 3-21
Leith and Licht correlation
electrolytes: 3-22
Cyclone: 8-24
flash tables: 3-21
Leith and Licht correlation: 8-24
Liquid-liquid extraction
LNG exchanger: 3-19
Extract: 4-84
log-mean temperature difference: 3-20
Liquid-liquid extraction: 4-84
overview: 3-19
Liquid-solid separators
pinch points estimation: 3-21
CFuge: 8-42
solids: 3-22
Filter model: 8-45
specifying: 3-20
HyCyc: 8-36
zone analysis: 3-19, 3-20, 3-21
Liquid-solid separators: 8-36, 8-42, 8-45
MHeatX: 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22
LNG exchanger
Mixer model
MHeatX: 3-19
LNG exchanger: 3-19
overview: 1-2
Lockhart-Martinelli correlation
specifying: 1-3
Pres-Relief: 10-10
Mixer model: 1-2, 1-3
Lockhart-Martinelli correlation: 10-10
Mixers
Log-mean temperature difference
Heater model: 3-2
HeatX: 3-7
Mixer model: 1-2
MHeatX: 3-20
Mixers: 1-2, 3-2
Log-mean temperature difference: 3-7, 3-20
Model correlations
HeatX: 3-14
M
Model correlations: 3-14
Manipulators 7-4 Mollier method
ClChng: 7-6 Compr: 6-9
Dupl 7-4 MCompr: 6-15
Mult: 7-2 Mollier method: 6-9, 6-15
Manipulators: 7-2, 7-6 Mult
MCompr flowsheet connectivity: 7-2
ASME method: 6-15 overview: 7-2
brake horsepower: 6-17 specifying: 7-2
flow coefficient: 6-18 Mult: 7-2
flowsheet connectivity: 6-14 MultiFrac
GPSA method: 6-15 algorithms: 4-40
head coefficient: 6-18 connecting streams: 4-34
isentropic efficiency: 6-16 convergence algorithms: 4-39, 4-40
mechanical efficiency: 6-17 design mode: 4-39
Mollier method: 6-15 design specification convergence: 4-41
overview: 6-13 efficiencies: 4-38
parasitic pressure loss: 6-17 ethylene plant primary fractionator: 4-28
polytropic efficiency: 6-16

feed stream conventions: 4-33 Newton algorithm: 4-20, 4-24, 4-40, 4-69
flow rate: 4-34, 4-36, 4-39 Nonequilibrium fractionation 4-57
flow ratio: 4-37 RateFrac 4-57
flowsheet connectivity: 4-30 Nozzle geometry
free-water calculations: 4-43 HeatX: 3-14
heaters: 4-36 Nozzle geometry: 3-14
initialization methods: 4-42
Murphree efficiency: 4-38 P
Newton algorithm: 4-40
Packings
overview: 4-28
calculations: A-11
packings: 4-27, 4-43
capacity calculations: A-12
physical properties: 4-42
liquid holdup calculations: A-15
property methods: 4-42
MultiFrac: 4-27, 4-43
rating mode: 4-39
PetroFrac: 4-56
solids: 4-43
specifying: 4-31, 4-32
pressure profile: A-15
stream definitions: 4-32
RateFrac: 4-64
streams: 4-30, 4-31, 4-33, 4-34, 4-39
rating: A-12
sum-rates algorithm: 4-40
sizing: A-12
trays: 4-27, 4-43
specifying: A-2
vaporization efficiency: 4-38
Stichlmair correlation: A-15
MultiFrac: 4-27, 4-28, 4-30, 4-31, 4-32, 4-
types: A-2, A-11, A-12
33, 4-34, 4-36, 4-37, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40,
Packings: 4-27, 4-43, 4-56, 4-64, A-2, A-11,
4-41, 4-42, 4-43
A-12, A-14, A-15
Multistage fractionation units
Particle separation
MultiFrac: 4-28
ESP: 8-33, 8-35
Multistage fractionation units: 4-28
Particle separation: 8-33, 8-35
Murphree efficiency
PetroFrac
MultiFrac: 4-38
condensers: 4-48
PetroFrac: 4-52
convergence algorithms: 4-53
RadFrac: 4-19
design mode: 4-54
RateFrac: 4-60, 4-68
efficiencies: 4-52
Murphree efficiency: 4-19, 4-38, 4-52, 4-60,
ethylene plant primary fractionator: 4-44
4-68
feed furnace: 4-48, 4-49
feed streams: 4-48
N
Napthali-Sandholm algorithm free-water calculations: 4-55
RadFrac: 4-24 liquid runback: 4-51
Napthali-Sandholm algorithm: 4-24 main column: 4-47, 4-48
Nesting Murphree efficiency: 4-52
RadFrac: 4-25 overview: 4-44
Nesting: 4-25 packings: 4-56
Newton algorithm physical properties: 4-55
MultiFrac: 4-40 property methods: 4-55
RadFrac: 4-20, 4-24 pumparounds: 4-51
RateFrac: 4-69 rating mode: 4-54

reboilers: 4-48 two-phase correlations: 6-32
side strippers: 4-47, 4-51 valve modeling: 6-32
solids: 4-55 Pipe model: 6-28, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-32
specifying: 4-48 Pipes
streams: 4-46 Pipe model: 6-28
trays: 4-56 Pipes: 6-28
vaporization efficiency: 4-52 Piping system
PetroFrac: 4-44, 4-46, 4-47, 4-48, 4-49, 4- Pres-Relief: 10-10
51, 4-52, 4-53, 4-54, 4-55, 4-56 Piping system: 10-10
Petroleum refining fractionation Plug flow reactors
MultiFrac: 4-28 RPlug: 5-20
PetroFrac: 4-44 Plug flow reactors: 5-20
Petroleum refining fractionation: 4-28, 4-44 Polytropic compressors
Petroleum/petrochemical applications Compr: 6-8, 6-10
RadFrac: 4-20 MCompr: 6-13
Petroleum/petrochemical applications: 4-20 Polytropic compressors: 6-8, 6-10, 6-13
Physical properties Pres-Relief
BatchFrac: 4-82 3% rule: 10-7
columns: A-16 97% rule: 10-8
HeatX: 3-16 Beggs and Brill correlation: 10-10
Physical properties: 3-16, 4-82, A-16 calculation methods: 10-22
Physical property methods capacity runs: 10-6
RateFrac: 4-67 code compliance: 10-6
Physical property methods: 4-67 convergence methods: 10-22
Pinch points credit factors: 10-3
estimating: 3-21 Darcy correlation: 10-10
Pinch points: 3-21 data tables: 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15
Pipe model DIERS calculations: 10-17
Design-Spec convergence loop: 6-31 disengagement options: 10-17
downstream and upstream integration: 6- Dukler correlation: 10-10
30 dynamic scenarios: 10-2, 10-6, 10-16, 10-
erosional velocity: 6-31 17, 10-18
fittings modeling: 6-32 fire scenario: 10-3
flash options: 6-30 flow equations: 10-19
flowsheet connectivity: 6-29 heat exchanger shell: 10-16
fraction factor correlations: 6-32 heat flux scenario: 10-5
holdup correlations: 6-32 insulation credit factor: 10-22
integration direction: 6-30 Lockhart-Martinelli correlation: 10-10
liquid holdup correlations: 6-32 manufacturers' tables: 10-12, 10-13, 10-
methane gas systems: 6-32 14, 10-15
overview: 6-28 nozzle flow equation: 10-20
physical property calculations: 6-30 overview: 10-2
pressure drop calculations: 6-30 pipe diameters: 10-12
pressure specification: 6-29 pipe flow equation: 10-19
specifying: 6-29 pipe specifications: 10-10
stream specification: 6-30 reactions: 10-9

relief system flow rating scenario: 10-5 head coefficient: 6-6
relief system: 10-9 net positive suction head (NPSH): 6-4
relief valve flow rating scenario: 10-5 overview: 6-2
rupture disks: 10-15 specific speed: 6-4
safety relief valves: 10-14 specifying: 6-3
sample solution: 10-18 suction specific speed: 6-5
scenarios: 10-3 Pump model: 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6
sizing rules: 10-7, 10-8 Pumparounds
Slack correlation: 10-10 RadFrac: 4-16
specifying: 10-2, 10-9, 10-10 Pumparounds: 4-16
spheres: 10-16 Pumps
steady-state scenarios: 10-6 Heater model: 3-2
stop criteria: 10-17 Pump model: 6-2
streams: 10-6 Pumps: 3-2, 6-2
user-specified vessel: 10-16
valve cycling: 10-15 R
valve types: 10-9, 10-13
RadFrac
vents: 10-15
absorbers: 4-21
vessel geometry: 10-16
air separation: 4-21
vessel head types: 10-16
algorithms: 4-20
vessel jacket: 10-16
azeotropic distillation: 4-20
X% rule: 10-7
column configuration: 4-12, 4-13
Pres-Relief: 10-2, 10-3, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7,
convergence algorithms: 4-20, 4-24
10-8, 10-9, 10-10, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14,
convergence methods: 4-24, 4-25, 4-26
10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-19, 10-
coolers: 4-15
20, 10-22
decanters: 4-15, 4-26
Pressure changers
design mode convergence: 4-25
Compr: 6-8
design mode: 4-22
MCompr: 6-13
design specifications: 4-25
Pipe model: 6-28
efficiencies: 4-19
Pump model: 6-2
feed streams: 4-12
Valve model: 6-19
Pressure changers: 6-2, 6-8, 6-13, 6-19, 6-28
free-water calculations: 4-18
Pressure drop calculations
heaters: 4-15
HeatX: 3-9, 3-14
inside-out algorithms: 4-24
Pressure drop calculations: 3-9, 3-14
kettle reboilers: 4-13
Pressure drop models
Murphree efficiency: 4-19
HeatX: 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
Napthali-Sandholm algorithm: 4-24
Pipe model: 6-28
nested algorithm: 4-25
Pressure drop models: 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 6-28
Newton algorithm: 4-20, 4-24
Pressure relief systems
nonideal systems: 4-20
Pres-Relief: 10-2
overview: 4-9
Pressure relief systems: 10-2
petroleum/petrochemical applications: 4-
Pump model
20
flow coefficient: 6-6
physical properties: 4-26
property methods: 4-26

pumparounds: 4-16 mass transfer coefficients: 4-69, 4-71, 4-
rating mode: 4-21 72, 4-74, 4-75
reactive distillation: 4-23 Murphree efficiency: 4-60, 4-68
reboilers: 4-13 Newton algorithm: 4-69
salt precipitation: 4-23 overview 4-57
simultaneous convergence: 4-26 packing specifications: 4-64
solids handling: 4-26 physical property method: 4-67
specifying: 4-11, 4-12 rate-based modeling: 4-60
stage numbering: 4-12 rating mode: 4-67
streams: 4-11 reactions: 4-66
strippers: 4-21 reactive distillation: 4-66
thermosyphon reboilers: 4-13 segments: 4-62, 4-64, 4-68
three-phase calculations: 4-18, 4-21 side duties: 4-67
two-phase calculations: 4-21 sieve tray column correlations: 4-75
UA calculations: 4-15 solution times: 4-69
vaporizaton efficiency: 4-19 specifying: 4-59, 4-62, 4-64
RadFrac: 4-9, 4-11, 4-12, 4-13, 4-15, 4-16, stream definitions: 4-62
4-18, 4-19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-24, streams: 4-59
4-25, 4-26 tray column correlations: 4-74, 4-75
Rate-based modeling tray column: 4-72
RateFrac 4-57 tray specifications: 4-64
RateFrac: 4-60 utility exchangers: 4-67
Rate-based modeling: 4-60 valve tray column: 4-72
RateFrac 4-57 RateFrac: 4-59, 4-60, 4-62, 4-63, 4-64, 4-66,
bubble-cap tray column: 4-74 4-67, 4-68, 4-69, 4-71, 4-72, 4-74, 4-75,
Chilton-Colburn analogy: 4-69, 4-76 4-76
column configuration: 4-63 Rating mode
column numbering: 4-62 RateFrac: 4-67
component ratio: 4-68 Rating mode: 4-67
connecting streams: 4-64 RBatch
convergence: 4-69 batch operation: 5-28
coolers: 4-67 cycle time: 5-27
correlations: 4-69, 4-71 flowsheet connectivity: 5-24
design mode: 4-68 mass balances: 5-27
efficiencies: 4-60, 4-68 overview: 5-24
equilibrium stages: 4-66 reactions: 5-26
feed stream conventions: 4-62 specifying: 5-25
flowsheet connectivity: 4-59 stop criteria: 5-27
Fortran subroutines: 4-69 temperature controller: 5-26
free-water calculations: 4-67 RBatch: 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27, 5-28
heat transfer coefficients: 4-76 RCSTR
heaters: 4-67 flowsheet connectivity: 5-16
HETP: 4-60, 4-68 overview: 5-16
interfacial areas: 4-69, 4-71, 4-72, 4-74, 4- phase volume: 5-17
75 reaction kinetics: 5-17
residence time: 5-18

scaling methods: 5-18 solids: 5-15
solids reactions: 5-18 specifying: 5-12
specifying: 5-17 RGibbs: 5-11, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14, 5-15
variable scaling: 5-18 Rigorous distillation 4-57
RCSTR: 5-16, 5-17, 5-18 MultiFrac: 4-28
Reactions PetroFrac: 4-44
RateFrac: 4-66 RadFrac: 4-9
Reactions: 4-66 RateFrac 4-57
Reactive distillation Rigorous distillation: 4-9, 4-28, 4-44
BatchFrac: 4-82 Rigorous extraction
RadFrac: 4-23 Extract: 4-84
Reactive distillation: 4-23, 4-82 Rigorous extraction: 4-84
Reactors RPlug
RBatch: 5-24 coolant: 5-22
RCSTR: 5-16 flowsheet connectivity: 5-20
REquil: 5-9 overview: 5-20
RGibbs: 5-11 reactions: 5-23
RPlug: 5-20 solids: 5-23
RStoic: 5-3 specifying: 5-22
RYield: 5-7 RPlug: 5-20, 5-22, 5-23
Reactors: 5-3, 5-7, 5-9, 5-11, 5-16, 5-20, 5- RStoic
24 flowsheet connectivity: 5-3
Reboilers heat of reaction: 5-4
PetroFrac: 4-48 overview: 5-3
RadFrac: 4-13 product selectivity: 5-4, 5-5
Reboilers: 4-13, 4-48 specifying: 5-4
Relief devices stream specifications: 5-3
Pres-Relief: 10-9 RStoic: 5-3, 5-4, 5-5
Relief devices: 10-9 RYield
REquil calculation types: 5-8
equilibrium constants: 5-10 flowsheet connectivity: 5-7
flowsheet connectivity: 5-9 heat duty specification: 5-7
Gibbs free energy: 5-10 overview: 5-7
net heat duty: 5-9 specifying: 5-8
overview: 5-9 yield distribution: 5-8
solids: 5-10 RYield: 5-7, 5-8
specifying: 5-10
streams: 5-9 S
REquil: 5-9, 5-10
Salt precipitation
RGibbs
RadFrac: 4-23
chemical equilibrium: 5-13
Salt precipitation: 4-23
SCFrac
overview: 5-11
crude units: 4-7
phase equilibrium: 5-12, 5-14
reactions: 5-14
overview: 4-7
restricted chemical equilibrium: 5-14
specifying: 4-8

vacuum towers: 4-7 SCFrac: 4-7
SCFrac: 4-7, 4-8 Shortcut distillation: 4-3, 4-5, 4-7
Screen Simultaneous convergence
flowsheet connectivity: 8-15 RadFrac: 4-26
operating levels: 8-16 Simultaneous convergence: 4-26
overview: 8-15 Sizing recommendations
screen size correlation: 8-16 Pres-Relief: 10-8
selection function: 8-16 Sizing recommendations: 10-8
separation efficiency: 8-17 Slack correlation
separation strength: 8-16 Pres-Relief: 10-10
specifying: 8-15 Slack correlation: 10-10
Screen: 8-15, 8-16, 8-17 Solids
Sep Crystallizer: 8-3
flowsheet connectivity: 2-10 Flash2: 2-3
inlet pressure: 2-11 Flash3: 2-5
outlet stream conditions: 2-11 Heater model: 3-3
overview: 2-10 MHeatX: 3-22
specifying: 2-10 RGibbs: 5-15
Sep: 2-10, 2-11 Solids crushers
Sep2 Crusher: 8-10
flowsheet connectivity: 2-12 Solids crushers: 8-10
inlet pressure: 2-13 Solids separators
outlet stream conditions: 2-13 CFuge: 8-42
overview: 2-12 Crusher: 8-10
specifying: 2-12 Cyclone: 8-22
substreams: 2-12 ESP: 8-32
Sep2: 2-12, 2-13 FabFl: 8-18
Separators Filter model: 8-45
Decanter model: 2-6 HyCyc: 8-36
Flash2: 2-2 Screen: 8-15
Flash3: 2-4 VScrub: 8-29
Sep: 2-10 Solids separators: 8-10, 8-15, 8-18, 8-22, 8-
Sep2: 2-12 29, 8-32, 8-36, 8-42, 8-45
Separators: 2-2, 2-4, 2-6, 2-10, 2-12 Solids washers
Shell and tube heat exchangers CCD: 8-50
Hetran: 3-23 SWash: 8-48
Shell and tube heat exchangers: 3-23 Solids washers: 8-48, 8-50
Shell-side film coefficient Solids: 2-3, 2-5, 3-3, 3-22, 5-15, 8-3
HeatX: 3-12 Specifying User3: 9-7
Shell-side film coefficient: 3-12 Splitters
Shepherd and Lapple correlation FSplit: 1-5
Cyclone: 8-24 Sep: 2-10
Shepherd and Lapple correlation: 8-24 Sep2: 2-12
Shortcut distillation SSplit: 1-8
Distl: 4-5 Splitters: 1-5, 1-8, 2-10, 2-12
DSTWU: 4-3 SSplit

flowsheet connectivity: 1-8 SSplit: 1-8
overview: 1-8 Substream splitters: 1-8
specifying: 1-8 Sum-rates algorithm
SSplit: 1-8 MultiFrac: 4-40
Stichlmair correlation Sum-rates algorithm: 4-40
packings calculations: A-15 SWash
Stichlmair correlation: A-15 bypass fraction: 8-49
Stoichiometric reactors flowsheet connectivity: 8-48
RStoic: 5-3 mixing efficiency: 8-49
Stoichiometric reactors: 5-3 overview: 8-48
Stream classes specifying: 8-49
changing: 7-6 SWash: 8-48, 8-49
Stream classes: 7-6
Stream definitions T
RateFrac: 4-62
TEMA shells
Stream definitions: 4-62
HeatX: 3-10
Stream manipulators 7-4
TEMA shells: 3-10
ClChng: 7-6
thermal analysis A-18
Dupl 7-4
Thermosyphon reboilers
Mult: 7-2
RadFrac: 4-13
Stream manipulators: 7-2, 7-6
Thermosyphon reboilers: 4-13
Stream mixers
Three-phase calculations
Mixer model: 1-2
BatchFrac: 4-81
Stream mixers: 1-2
RadFrac: 4-18
Stream multiplication
Three-phase calculations: 4-18, 4-81
Mult: 7-2
Trays
Stream multiplication: 7-2
Bolles method: A-8
Stream pressure changers
bubble cap: A-9
Pump model: 6-2
downcomer specifications: A-3
Stream pressure changers: 6-2
Flexitrays: A-10
Stream splitters
float valve: A-10
FSplit: 1-5
flooding calculations: A-8
SSplit: 1-8
foaming calculations: A-10
Stream splitters: 1-5, 1-8
MultiFrac: 4-27, 4-43
Streams
PetroFrac: 4-56
combining: 1-8
Flash3: 2-4
pressure profile: A-15
splitting: 2-10, 2-12
RateFrac: 4-64
Streams: 1-8, 2-4, 2-10, 2-12
rating: A-3, A-7
Strippers 4-57
sizing: A-3, A-7
MultiFrac: 4-28
specifying: A-2
PetroFrac: 4-47, 4-51
types: A-2
RadFrac: 4-21
Trays: 4-27, 4-43, 4-56, 4-64, A-2, A-3, A-
RateFrac 4-57
7, A-8, A-9, A-10, A-15
Strippers: 4-21, 4-28, 4-47, 4-51
Tube geometry
Substream splitters
HeatX: 3-13

Tube geometry: 3-13 cavitation index: 6-26
Tube-side film coefficient characteristic equation: 6-24
HeatX: 3-13 choked flow: 6-26
Tube-side film coefficient: 3-13 flow coefficient: 6-23
Turbines flowsheet connectivity: 6-19
Compr: 6-8 overview: 6-19
MCompr: 6-13 piping geometry factor: 6-24
Pump model: 6-2 pressure drop calculation: 6-19, 6-26
Turbines: 6-2, 6-8, 6-13 pressure drop ratio factor: 6-20
pressure recovery factor: 6-22
U specifying: 6-19
Valve model: 6-19, 6-20, 6-22, 6-23, 6-24,
UA calculations
6-26
RadFrac: 4-15
Valves
UA calculations: 4-15
cycling: 10-15
Underwood's method
Heater model: 3-2
DSTWU: 4-3
Pipe model: 6-32
Underwood's method: 4-3
safety relief: 10-14
Unit operation models
types used in Pres-Relief: 10-9, 10-13, 10-
user-supplied: 9-2, 9-4, 9-8
14, 10-15
Unit operation models: 9-2, 9-4, 9-8
Valve model: 6-19
User model
Valves: 3-2, 6-19, 6-32, 10-9, 10-13, 10-14,
10-15
Fortran subroutines: 9-3
Vaporization efficiency
overview: 9-2
MultiFrac: 4-38
specifying: 9-3
PetroFrac: 4-52
User model: 9-2, 9-3
RadFrac: 4-19
User2
Vaporization efficiency: 4-19, 4-38, 4-52
Vents
Fortran subroutines: 9-5
Pres-Relief: 10-15
overview: 9-4
Vents: 10-15
specifying: 9-5
Venturi scrubbers
User2: 9-4, 9-5
VScrub: 8-29
User3
Venturi scrubbers: 8-29
VScrub
specifying: 9-7
User3: 9-6, 9-7
overview: 8-29
pressure drop: 8-30
V
rating: 8-30
Vacuum filters separation efficiency: 8-31
Filter model: 8-45 sizing: 8-30
Vacuum filters: 8-45 specifying: 8-30
Vacuum towers VScrub: 8-29, 8-30, 8-31
SCFrac: 4-7
Vacuum towers: 4-7 W
Valve model
Winn's method
calculation types: 6-19

DSTWU: 4-3 RYield: 5-7
Winn's method: 4-3 Yield reactors: 5-7
Working with Feedbl: 7-9
Working with Measurement: 7-14 Z
Working with User3: 9-6
Zone analysis
HeatX: 3-4
Y
MHeatX: 3-19, 3-20, 3-21
Yield reactors Zone analysis: 3-4, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21


Tutoriel

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Tutoriel

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Part Number: Aspen Plus® 11.

BATCHFRAC and RATEFRAC are trademarks of Koch Engineering Company, Inc.

For More Information......................................................................................................... xi

Mixers and Splitters 1-1

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • iii

Heat Exchangers 3-1

iv • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • v

Pressure Changers 6-1

vi • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • vii

viii • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

User Models 9-1

Pressure Relief 10-1

Advanced Distillation Features A-1

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Contents • ix

x • Contents Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

For More Information

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models About This Manual • xi

E-mail Support Centers E-mail

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models About This Manual • xv

Mixers and Splitters

Flowsheet for Mixing Material Streams

inlet At least two material streams

Flowsheet for Adding Heat Streams

inlet At least two heat streams

Flowsheet for Adding Work Streams

inlet At least two work streams

Flowsheet for Splitting Material Streams

inlet At least one material stream

Flowsheet for Splitting Heat Streams

inlet At least one heat stream

Flowsheet for Splitting Work Streams

inlet At least one work stream

inlet At least one material stream

This chapter describes the unit operation models for component

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-1

inlet At least one material stream

2-2 • Separators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

inlet Any number of heat streams (optional)

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-3

inlet At least one material stream

2-4 • Separators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

inlet Any number of heat streams (optional)

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-5

2-6 • Separators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

inlet At least one material stream

inlet Any number of heat streams (optional)

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-7

2-8 • Separators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-9

inlet At least one material stream

inlet No inlet heat streams

2-10 • Separators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-11

inlet At least one material stream

inlet No inlet heat streams

2-12 • Separators Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Separators • 2-13

This chapter describes the unit operation models for heat

Aspen Plus 11.1 Unit Operation Models Heat Exchangers • 3-1

Heat Water (optional)

inlet At least one material stream